1. Fanuc
  2. Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/20i/21i/210i/210is - Model B

Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/20i/21i/210i/210is - Model B Connection manual (Function) Page 232

Connection manual (Function)
B–63523EN–1/03
1. AXIS CONTROL
206
Function During synchronous
control
During composite
control
During superimposed
control
Acceleration/deceleration
control
The acceleration/decelera-
tion control for the master
axis is performed also for the
synchronous slave axes, but
different time constants are
used.
The acceleration/decelera-
tion control originally speci-
fied for one path is used also
for the other path, but differ-
ent time constants are used
(*3).
The move pulses that are ef-
fective after acceleration/de-
celeration for the superim-
posed control master axis
are added to those for the
slave axes.
Linear acceleration/decel-
eration after cutting feed in-
terpolation
Possible Possible Possible
Feedrate clamping The axes are clamped at the
feedrate of the master axis.
The axes in both paths are
clamped at the feedrate origi-
nally specified for one path
(*4).
The axes are clamped to the
feedrate specified for super-
imposed control.
Reference position return A reference position return is
possible for the master axis
unless it is in a parking state.
If the master axis is in a park-
ing state, only automatic ref-
erence position return (G28)
is possible for the master
axis. (⇒ Section 1.9.2.5)
A reference position return is
possible for axes not under
composite control. For axes
under composite control,
only an automatic reference
position return (G28) is pos-
sible.
Impossible for superimposed
control slave axes.
Second–, third–, or fourth–
reference position return
Possible (⇒ 1.9.2.5). Possible Impossible for superimposed
control slave axes.
Reference position return
check
Possible (⇒ 1.9.2.5). Possible Impossible for superimposed
control slave axes.
PMC axis control Possible for other than syn-
chronous slave axes.
Possible Possible
Polar coordinate interpola-
tion and cylindrical interpola-
tion
Possible Switching between indepen-
dent control and composite
control should be carried out
during cancel mode.
Possible
Handle interrupt Performed regardless of syn-
chronous control.
Possible for axes having
nothing to do with composite
control.
Performed regardless of su-
perimposed control (*5).
Mirror image Each signal originally be-
longing to a particular axis is
effective for that axis (*1).
Signals originally specified
for one path are effective for
the other path (*4).
Signals for the master axis
are effective as superim-
posed control pulses (*5).
Machine lock Each signal originally be-
longing to a particular axis is
effective for that axis (*1).
Signals originally specified
for one path are effective for
the other path (*4).
Signals for the master axis
are effective as superim-
posed control pulses (*5).
Restrictions imposed
during synchronous,
composite, and
superimposed control
Previous page
Next page

Contents Summary of Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/20i/21i/210i/210is - Model B Connection manual (Function)

  • Page 1FANUC Series 16*/160*/160*s-MODEL B FANUC Series 18*/180*/180*s-MODEL B FANUC Series 21*/210*/210*s-MODEL B FANUC Series 20*-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63523EN-1/03
  • Page 2• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country from where the product is exported. In this manual we have tried as much as possi
  • Page 3B–63523EN–1/03 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, suppl
  • Page 4
  • Page 5B–63523EN–1/03 PREFACE PREFACE This manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machine tool builders to design their CNC machine tools. The following items are explained for each function. 1. General Describes feature of the function. Refer to Operator’s manual as requied. 2. Signals D
  • Page 6PREFACE B–63523EN–1/03 Applicable models The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are : Model name Abbreviation FANUC Series 16i–TB 16i–TB Series 16i FANUC Series 16i–MB 16i–MB FANUC Series 160i–TB 160i–TB Series 160i FANUC Series 160i–MB 160i–MB FANUC Series 160is–TB 160is–TB Seri
  • Page 7B–63523EN–1/03 PREFACE NOTE 1 Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to some products. For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS manual (B–63522EN). 2 The specifications of each function of the F series are the same as for the M series. For the F series, read the description for the
  • Page 8PREFACE B–63523EN–1/03 D Expression of signals One address accommodates eight signals. Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD In an item where both T series and M series are described, some signals are covered with shade ( ) in the signal addr
  • Page 9B–63523EN–1/03 PREFACE D Notation of bit type and bit axis type parameters Data No. Data (#0 to #7 indicates bit position) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC D Notation of parameters other than bit type and bit axis type Data No. Data 1023 Servo axis number of a specific axis NOTE In an it
  • Page 10PREFACE B–63523EN–1/03 Related manuals of The following table lists the manuals related to Series 16i, Series 18i, Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/ Series 21i, Series 160i, Series 180i, Series 210i, Series 160is, Series 180i/210i/160is/180is/ 180is, Series 210is–MODEL B. This manual is indicated by an 210is
  • Page 11B–63523EN–1/03 PREFACE Specification Manual name number Profibus–DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62924EN Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board B–63354EN OPERATOR’S MANUAL FAST Ethernet Board/FAST DATA SERVER B–63644EN OPERATOR’S MANUAL DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63404EN PC function Screen Display F
  • Page 12PREFACE B–63523EN–1/03 Related manuals of The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR SERVO MOTOR αis/αi/βis αis/αi/βis series series Specification Manual name number FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series B–65262EN DESCRIPTIONS FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βis series B–65302EN DESCRIPTIONS FAN
  • Page 13B–63523EN–1/03 PREFACE Related manuals of The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR a series SERVO MOTOR a series Specification Manual name number FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR a series DESCRIPTIONS B–65142 FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR a series B–65150 PARAMETER MANUAL FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR a ser
  • Page 14
  • Page 15B–63523EN–1/03 Table of Contents DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1 PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1 1. AXIS CONTROL .
  • Page 16TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63523EN–1/03 1.9.3 Composite Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 1.9.4 Superimposed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 17B–63523EN–1/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.4.2 Tool Axis Perpendicular Direction Handle Feed Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 3.5 MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 3.6 HANDLE–SYNCHRONOUS FEED . . .
  • Page 18TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63523EN–1/03 6.5 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 6.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
  • Page 19B–63523EN–1/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7.1.16 AI Contour Control/AI Nano Contour Control (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 7.1.17 AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 7.1.18 AI High–p
  • Page 20TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63523EN–1/03 9.11 RIGID TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126 9.11.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 21B–63523EN–1/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS 10.4.5 Tool Center Point Control (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306 11. PROGRAM COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321 11.1 DE
  • Page 22TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.16 Multi–language Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563 12.1.17 Remote Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 23B–63523EN–1/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS 14.4.1 Input of Offset Value Measured A (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758 14.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1760 14.4.3 Inp
  • Page 24TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63523EN–1/03 17.3.3 Parameter Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910 17.3.3.1 Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910 17.3.3.2 FTP file transfer p
  • Page 25B–63523EN–1/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS 18.1.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1984 18.1.2 Trouble Diagnosis Guidance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 26
  • Page 27B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1 AXIS CONTROL 1
  • Page 281. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.1 CONTROLLED AXES General Series 16i, Series 160i, Item M series T series Series 160is No. of basic 1–path 3 axes 2 axes controlled axes 2–path 3 axes per path 2 axes per path Controlled axes 1–path Max. 8 axes Max. 8 axes expansion (Including the Cs axis) (Including
  • Page 29B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Series 21i, Series 210i, Item M series T series Series 210is No. of basic 1–path 3 axes 2 axes controlled axes Controlled axes 1–path Max. 5 axes Max. 5 axes expansion (Including the Cs axis) (Including the Cs axis) (total) Basic 1–path 2 axes 2 axes simultaneously con
  • Page 301. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 015 TOO MANY AXES COM- The number of the commanded axes MANDED exceeded that of simultaneously con- (M series) trolled axes. Correct the program. TOO MANY AXES An attempt was made to move the ma- COMMANDED chine along the ax
  • Page 31B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2 SETTING EACH AXIS 1.2.1 Name of Axes General Each axis that is controlled by the CNC (including those controlled by the PMC) must be named. Select and set names from among X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, and W (with parameter 1020). The names of the basic axes, however, ar
  • Page 321. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 With the T series, when G code system A is used, neither U, V, nor W can be used as an axis name. Only when G code system B or C is used, U, V, and W can be used as axis names. 2 The same axis name cannot be assigned to more then one axis. 3 When the secondary a
  • Page 33B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.2.2 NAMES OF AXES 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.2.2 NAMES OF AXES (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.2.2 NAMES OF AXES 21i/210i/210is (For Machining Cen
  • Page 341. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Table 1.2.2 (b) Increment system IS–C Least input increment Least command increment Metric mm 0.0001mm(Diameter) 0.00005mm system input 0.0001mm(Radius) 0.0001mm machine 0.0001deg 0.0001deg inch 0.00001inch(Diameter) 0.00005mm input 0.00001inch(Radius) 0.0001mm 0.0001d
  • Page 35B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1004 IPR ISC IPR ISC ISA NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Bit ISA, ISC The least input increment and least command increment are set. ISC ISA Least input increm
  • Page 361. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 DIAx NOTE When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before continuing operation. [Data type] Bit axis DIAx Either a diameter or radius is set to be used for specifying the amount of travel on each axis. 0 : Radius 1 : Diameter Refe
  • Page 37B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2.3 Specifying the Rotation Axis General Bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter 1006 can be used to set each axis to a linear axis or rotation axis. Bit 1 (ROSx) of parameter 1006 can be used to select the rotation axis type, A or B, for each axis. See the explanation of the para
  • Page 381. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ROSx ROTx NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Bit axis ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis. ROSx ROTx Meaning 0 0 Linear axis (1) Inch/metric
  • Page 39B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1) RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction 0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter. 1 : Specified by the sign of command v
  • Page 401. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system Unit of data Standard value Unit IS–A 0.01 36000 IS–B 0.001 360000 deg IS–C 0.0001 3600000 [Valid data range] 1000 to 9999999 Set the amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis. Note NOTE 1 Rotary axi
  • Page 41B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2.4 Controlled Axes Detach General These signals release the specified control axes from control by the CNC. When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table), these signals are selected according to whether the attachments are mounted. The signals can al
  • Page 421. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Controlled axis detach status signals MDTCH1 – MDTCH8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals notify the PMC that the corresponding axes have been released from control. These signals are provided for each control axis; the affixed number of the
  • Page 43B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL MCCx When an axis is released from control, control for the MCC signal for the corresponding servo amplifier is 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled NOTE If the servo motor for an axis is connected to a 2–axis or other multiaxis amplifier, releasing the axis from control causes se
  • Page 441. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.2.5 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis General The movement state of each axis can be output to the PMC. Signal Axis moving signals MV1 – MV8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate that a control axis is moving. The signals are
  • Page 45B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Axis moving direction signals MVD1 – MVD8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate the movement direction of control axis. They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the signal name corresponds to the control axis number.
  • Page 461. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Caution CAUTION Axis moving signals and axis moving direction signals are output in both automatic and manual operations. 1.2.6 Mirror Image General Mirror image can be applied to each axis, either by signals or by parameters (setting input is acceptable). All movement
  • Page 47B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL MI 1 1 ..... Applies mirror image to the 1st axis. 2 ..... Applies mirror image to the 2nd axis. 3 ..... Applies mirror image to the 3rd axis. : : : : The mirror image signal can be turned to “1” in the following cases: a) During offset cancel; b) When the CNC is in th
  • Page 481. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0012 MIRx The following parameter can be set at “Setting screen.” [Data type] Bit axis MIRx Mirror image for each axis 0 : Mirror image is off. 1 : Mirror image is on. Warning WARNING 1 When programmable mirror image (M series) and ord
  • Page 49B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2.7 Follow–up General When position control is disabled for the controlled axes (when the servo is off, during emergency stop, or during a servo alarm), if the machine is moved, a positional error occurs. Follow–up is a function for changing the current position of t
  • Page 501. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1819 FUPx [Data type] Bit axis FUPx To perform follow–up when the servo is off for each axis. 0 : The follow–up signal, *FLWU, determines whether follow–up is performed or not. When *FLWU is 0, follow–up is performed. When *FLWU is 1,
  • Page 51B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2.8 Servo Off (Mechanical Handle) General Place the controlled axes in the servo off state, stop the current to the servo motor, which disables position control. However, the position detection feature functions continuously, so the current position is not lost. Thes
  • Page 521. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Caution CAUTION 1 In general, interlock is applied to an axis while the servo off signal for that axis is 1. 2 When one of these signals turns to “1”, the servo motor is turned off. The mechanical clamp is done by using the auxiliary function. Set the timing for the au
  • Page 53B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2.9 Position Switch General Position switch signals can be output to the PMC while the machine coordinates along a controlled axes are within a specified ranges. Signal Position switch signal PSW01 – PSW16 [Classification] Output signal [Function] I
  • Page 541. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter D Increasing the number of position switch signals #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6901 PSF PCM EPS IGP [Data type] Bit IGP During follow–up for the absolute position detector, position switch signals are: 0 : Output 1 : Not output EPS The number of position switches
  • Page 55B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D Setting the correspondence between the position switch signals and the controlled axes 6910 Axis corresponding to the first position switch 6911 Axis corresponding to the second position switch 6912 Axis corresponding to the third position switch 6913 Axis correspond
  • Page 561. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Setting the machine coordinate ranges for which the position switch signals are output D Maximum operation range 6930 Maximum operation range of the first position switch 6931 Maximum operation range of the second position switch 6932 Maximum operation range of the t
  • Page 57B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D Minimum operation range 6950 Minimum operation range of the first position switch 6951 Minimum operation range of the second position switch 6952 Minimum operation range of the third position switch 6953 Minimum operation range of the fourth position switch 6954 Mini
  • Page 581. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.2.10 High–Speed Position Switch General The high–speed position switch function obtains the current position along an arbitrary controlled axis from the machine coordinate values and a feedback signal from the position detector, and outputs a signal if the current po
  • Page 59B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Yxx HPS08 HPS07 HPS06 HPS05 HPS04 HPS03 HPS02 HPS01 Yxx+1 HPS16 HPS15 HPS14 HPS13 HPS12 HPS11 HPS10 HPS09 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6901 IGP [Data type] Bit IGP During follow–up for the absolute position detector, position
  • Page 601. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 8565 High–speed position switch output address 1 [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 126 This parameter specifies the address of a Y signal used to notify that the axis corresponding to each high–speed position switch is within a range specified by a parameter. Th
  • Page 61B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 8570 Axis corresponding to the first high–speed position switch 8571 Axis corresponding to the second high–speed position switch 8572 Axis corresponding to the third high–speed position switch 8573 Axis corresponding to the fourth high–speed position switch 8574 Axis c
  • Page 621. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Maximum value of the operation range of the first high–speed position 8580 switch or position where the first high–speed position switch is turned on Maximum value of the operation range of the second high–speed position 8581 switch or position where the second high–sp
  • Page 63B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 These parameters set the maximum operating range for each high–speed position switch. Specifying ”maximum value < minimum value” disables the high–speed position switch from working because there is no valid operating range. NOT
  • Page 641. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Minimum value of the operation range of the fifteenth high–speed position 12245 switch or position where the fifteenth high–speed position switch is turned on Minimum value of the operation range of the sixteenth high–speed position 12246 switch or position where the s
  • Page 65B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2.11 Direction–Sensitive High–Speed Position Switch General This function monitors machine coordinate values and the direction of operations related to arbitrary controlled axes and turns on or off the output of the high–speed position switch signal. Two machine coor
  • Page 661. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 The following figure illustrates the above description. (a) Current position P a c g P1 b d f P2 e À Á Â Ã Ä Å Time (b) Current position Output signal À Ä Time (*1) This setting specifies that, when the current position passes through P1 in the ↓ direction, the high–sp
  • Page 67B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 5. If the current position starts at point e, passes across border P2, and reaches point f, the high–speed position switch becomes OFF because the passing direction is the same as defined (*2). 6. Even if the current position starts at point f, passes across border P1,
  • Page 681. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 The direction–sensitive high–speed position switch becomes ON at point A and OFF at point B. 2 The position switch does not change its state when point A or B is passed through in the direction opposite to the effective direction. 3 Specifying a nonexistent sign
  • Page 69B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8504 HE8 HE7 HE6 HE5 HE4 HE3 HE2 HE1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8505 HEG HEF HEE HED HEC HEB HEA HE9 [Data type] Bit HE1 to HEG The corresponding high–speed position switch is: 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled. (A disabled high–speed position switch alway
  • Page 701. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8516 HB8 HB7 HB6 HB5 HB4 HB3 HB2 HB1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8517 HBG HBF HBE HBD HBC HBB HBA HB9 [Data type] Bit HB1 to HBG The signal is turned off when the corresponding high–speed position switch passes through the machine coordinate positio
  • Page 71B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL WARNING 1 Be sure not to use any Y signal already used in the PMC ladder with this function. If used, the machine may behave in an unexpected manner. 2 If you want to use high–speed position switches for multiple paths, use a different Y signal output address for each
  • Page 721. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 12203 Axis corresponding to the thirteenth high–speed position switch 12204 Axis corresponding to the fourteenh high–speed position switch 12205 Axis corresponding to the fifteenth high–speed position switch 12206 Axis corresponding to the sixteenth high–speed position
  • Page 73B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Metric machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 These parameters specify the machine coordinates where each high–sp
  • Page 741. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 12244 Position where the fourteenth high–speed position switch is turned on 12245 Position where the fifteenth high–speed position switch is turned on 12246 Position where the sixteenth high–speed position switch is turned on [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment
  • Page 75B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.3 ERROR COMPENSATION 1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation General If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can be compensated in detection units per axis. Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation position at the inte
  • Page 761. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 · Interval of the pitch error compensation positions (for each axis): Parameter 3624 Procedure for displaying 1 Set the following parameters: and setting the pitch ⋅ Pitch error compensation position at the reference position (for error compensation data each axis): Pa
  • Page 77B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Explanations D Specifying the To assign the compensation positions for each axis, specify the positive compensation position direction or the negative direction relative to the compensation position No. of the reference position. If the machine stroke exceeds the speci
  • Page 781. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the compensation position No. is as follows: –400 –350 –100 –50 0 50 100 750 800 Machine coordinate (mm) Compensation position number. 33 39 40 41 42 56 Compensation values are output at the positions indicated by .
  • Page 79B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D For rotary axis ⋅Amount of movement per rotation: 360° ⋅ Interval between pitch error compensation positions: 45° ⋅ No. of the compensation position of the reference position: 60 If the above is specified, the No. of the farthest compensation position in the negative
  • Page 801. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 The following is an example of compensation amounts. No 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Compensation value +1 –2 +1 +3 –1 –1 –3 +2 +1 Pitch error compensation value (absolute value) +4 +3 Reference position 68 +2 (60) +1 68 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 (60) 61
  • Page 81B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 3622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extreme positive position for each axis NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 0 to
  • Page 821. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 The pitch error compensation positions are equally spaced to parameter No. 3624. Set the space between two adjacent positions for each axis. The minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions is limited and obtained from th
  • Page 83B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Warning WARNING 1 Compensation value range Compensation values can be set within the range from –7 x compensation magnification (detection unit) to +7 x compensation magnification (detection unit). The compensation magnification can be set for each axis within the rang
  • Page 841. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.8.6.3 Inputting pitch error compensa- 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) tion data 160is/180is (B–63534EN) III.8.6.4 Outputting pitch error com- pensation data III.11.5.2 Displaying and setting pitch error compensation
  • Page 85B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.3.2 Backlash Compensation General D Backlash compensation Function for compensating for lost motion on the machine. Set a compensation value in parameter No. 1851, in detection units from 0 to "9999 pulses for each axis. D Backlash compensation More precise machining
  • Page 861. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1800 RBK [Data type] Bit RBK Backlash compensation applied separately for cutting feed and rapid traverse 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed 1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection uni
  • Page 87B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.3.3 Straightness Compensation General For a machine tool with a long stroke, deviations in straightness between axes may affect the machining accuracy. For this reason, when an axis moves, other axes are compensated in detection units to improve straightness. This im
  • Page 881. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Example Imagine a table whose Y–axis ball screw is placed on its X–axis ball screw. If the X–axis ball screw is inclined at a certain angle because of, for example, bending, the machining precision related to the Y–axis becomes low because its ball screw is affected by
  • Page 89B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 5721 Axis number of compensation axis 1 for moving axis 1 5722 Axis number of compensation axis 2 for moving axis 2 5723 Axis number of compensation axis 3 for moving axis 3 [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Axis number (When 0, compensation is not performed.) [Valid dat
  • Page 901. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 5761 Compensation corresponding to compensation position number a of moving axis 1 5762 Compensation corresponding to compensation position number b of moving axis 1 5763 Compensation corresponding to compensation position number c of moving axis 1 5764 Compensation co
  • Page 91B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Note NOTE 1 The straightness compensation function can be used after a moving axis and its compensation axis have returned to the reference position. 2 After setting parameters for straightness compensation, be sure to turn off the NC power. 3 Set parameters for straig
  • Page 921. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Specification Three approximate straight lines are formed with four parameter–specified compensation points and compensation amounts related to the respective compensation points. Gradient compensation is carried out along these approximate straight lines at pitch erro
  • Page 93B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter 5861 Compensation point number a for each axis 5862 Compensation point number b for each axis 5863 Compensation point number c for each axis 5864 Compensation point number d for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 0 to 102
  • Page 941. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE 1 Gradient compensation is enabled after the reference position is established on the compensation axis. 2 When the parameters No.5861 – No.5864 (compensation point number a – d for each axis) are set, turn the NC off then back on. When the parameters No.5871
  • Page 95B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Setting data 1. Setting parameters Set the following parameters for each axis. Table 1.3.5 (a) Data number Description 3605#0 Bidirectional pitch error compensation, 1: Enabled / 0: Disabled 3620 Number of the pitch error compensation point of the refer- ence position
  • Page 961. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Data setting example If the direction of a manual reference position return is positive on an axis (linear axis) having the pitch error amounts shown in the figure below (Fig. 1.3.5 (b)), set the data given in the table below (Table 1.3.5 (b)). Pitch error compensation
  • Page 97B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Table 1.3.5 (d) Data Setting Description number 3605#0 1 Bidirectional pitch error compensation, 1: Enabled / 0: Disabled 3620 23 Number of the pitch error compensation point for the reference position 3621 20 Number of the most distant pitch error compensation point o
  • Page 981. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Compensation example If, in the setting example given in the previous section, the machine moves 0.0 to 40.0, 40.0 to –40.0, and –40.0 to 0.0 for a manual reference position return, pitch error compensation pulses are output as follows: Machine 0.0 5.0 15.0 25.0 35.0 4
  • Page 99B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Setting and displaying All the compensation data can be displayed and set on the conventional data screen for the pitch error compensation data. And those data can be input and output by the following methods. * Input by MDI * Input by G10 * Input and output by input/o
  • Page 1001. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 3621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each axis (In case of positive–direction movement) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 0 to 1023, 3000 to 4023 Set the number of the pitch error compensat
  • Page 101B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 3624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data
  • Page 1021. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 3626 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each axis (In case of negative–direction movement) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 0 to 1023, 3000 to 4023 When using bidirectional pitch error compen
  • Page 103B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (5) When this function is used for a rotation axis, the sum of the pitch error compensation amounts per rotation about the rotation axis must be 0 for both the positive and negative directions. (6) The function cannot be used with the inclination compensation function.
  • Page 1041. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 3621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each axis (In case of positive–direction movement) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data]
  • Page 105B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL [Valid data range] 0 to 2559, 3000 to 5559 When using bidirectional pitch error compensation, set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely negative position for each axis in the case of negative–direction movement. 1.3.7 Interpolation Type P
  • Page 1061. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Setting the parameters When interpolation type pitch error compensation is used, the following parameters are assigned the same values as those in stored pitch error compensation. – Number of the pitch error compensation point of the reference position on each axis (No
  • Page 107B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.3.8 Any of pitch error compensation, straightness compensation, and About Differences gradient compensation is applied to each compensation point based on the machine position at parameter–specified compensation intervals into among Pitch Error which the machine stro
  • Page 1081. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Straightness In straightness compensation, similarly to gradient compensation, four compensation typical pitch error compensation points (a, b, c, and d) are selected from pitch error compensation points and specified as straightness compensation points, and compensati
  • Page 109B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Up to six combinations of moving axes and compensation axes can be used in the straightness compensation function. 0 1 2 3 4 5 60 61 62 63 64 65 122 123 124 125 126 127 a b c d e .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. x y z D Up to 128 compensation points can be set per axis. D
  • Page 1101. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Display and setting of The 128–point straightness compensation data is set by the stored pitch straightness error compensation data setting screen. On this setting screen, set compensation data 128–point straightness compensation data above compensation point number
  • Page 111B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (2) Two or more compensation axes can be set for a single moving axis. Setting of Setting of moving axis compensation axis Effective magnification Parameter Setting Parameter Setting No value No value Value set in parameter 5711 1 5721 2 No.13391 Value set in parameter
  • Page 1121. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Interpolation type straightness compensation D Specification Compensation data, which is set using 128–point straightness compensation data, is divided into parts in each compensation point interval and output. D Compensation method With the 128–point straightness comp
  • Page 113B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter 5711 Axis number of moving axis 1 5712 Axis number of moving axis 2 5713 Axis number of moving axis 3 5714 Axis number of moving axis 4 5715 Axis number of moving axis 5 5716 Axis number of moving axis 6 [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 – Number of contr
  • Page 1141. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 [Valid data range] 6000 to 6767 Set the number of the straightness compensation point at the extremely negative point for each moving axis. When the value set in this parameter is out of the data range, an alarm is generated and compensation can not be performed. 13391
  • Page 115B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Alarm and message Number Message Description 5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER The parameter for straightness compensa- (ST.COMP) tion is not correct. This alarm occurs in the following case: D Invalid axis number is assigned to moving or compensation axis. D Parameter No.13881–1
  • Page 1161. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.4 The servo interface of the Series 16 features the following: Digitally controlled AC servo motor SETTINGS RELATED Motor feedback with serial pulse coders TO SERVO– (1) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses/rev CONTROLLED AXES (2) Absolute pulse
  • Page 117B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1800 CVR [Data type] Bit CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before position control ready signal PRDY comes ON 0 : A servo alarm is generated. 1 : A servo alarm is not generated. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1815 APCx APZ
  • Page 1181. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 [Data type] Bit axis DM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiplier Set value Detection multiplier DM3x DM2x DM1x 0 0 0 1/2 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 3/2 0 1 1 2 1 0 0 5/2 1 0 1 3 1 1 0 7/2 1 1 1 4 NOTE When the flexible feed gear is used, do not use these parameters. Set the numera
  • Page 119B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (2) When command multiplier is 1 to 48 Set value = 2 command multiplier Valid data range: 2 to 96 NOTE When command multiplier is 1 to 48, the set value must be determined so that an integer can be set for command multiplier. 1821 Reference counter size for each axis [
  • Page 1201. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis. If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit during movement, a servo alarm is generated, and operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency stop). Generally, set the positioning
  • Page 121B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.4.2 Absolute Position Detection General Even when the power to the CNC is turned off, a battery–powered pulse coder stores the current position. No reference position return is required when the power to the CNC is restored. Signal Absolute position detector battery
  • Page 1221. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F172 PBATL PBATZ Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1815 APCx NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit axis APCx Position detector 0: Other than absolute pos
  • Page 123B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.4.3 FSSB Setting Overview Connecting the CNC control section to servo amplifiers via a high–speed serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), which uses only one fiber optics cable, can significantly reduce the amount of cabling in machine tool electrical sections.
  • Page 1241. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Slave In an FSSB–based system, a fiber optics cable is used to connect the CNC to servo amplifiers and separate detector interface units. These amplifiers and separate detector interface units are called slaves. The two–axis amplifier consists of two slaves, and the th
  • Page 125B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL By manual setting 1, some of the following functions and values cannot be used, as described below. They should be used with automatic setting or manual setting 2. D No separate detector interface unit can be used; hence, no separate position detectors can be used. D N
  • Page 1261. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Manual setting 2 If the following parameter is set, manual setting 2 can be used for each parameter axis setting. Bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 = 1 To perform manual setting 2, set parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to 1919, 1936, and 1937. Refer to the Parameter Manual for
  • Page 127B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL FSSB display and setting procedure D Display The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB–based amplifier and axis information. This information can also be specified by the operator. 1. Press the SYSTEM function key. 2. To display [FSSB], press the next menu page key several
  • Page 1281. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D AMP . . . . amplifier type The amplifier type display consists of the letter A, which stands for “amplifier”, a number that indicates the placing of the amplifier, as counted from that nearest to the CNC, and a letter such as L (first axis) or M (second axis) indicat
  • Page 129B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (2) Axis setting screen The axis setting screen displays the information shown below: AXIS SETTING O1000 N00001 AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1–DSP CS TNDM 1 X A1–L 0 0 0 0 1 2 Y A1–M 1 0 1 0 0 3 Z A2–L 0 0 0 1 0 4 A A3–L 0 0 0 0 2 5 B A3–M 0 0 0 0 0 6 C A4–L 0 0 0 0 0 >_ MDI **
  • Page 1301. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 (3) Amplifier maintenance screen The amplifier maintenance screen displays maintenance information for servo amplifiers. This screen consists of the following two pages, PAGE either of which can be selected by pressing the PAGE or key. AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE O1000 N0000
  • Page 131B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D TEST . . . . . . . . . date of test performed on an amplifier connected to each axis Example) 010123 = January 23, 2001 D MEINTE–No. . . engineering change number for an amplifier connected to each axis D Setting On an FSSB setting screen (other than the amplifier ma
  • Page 1321. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 The amplifier setting screen displays the following items: D AXIS . . . controlled axis number For this item, enter a value of between 1 and the maximum number of controlled axes. If a number that falls outside this range is entered, the warning message FORMAT ERROR ap
  • Page 133B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D TNDM Enter odd and even numbers for the master and slave axes for tandem control. These numbers must be consecutive and in the range of between 1 and 8. If a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the message FORMAT ERROR is displayed. When the [SETING
  • Page 1341. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1905 PM2 PM1 FSL [Data type] Bit axis FSL Specifies whether to use a fast or slow interface between a servo amplifier and the servo software. 0 : Fast type 1 : Slow type There are two types of servo data transfer interfaces: fast and slow types.
  • Page 135B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1910 Address conversion table value for slave 1 (ATR) 1911 Address conversion table value for slave 2 (ATR) 1912 Address conversion table value for slave 3 (ATR) 1913 Address conversion table value for slave 4 (ATR) 1914 Address conversion table value for slave 5 (ATR)
  • Page 1361. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 f Example of axis configuration and parameter setting CNC Slave ATR Controlled Program Servo axis number No.1910 Axis axis axis name number to 1919 number (No. 1020) (No. 1023) Single–axis 1 0 1 X 1 amplifier X 2 Y 3 2 1 A Two–axis amplifier 3 Z 4 3 2 Y 4 A 2 Two–axis
  • Page 137B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL f Example of axis configuration and parameter setting when the simple electronic gearbox (EGB) function is used (EGB workpiece axis = A–axis; EGB axis = B–axis (parameter No. 7771 = 5)) CNC Slave ATR number No.1910 Axis Controlled Program Servo axis axis axis name numb
  • Page 1381. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1931 Connector number for first separate detector interface unit (FSSB setting screen only) 1932 Connector number for second separate detector interface unit (FSSB setting screen only) [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to the number of connectors in each separ
  • Page 139B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Example) Connector Connector number for number for Controlled first sepa- second sep- No.1905 No.1936 No.1937 axis rate detector arate detec- (#7, #6) interface tor interface unit unit X 1 Not used 0 0 0,1 Y Not used 2 0 1 1,0 Z Not used 1 0 0 1,0 A Not used Not used 0
  • Page 1401. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Number Message Description 460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCON- FSSB communication was interrupted. NECT The most likely causes are: 1. The FSSB communication cable is disconnected or has a broken con- ductor. 2. The amplifier power supply was turned off. 3. A low–voltage alarm c
  • Page 141B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Number Message Description 5138 FSSB : AXIS SETTING Axis setting has not been performed in NOT COMPLETE automatic setting mode. Perform axis setting using the FSSB setting screen. 5139 FSSB : ERROR The initialization of the servo was not completed normally. Probable ca
  • Page 1421. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 CNC Absolute position detection at power–on time Linear scale (incremental) Serial pulse coder (absolute position detector) Ordinary position control Fig. 1.4.4 System using tentative absolute coordinate system setting Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1801 INA [Data t
  • Page 143B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL APCx Specifies whether to use a absolute position detector, as follows: 0 : Not to use. 1 : To use. NOTE 1 When using tentative absolute coordinate system setting, set both OPTx and APCx to 1. 2 After setting any of these parameters, turn the power off then on again so
  • Page 1441. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.5 SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS 1.5.1 Machine Coordinate System General Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero point proper to the machine system. A coordinate system in which the reference position becomes the parameter-preset (N
  • Page 145B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 Set the coordinate values of the reference positions in the machine coordinate system. 1722 Rapid traverse deceleration rate at inter–rapid traverse block overlap [Data type] Byte axis [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 10
  • Page 1461. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) SYSTEM 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) SYSTEM Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE 21i/
  • Page 147B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (4) Method of specifying the workpiece coordinate system counter If the WKINC parameter (bit 4 of parameter No. 3108) has been set, pressing an axis address and the [INP.C.] soft key on the workpiece coordinate system screen in succession causes the relative coordinate
  • Page 1481. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Workpiece coordinate When the coordinate system actually set by the G92 (G50) command or system shift (T series) the automatic coordinate system setting deviates from the programmed workpiece coordinate, the set coordinate system can be shifted. Set the desired shift a
  • Page 149B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL ZPI Coordinates at the reference position when a coordinate system is set automatically 0 : Value set in parameter No. 1250 is used. 1 : For input in mm, the value set in parameter 1250 is used, or for input in inches, the value set in parameter No. 1251 is used. AWK A
  • Page 1501. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1220 External workpiece zero point offset value [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Input increment IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Linear axis (input in mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Linear axis (input in inches) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Vali
  • Page 151B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54) Workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55) Workpiece zero point offset Origin of machine coordinate system 1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed [Data type] Two–word axis
  • Page 1521. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3108 WCI [Data type] Bit WCI On the workpiece coordinate system screen, a counter input is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) SYSTEM 160is/180
  • Page 153B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.5.3 Rotary Axis Roll Over General The roll–over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis from overflowing. The roll–over function is enabled by setting bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter 1008 to 1. For an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified in t
  • Page 1541. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1008 RRLx RABx ROAx NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Bit axis ROAx The roll–over function of a rotation axis is 0 : Invalid 1 : Valid NOTE ROAx specifies the fu
  • Page 155B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Note NOTE This function cannot be used together with the indexing function of the index table (M series). Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20.2 ROTARY AXIS ROLL–OVER 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.19.2 R
  • Page 1561. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.5.4 Rotary Table Dynamic Fixture Offset (M Series) General Suppose that a workpiece has been set on the rotary table, its position has been measured, and the workpiece coordinate system has been set up. Once the rotary table rotates before cutting begins, it has conv
  • Page 157B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 2) Reference angle for the rotation axis and the corresponding reference fixture offset value Set up a certain position (reference angle) for the rotation axis and the corresponding fixture offset value. Y F X C W W: Offset value at the work- piece zero point F: Fixtur
  • Page 1581. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Operation at reset The CLR parameter (bit 6 of parameter No. 3402) and C23 parameter (bit 7 of parameter No. 3408) specify whether to cancel the fixture offset when a reset occurs. If CLR = 0 or if CLR = 1 and C23 = 1, the vector is saved before the reset occurs. If CL
  • Page 159B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL If block N2 issues G54.2P1, a vector (X = 0, Y = 10.0) for the fixture offset is calculated. This vector is treated in the same manner as for the offset value at the workpiece zero point, and at this point of time, the current position in the workpiece coordinate syste
  • Page 1601. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Fixture offset Program setting and external input/output can be performed as stated input/output below: 1) Setting a reference fixture offset value, using G10 G10L21 Pn IP; n: Fixture offset number IP: Reference fixture offset value or reference angle for an individual
  • Page 161B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Method of calculating 1) Relationships between rotation and linear axes fixture offset values (when A = 0 and B = 0) First set: 5 (B–axis), 1 (X–axis), 3 (Z–axis) First set: 4 (A–axis), 3 (Z–axis), 2 (Y–axis) First set: 0, 0, 0 (Z–axis) 2) Reference angle and reference
  • Page 1621. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Caution CAUTION 1 If parameter Nos. 7580 to 7588 or a reference fixture offset value is changed in the G54.2 mode, the new setting takes effect after the next G54.2Pn command is issued. 2 If changing the fixture offset vector causes movement, the same mode and movement
  • Page 163B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter 7580 Specifying rotation axis to which the fixture offset is to be applied (first set) 7581 Specifying linear axis 1 forming a plane to which the fixture offset is to be applied (first set) 7582 Specifying linear axis 2 forming a plane to which the fixture of
  • Page 1641. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7575 FAX [Data type] Bit axis FAX Specifies whether to enable the fixture offset for an individual axis. 0 : To disable. 1 : To enable. Alarm and message Number Message Description 5251 There is an error in the The fixture offset parameter is in
  • Page 165B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.6 SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL General A movement along an axis can be executed simply by executing a move command specified for that axis or by synchronizing the movement with another axis. Either of these two types can be selected by means of a signal sent from the m
  • Page 1661. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 WARNING 1 Before using the synchronization error check function, set identical values for the reference positions of the master and slave axes. 2 To clear the alarm, first increase the maximum synchronization error set in parameter 8314, then press the reset key. Next,
  • Page 167B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE 1 To use the synchronization compensation function, set the SOF bit, bit 7 of parameter 8301 (if only one master/slave axis pair is in sync) or SOFx bit, bit 7 of parameter 8303 (if more than one master/slave axis pair is in sync), to 1. 2 The synchronization comp
  • Page 1681. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Torque difference alarm If the master and slave axes operate independently while simple detection (M series) synchronous control is applied, the machine may be damaged. To prevent this, the torque command difference between the axes is monitored. If the difference is
  • Page 169B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 5 Connect a check board to observe torque differences. If an analog check board is used, set the rotary switch of the check board to 1, and observe signals on CH7. If the oscilloscope is a combined analog/digital model, set the DATA digit for CH1 to 5, and observe sign
  • Page 1701. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Signals for selecting the manual feed axis for simple synchronous control SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] synchronous control is performed in jog, handle, or incremental feed mode. The signal is provided for each controlled a
  • Page 171B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter T series 1010 Number of CNC–controlled axes NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., the number of controlled axes Set the maximum number of axes that can be
  • Page 1721. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Units digit in the parameter for the first axis → Set the axis number for the master axis when the first axis is used as a slave axis. Tens digit in the parameter for the first axis → Set the axis number for the master axis when the second axis is used as a slave axis.
  • Page 173B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Example: To establish reversed synchronization when using the third axis as the master axis and the fourth axis as the slave axis, set parameter No. 8312 as follows: Parameter No. 8312 (first axis) = 0 Parameter No. 8312 (second axis) = 0 Parameter No. 8312 (third axis
  • Page 1741. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8301 SOF [Data type] Bit SOF The synchronization compensation funciton under simple synchronous control (one master/slave axis pair) is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8302 ATS ATE NOTE The system power must be turned off then b
  • Page 175B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE To start the automatic setting of grid positioning, set ATSx to 1. ATSx automatically becomes 0 upon the completion of automatic setting. SOFx Specify whether to enable synchronization compensation during simple synchronous control (more than one master/slave axis
  • Page 1761. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 8313 Limit of the difference between the amount of positioning deviation of the master and slave axes (one master/slave axis pair under synchronous control) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter specifies a limit im
  • Page 177B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 This parameter is set to the reference counter difference between the master and slave axes. NOTE Upon the completion of grid positioning, the reference counter difference is set automatically. At the same time, parameter ATS (b
  • Page 1781. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 8326 Reference counter difference between the master and slave axes (more than one master/slave axis pair under synchronous control) [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 This parameter is automatically set to
  • Page 179B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL M series Number Message Description 213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN One of the following errors occurred SYNCHRO–MODE during synchronous operation (simple synchronous control): (1) The program contains a move command for the slave axis. (2) A command for jog feed, manual handle
  • Page 1801. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Diagnostic data Number Message Description 540 SYNCHRO ERROR The data represents the difference in position error between the master and slave axes during synchronous control. (One master/slave axis pair under syn- chronous control) 541 SYNCHRO ERROR The positional dif
  • Page 181B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.7 TANDEM CONTROL General If a single motor cannot produce sufficient torque to move a large table, for example, this function allows two motors to be used. By means of this function, two motors can be used to perform movement along a single axis. Positioning is carri
  • Page 1821. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 PC: Pulse coder Master Slave axis axis PC PC Power Power line line Servo Servo amplifier amplifier PWM PWM Rotor Rotor position position Current Current loop loop PRM. 2087 Speed FB PRM. 2087 Speed FB Preload (L) Preload (M) + + + + Re- Re- verse? verse? PRM. 2022 PRM.
  • Page 183B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Explanations D Axis configuration in To specify the axis configuration in tandem control, follow the procedure tandem control below: (1) Tandem control can be performed for up to four pairs of axes. (2) In terms of controlled axes, the pair of axes is handled as two se
  • Page 1841. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Preload function By adding an offset to the torque controlled by the position (velocity) feedback device, the function can apply opposite torques to the master and slave axes so that equal and opposite movements are performed for both axes. This function can reduce t
  • Page 185B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D Connection of axis The DI/DO signals, generally connected to each axis, must be connected signals only to the master axis of two axes of tandem control. The signals need not be connected to the slave axis. The following signals, however, may have to be connected depe
  • Page 1861. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 The classifications of the parameters are described below. Any parameter that is not listed in the tables for the three classifications should be processed as a parameter of type i) and, specify identical values for the master and slave axes. WARNING Note that, if diff
  • Page 187B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameters that should be set only for the Parameter No. Meaning of parameters master axes 0012#0 Mirror image 0012#7 Servo control off 1004#7 Input unit 10 times 1005#4 External deceleration in plus direction 1005#5 External deceleration in minus direction 1005#7 Serv
  • Page 1881. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameters that should be set to the same Parameter No. Meaning of parameters values for the master 1005#0 Movement before reference position return and slave axes 1005#1 Dogless reference position setting 1006#0 Rotary axis 1006#1 Machine coordinate of rotary axis is
  • Page 189B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 2087 Preload of each axis (Tcmd offset) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] (Preamplifier limit) /7282 [Valid data range] –1821 to 1821 An offset is added to a torque command to reduce backlash. Set a slightly large value than that of the friction torque of the motor.
  • Page 1901. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.8 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (T SERIES) General This function enables synchronous control, in which an axis can be synchronized with another axis. An axis can be moved in synchronization with another axis. This is done by issuing a move command for one axis (synchronous mas
  • Page 191B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Automatic setting of workpiece coordinate system D Explanation When synchronous control is started for a workpiece coordinate system, it is possible to specify the workpiece coordinate system automatically. When synchronous control for a workpiece coordinate system is
  • Page 1921. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 (2) Workpiece coordinate system for ordinary operation (Master axis workpiece coordinate value) = (parameter No. 1250 for the master axis) + (master axis machine coordinate value) D Others S If many slave axes are synchronized with one master axis, the master axis is s
  • Page 193B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Synchronous control under way signals SYN1O to SYN8O [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate each axis is being subjected to synchronous control. [Operation] These signals become “1” under the following condition: S The corresponding axi
  • Page 1941. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8162 PKUx SMRx [Data type] Bit axis SMRx Synchronous mirror–image control is: 0 : Not applied. (The master and slave axes move in the same direction.) 1 : Applied. (The master and slave axes move in opposite directions.) PKUx In the parking stat
  • Page 195B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL SCDx The positive (+) directions of the master axis and slave axis in the coordinate system in synchronous control are: 0 : Identical. 1 : Opposite. The value set in this parameter is referenced when the workpiece coordinates of the master axis are set up automatically
  • Page 1961. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Warning, Caution, and Note for synchronous control WARNING 1 When synchronous control is started or terminated, the target axes must be at a stop. 2 All axes subjected to synchronous control must have the same least command increment, detection unit, and diameter/radiu
  • Page 197B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Restrictions imposed during synchronous Function During synchronous control control Acceleration/deceleration control The same type of acceleration/decelera- tion control is performed for the synchro- nous axes, but different time constants are used. Feedrate clamping
  • Page 1981. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 WARNING If a reference position return command is issued for a synchronous master axis during synchronous control, it is executed normally for the master axis, but the slave axis does not return to their reference position (the slave axis only moves in synchronization
  • Page 199B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Terminating Synchronous control is terminated not only when the corresponding synchronous control synchronization signal becomes off but also when one of the following conditions occurs. (1) Emergency stop (2) Reset (3) Servo alarm (4) Servo off (5) Overtravel (6) Alar
  • Page 2001. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.9 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL (T SERIES (TWO–PATH CONTROL)) 1.9.1 The T series CNC has two independent control paths. For example, it can Overview be used to control two turrets of a multiple–turret lathe independently. The axes (such as X1–and Z1–axes)
  • Page 201B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (1) Synchronous control S Synchronization of an axis in one path with an axis in the other path (Example) Synchronization of the Z1–axis with the Z2–axis Turret 1 X1 ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ Workpiece Z1 Z2 (synchronized with the Z1–axis) Machining i
  • Page 2021. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 (2) Composite control S Interchanging move commands for an axis in one path with those for an axis in the other path. (Example) Interchanging commands between the X1– and X2–axes → Control both X2– and Z1–axes by commands in a path 1 program Control both X1– and Z2–axe
  • Page 203B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (3) Superimposed control S Superimposing move commands for an axis in one path on an axis in the other path (Example) Superimposing the movement of the Z1–axis on the Z2–axis Machining is performed by a Turret 1 path 1 program. X1 ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ
  • Page 2041. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Setting Parameter No. 8180 specifies which axis is to be synchronized with which axis. (Example) To synchronize the Z1–axis with the Z2–axis: Parameter No. 8180z of path 1 = 2 To synchronize the Y2–axis with the X1–axis: Parameter No. 8180y of path 2 = 1 To synchronize
  • Page 205B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (Example 2) Synchronizing the X2– and Z2–axes with the X1– and Z1–axes (balanced cutting) Z1 Turret 1 X1 ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ X2 Turret 2 Z2 (Example 3) Synchronizing the B1–axis (tail stock axis) with the Z1–axis Turret 1 X1 ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
  • Page 2061. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Master axis parking Turret 1 X1 The X2– and Z1–axes are moved by ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ commands in a path 2 program (by ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ synchronizing the Z1–axis with the Z2–axis). At this point, the Z2–axis is ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ kept in a parking state. The coordi- ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ nates of both Z1– and Z2–
  • Page 207B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Reference position If a reference position return command is issued for a synchronous master return and its check axis during synchronous control, it is executed normally for the master during synchronous axis, but the slave axis does not return to its reference positi
  • Page 2081. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Move command after If synchronous control is terminated during automatic operation, do not switching between issue a move command or coordinate system setting for the synchronous independent control and slave axis in the current block and one or two (during tool–nose r
  • Page 209B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (2) To resume the ordinary workpiece coordinate system automatically when terminating synchronous control Set parameter SPSx (parameter No. 8163) to “1”. Set parameter No. 1250 with the master axis coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system when the master axis is
  • Page 2101. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE 1 If more than one slave axis is synchronized with one master axis, the master axis is set with the workpiece coordinate system that corresponds to the current position of the first slave axis that is synchronized with the master axis. 2 The tool offset is ta
  • Page 211B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Examples of applications Suppose that a machine has the X1– and Z1–axes belonging to path 1 and the X2– and Z2–axes belonging to path 2 and that a workpiece moves along the Z1– and Z2–axes as directed by move commands. The following examples interchange commands betwee
  • Page 2121. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Spindle control The composite control function does not switch the spindle speed command or the feed per rotation command based on feedback pulses from the position coder. Therefore, the spindle speed command and feedback pulses should be switched using the following s
  • Page 213B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.9.4 The superimposed control function adds the amount of movement of an Superimposed Control axis (superimposed control master axis) in one path to an axis (superimposed control slave axis) on the other path for which ordinary move commands are being executed. This f
  • Page 2141. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Examples of applications Suppose that a workpiece on the spindle (Z1–axis) that moves along the axis is to be cut with a tool in path 1 and a tool in path 2 simultaneously. This example superimposes the amount of movement of the Z1–axis on that of the Z2–axis. Turret 1
  • Page 215B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL These special parameters are used for both master and slave axes during superimposed control. Appropriate values should be specified with the resulting feedrate taken into account. When superimposed control begins or ends during automatic operation, it is impossible to
  • Page 2161. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 If the corresponding axis is under synchronous control, it enters a parking state immediately regardless of whether the axis is moving. If a parking signal is set to “1” without specifying synchronous control, it is ignored. Composite control axis selection signal MIX1
  • Page 217B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL These signals become “0” under the following condition: S The corresponding axis is not under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control. CAUTION Whether each axis is under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control does not always match whether the correspon
  • Page 2181. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 XSI When MXC = 1, the machine coordinates along the X–axis for the other path subject to mixed control are fetched: 0 : With the sign as is 1 : With the sign inverted ZSI When MXC = 1, machine coordinates along the Z–axis for the other path subject to mixed control are
  • Page 219B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL SERx The synchronization deviation is: 0 : Not detected. 1 : Detected. NOTE When both master and slave axes move in synchronization, the positioning deviations of the corresponding axes are compared with each other. If the difference is larger than or equal to the valu
  • Page 2201. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 MCDx The axes to be replaced with each other under composite control have the coordinate systems placed: 0 : In the same direction. Simple composite control is applied. (The axes of paths 1 and 2 move in the same direction.) 1 : In opposite directions. Mirror–image com
  • Page 221B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8163 SCDx SCMx SPSx SPMx MDXx [Data type] Bit axis MDXx In mixed control, the current position (absolute/relative coordinates) display indicates: 0 : Coordinates in the local system. 1 : Coordinates in the other system under mixed control. SPMx
  • Page 2221. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8167 NLS [Data type] Bit axis NLS For an axis under composite control, acceleration/deceleration with a constant time for linear interpolation type rapid traverse (bit 4 (PRT) of parameter No. 1603) is: 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled. Example:When co
  • Page 223B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (Example 1) Synchronizing the Z2–axis with the Z1–axis Path 1 Path 2 Parameter No. 8180x 0 Parameter No. 8180x 0 Parameter No. 8180z 0 Parameter No. 8180z 2 Parameter No. 8180c 0 Parameter No. 8180c 0 Parameter No. 8180y 0 Parameter No. 8180y 0 S Exercising synchronous
  • Page 2241. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 8183 Axis under composite control in path 1 corresponding to an axis of path 2 [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... to the maximum number of control axes This parameter specifies an axis of path 1 to be placed under composite control with each axis of
  • Page 225B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (Example) Exercising composite control to replace the X1–axis with the X2–axis X1m ∆Z2m ÄÄ ÄÄ Refernce point X1 Z1m of path 1 ∆X2m ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ Zero point of the workpiece coordinate ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ system of path 2 ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ Zero point of the workpiece coordinate syst
  • Page 2261. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 If bit 5 of parameter No. 8162 MPSx is set to 1 when composite control is terminated, the workpiece coordinate system satisfying the following conditions is specified: X1 = Parameter No. 1250 of path 1 + Machine coordinate of X1 X2 = Parameter No. 1250 of path 2 + Mach
  • Page 227B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 8190 Rapid traverse rate of an axis under superimposed control [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30
  • Page 2281. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.9.7 If one of the alarms listed below occurs, it terminates synchronous, Alarms and messages composite, and superimposed control for all axes. P/S alarms Number Message Description 225 Synchronous or composite This alarm occurs under either of the control error follo
  • Page 229B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Servo alarms Number Message Description 407 Servo alarm: Excessive A positional deviation for a synchro- error nous axis exceeded the specified val- ue. (Only during synchronous control). 1.9.8 Definition of Warning, Caution, and Note 203
  • Page 2301. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Items common to synchronous, composite, and superimposed control WARNING 1 When synchronous, composite, or superimposed control begins or ends, the target axes must be at a stop. 2 All axes subjected to synchronous, composite, or superimposed control must have the same
  • Page 231B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE 1 More than one axis can be subjected to synchronous, composite, or superimposed control. On the other hand, an axis cannot be synchronized with more than one axis simultaneously. Moreover, an axis under composite control cannot be synchronized with another axis o
  • Page 2321. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Restrictions imposed during synchronous, composite, and superimposed control Function During synchronous During composite During superimposed control control control Acceleration/deceleration The acceleration/decelera- The acceleration/decelera- The move pulses that ar
  • Page 233B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Function During synchronous During composite During superimposed control control control Interlock The signals for the synchro- Signals originally specified Signals for the master axis nous master axis are effec- for one path are effective for are effective as superim-
  • Page 2341. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Reading the coordinates The following list summarizes how positional information such as during synchronous, custom macro system variables and current coordinates from the PMC composite, or window are read during synchronous, composite, or superimposed superimposed con
  • Page 235B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Status output signals for an axis under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control Status output signal During synchronous During composite During superimposed control control control Axis moving signal MVn S The master axis moving S The moving signal for an S The
  • Page 2361. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.9.9 Examples of Applications Independent control and (1) Machine configuration synchronous control of (a) Independent control the Z1– and Z2–axes Path 1 (X1– and Z1–axes) Turret 1 performs machining sepa- X1 rately from path 2 (X2– and Z1 Z2 Z2–axes). ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ À
  • Page 237B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL S To apply mirror–image synchronization (because initially the positive direction of one axis is opposite to that of the other axis), set SMRz (bit 0 of parameter No. 8162) of path 2 to “1”. S To detect out–of–synchronization (because both axes should move by the same
  • Page 2381. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 In this example, assume that M61 clamps the workpiece and sets signal G1138#1 SYNC2 to “1” and that M62 resets signal G1138#1 SYNC2 to “0” and unclamps the workpiece. NOTE It is necessary to make the speed of spindle S1 equal that of spindle S2. For example, issue spin
  • Page 239B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1. The path 2 program directs the X2– and Z2–axes, synchronizes the X1–axis with the X2–axis, and causes the X2–axis to park. The path 1 program issues no move command. 2. Composite control is performed in which move commands are switched between the X1–axis in one pat
  • Page 2401. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 N2050 T0212 ; Specifies an offset for turret 1. N2060 S1000 M4 ; Reverses the spindle. N2070 G0 X30. Z55. ; Performs machining N2080 G1 F0. 2 W- 15. ; using the X1– and Z2–axes. N2090 ······· N2100 M56 ; Terminates synchronization and parking. N1110 M201 ; N2110 M201 ;
  • Page 241B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Reference position 150.0mm of turret 1 ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ Z2 ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ X2 (2) Signal operation S Set signal G0128#0 MIX1 to “1” when composite control begins for the X2– and X1–axes. S Reset signal G0128#0 MIX1 to “0” when composite control ends. S Also reset
  • Page 2421. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 N2110 M56 ; Terminates composite control (the position of turret 1 is set up as workpiece coordinates in path 1.) N1120 M201; N2120 M201 ; Waits for composite control to be terminated. N1130 ; N2130 ; Dummy block (performing no move command) N1140 ········ N2140 ······
  • Page 243B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Independent control and interpolation between the X1– and Z2–axes and between the X2– and (1) Machine configuration Z1–axes (a) Independent control Z2 ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ Spindle S2 X2 Workpiece 2 and turret 2 Workpiece 1 and turret 1 Turret 2 are controlled by a path are c
  • Page 2441. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 (b) Interpolation between the X1– and Z2–axes and between the X2– and Z1–axes Z2 Workpiece 2 and turret 1 are controlled by a path 2 program. ÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ Spindle S2 X1 Turret 1 Turret 2 X2 ÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ Spindle S1 ÀÀÀÀÀ Workpiece 1 and turret 2 are controlled by a path 1
  • Page 245B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Z2 ÀÀÀÀÀ 180.0mm Reference position ÀÀÀÀÀ for turret 1 Reference position for turret 2 X2 X1 120.0mm 200.0mm ÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ Z1 (3) Signal operation S Set signal G0128#0 MIX1 to “1” when composite control begins for the X2– and X1–axes. S Reset signal G0128#0 MIX1 to
  • Page 2461. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 N1050 T0313 N2050 T0212 ; Selects a tool for composite control and sets the offset. N1060 G50 W120. ; N2060 G50 W120. ; Shifts the Z–axis workpiece coordinate system. N1070 S1000 M4 ; N2070 S1500 M4 ; Performs N1080 G0 X20. Z15. ; N2080 G0 X15. Z30.; machining under N1
  • Page 247B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Independent control and superimposed control (1) Machine configuration for the Z1– and Z2–axes (a) Independent control Path 1 (X1– and Z1–axes) performs machining sepa- Turret 1 rately from path 2 (X2– and Z1 X1 Z2–axes). ÀÀÀÀÀÀ Spindle S1 ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀ Spindle S2
  • Page 2481. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 S Set the feedrate along each Z–axis for superimposed control in parameter Nos. 8190z, 8191z, and 8193 of both paths. Each value to be set must be about half the one for independent control. S Set the rapid traverse time constant for each Z–axis under superimposed cont
  • Page 249B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL N1120 ······· N2120 ········ Machining under control independent of the other path WARNING When using constant surface speed control, be careful about which path has the spindle command that is effective for spindle S1. NOTE The speed of spindle S1 (feedback pulses fro
  • Page 2501. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.9.10 1.Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control cannot be started, Troubleshooting but no alarm is issued. (1) The synchronous or composite control option has not been specified. ⇒ The synchronous and composite control must be specified. (2) The G0128, G0138,
  • Page 251B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 2. The P/S225 alarm occurs when a signal for synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is initiated if: (1) An attempt was made to perform synchronous, composite, or superimposed control for an axis that was already under synchronous, composite, or superimposed c
  • Page 2521. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 (2) A move command was issued to an axis under composite control for which parameter MUMx (bit 7 of parameter No. 8162) is “1”. ⇒ No move command (either automatic or manual) can be issued to an axis under composite control for which parameter MUMx (bit 7 of parameter
  • Page 253B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 8. An axis does not move to a specified position after synchronous or composite control switching if: (1) A move command was issued within two blocks after synchronous or composite control switching. ⇒ The coordinate system in the CNC must be re–set at synchronous or c
  • Page 2541. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.10 B–AXIS CONTROL (T SERIES) General This function sets an axis (B–axis) independent of the basic controlled axes X1, Z1, X2, and Z2 and allows drilling, boring, or other machining along the B–axis, in parallel with the operations for the basic controlled axes. The X
  • Page 255B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Format D Registering operation programs G101–G100 : Starts registering the first program. G102–G100 : Starts registering the second program. G103–G100 : Starts registering the third program. G100 : Ends registering of the programs. Three operations (programs) on the B–
  • Page 2561. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Command used to start the operation To start an operation, the miscellaneous functions (M**) specified in parameters 8251 to 8253 are used. Parameter 8251: M code used to start operation of the first program Parameter 8252: M code used to start operation of the secon
  • Page 257B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Explanations D Specifying two–path One of the following three two–path control modes can be selected: control mode 1 B–axis control is executed for either tool post 1 or 2. 2 B–axis control is executed separately for tool posts 1 and 2. 3 Identical B–axis control is ex
  • Page 2581. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 G80 to G86 (canned drilling cycle) Of the canned drilling cycles supported by the CNC for machining centers, those cycles equivalent to G80 to G86 can be executed. Data can be specified in the same way as for the CNC for machining centers, except for the following poin
  • Page 259B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE 1 Range of commands of M, S, and T codes 2 An M, S, or T code must not be specified in a block containing another move command. The M, S, and T codes must not be specified in an identical block. 3 Usually, normal NC operation and B–axis operation are independent o
  • Page 2601. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Example) : G01 X10. F1000 ;  G101 (G102, G103) ;  B10. ;  G01 B–10. F500 ;  G100 ;  X–10. ;  : Irrespective of the modal information for normal operation (G01 specified in block), block  specifies G00 if the MDG bit (bit 1 of parameter 8241) is set to 0, or G01
  • Page 261B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D Specifying absolute or The amount of travel along the B–axis can be specified in either absolute incremental mode or incremental mode. In absolute mode, the end point of travel along the B–axis is programmed. In incremental mode, the amount of travel along the B–axis
  • Page 2621. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Example) : G101 ; G00 B10. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One block G04 P1500 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One block G81 B20. R50. F600 ; . . . . . . . . Three blocks G28 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One block M15 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 263B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Examples D Absolute or incremental mode Absolute or incremental mode 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 (1) (200) (2) (350) (450) ⋅ Dwell (200) (3) (350) (550) ⋅ Dwell (200) (100) ( Rapid traverse, Cutting feed, Dwell ) (***) Absolute value Incremental mode Absolute mode G101 (
  • Page 2641. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Tool offset Example) When parameter 8257 is set to 50 Auxiliary function used to cancel the offset: T50 Auxiliary functions used to adjust a tool offset: T51 to T59 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 (350) (Absolute mode) (1) (10) (20) (2) (3) (30) (4) (25) (5) (5) (6) (0) (Increm
  • Page 265B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8240 MST ABS SOV TEM REF [Data type] Bit REF Reference position return operation by G28: 0 : Always uses deceleration dogs in the same way as a manual reference position return operation. 1 : Uses deceleration dogs when a reference pos
  • Page 2661. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8242 COF [Data type] Bit COF For tool post 1 and tool post 2 (under two–path control): 0 : A separate B–axis offset value is set. 1 : A common B–axis offset value is set. 8250 Axis number used for B–axis control [Data type] Byte [Valid data rang
  • Page 267B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 8251 M code (G101) for specifying the start of first program operation 8252 M code (G102) for specifying the start of second program operation 8253 M code (G103) for specifying the start of third program operation [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 6 to 99999999 The
  • Page 2681. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Contents 5030 ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100) The end command (G110) was specified before the registration start command (G101, G102, or G103) was specified for the B–axis. 5031 ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100, G102, While a registration start command (G1
  • Page 269B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.2.7 Displaying the B–axis Opera- 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) tion State 160is/180is III.11.4.15 Setting and Displaying B–axis Tool Compensation Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.2.6 Displaying the B–axis Opera
  • Page 2701. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.11 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL/ ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL General When the angular axis makes an angle other than 90° with the perpendicular axis, the angular axis control function controls the distance traveled along each axis according to the inclination angle. For t
  • Page 271B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D Method of use The angular and perpendicular axes to which angular axis control is to be applied must be specified beforehand, using parameters (No. 8211 and 8212). Parameter AAC (No. 8200#0) enables or disables the angular axis control function. If the function is en
  • Page 2721. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8200 AZR AAC [Data type] Bit AAC 0 : Does not perform angular axis control. 1 : Performs angular axis control. AZR 0 : The machine tool is moved along the Cartesian axis during manual reference position return along the angular axis un
  • Page 273B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Note NOTE 1 For arbitrary angular axis control, if the same axis number has been specified in both parameters No. 8211 and 8212, or if a value outside the valid data range has been specified for either parameter, the angular and perpendicular axes will be as follows: A
  • Page 2741. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.12 CHOPPING FUNCTION (M SERIES) General When contour grinding is performed, the chopping function can be used to grind the side face of a workpiece. By means of this function, while the grinding axis (the axis with the grinding wheel) is being moved vertically, a con
  • Page 275B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Explanations D Chopping activated by Before chopping can be started, the chopping axis, reference position, signal input upper dead point, lower dead point, and chopping feedrate must be set using the parameter screen (or the chopping screen). Chopping is started once
  • Page 2761. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Setting chopping data Set the following chopping data: D Chopping axis: Parameter No. 8370 D Reference point (point R): Parameter No. 8371 D Upper dead point: Parameter No. 8372 D Lower dead point: parameter No. 8373 D Chopping feedrate: Parameter No. 8374 D Maximum
  • Page 277B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (2) When the lower dead point is changed during movement from the upper dead point to the lower dead point Previous upper dead point New lower dead point Previous lower dead point The tool first moves to the previous lower dead point, then to the upper dead point, and
  • Page 2781. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Servo delay When high–speed chopping is performed with the grinding axis, a servo compensation function delay and acceleration/deceleration delay occur. These delays prevent the tool from actually reaching the specified position. The control unit measures the differe
  • Page 279B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D If servo delay Servo delay compensation during a chopping operation can gradually compensation can cause increase the chopping speed. If the chopping speed is about to exceed the the chopping speed to maximum allowable chopping feedrate, it is clamped to the maximum
  • Page 2801. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Permissible error for restarting speed increase [1 mm, 0.1 inch, 1 degree] = parameter No. 8375 [1 mm/min, 0.1 inch/min, 1 degree/min] 1/7500 D Acceleration Exponential acceleration/deceleration is used for chopping axis. D Mode switching during If the mode is changed
  • Page 281B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D Move command during If a move command is specified for the chopping axis while chopping is chopping being performed, a P/S 5050 alarm is issued. D Advanced preview This function does not support the advanced preview control function. control D Program restart When a
  • Page 2821. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Chopping hold signal *CHLD [Classification] Input signal [Function] Suspends chopping. [Operation] Once this signal has been set to 0, the tool is moved from the current position to point R, thus suspending chopping. Again setting this signal to 1while
  • Page 283B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Chopping feedrate override signals *CHP0 to *CHP8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] Overrides the chopping feedrate. [Operation] The actual feedrate during chopping becomes the specified feedrate multipled by the override value specified with this
  • Page 2841. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Chopping cycle signal CHPCYL [Classification] Output signal [Function] Posts notification of a chopping cycle being performed between the upper and lower dead pionts. [Operation] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: · Upon a chopping cycle being star
  • Page 285B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8361 CMX [Data type] Bit CMX When the amount of shortage at the lower dead point becomes smaller than the value set in parameter No. 8378, clamping at the maximum chopping feedrate: 0 : Continues. 1 : Is not performed. NOTE Because clamping at t
  • Page 2861. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 8375 Maximum chopping feedrate [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C [Valid data range] Metric machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000ă 30 to 48000ă Rotation axis 1 deg/
  • Page 287B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20.6 Chopping function (G80, 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) G81.1) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) III.11.4.13 Displaying and setting chop- ping data Series 20i OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.18.2 Chopping function (For Manual Millin
  • Page 2881. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1.13 HOBBING FUNCTION (T SERIES)/ FUNCTION FOR HOBBING MACHINE (M SERIES) General Gears can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis) in sync with the rotation of the spindle (hob axis) connected to a hob. Also, a helical gear can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis
  • Page 289B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D M series G81 T _ L _ Q _ P _ ; T : Number of teeth (specifiable range: 1 to 5000) L : Number of hob threads (specifiable range: 1 to 30 with a sign) S The sign of L specifies the direction of rotation of the C–axis. S If L is positive, the C–axis rotates in the posit
  • Page 2901. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Helical gear When a helical gear is to be cut, compensation for the C–axis, according compensation to the amount of travel along the Z–axis (axial feed) and gear helix angle, is required. Helical gear compensation is performed by adding compensation pulses, calculate
  • Page 291B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D Direction of the helical 1 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 1 gear compensation (a) (b) (c) (d) +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C –Z –Z –Z –Z C : + C : + C : + C : + Z : + Z : + Z : – Z : – P : + P : – P : + P : – Compensation Compensation Compensation Compensation dir
  • Page 2921. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D C–axis servo delay The servo delay is proportional to the speed of the hob axis. Therefore, compensation in a cycle where rough machining and finish machining are performed at different hob axis speeds, compensation for the servo delay is required. The servo delay is
  • Page 293B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D Method by which the delay before change is recorded G82.4/G82 : Cancels C–axis servo delay compensation. G83.4/G83 : Applies compensation for the difference between the C–axis servo delay, observed when G83.4/G83 is specified, and the delay recorded by G84.4/G84. G84
  • Page 2941. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D C–axis synchronous D C–axis handle interrupt shift During synchronization between the hob axis and C–axis, manual handle interrupt can be performed for the C–axis. The C–axis is shifted by the amount of the handle interrupt. D Synchronous shift by programming During
  • Page 295B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D The control unit detects the positive–going edge of this signal, and can cause retraction along an axis specified using bit 0 (RTR) of parameter No. 7730 on that positive–going edge. The amount and speed of retraction are those specified in advance using parameter No
  • Page 2961. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 One–rotation position manual set signal MSPC [Classification] Input signal [Function] Shifts the one–rotation signal position of the position coder. [Operation] When this signal becomes 1, the control unit behaves as follows: D The position of the position code
  • Page 297B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Sync–with–C–axis signal HOBSYN [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates that the hob axis is in sync with the C–axis. [Operation] The signal is 1 when: D The hob axis is in sync with the C–axis (during G81.4/G81 mode). The signal is 0 when: D The hob
  • Page 2981. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 Just T series allows the second, third, or fourth spindle to be set as a hob axis. 2 This parameter is valid only when the optional multi–spindle control function is added. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7700 DPS MLT HDR CMS HBR [Data type] Bit HBR Specifies whether to
  • Page 299B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL JHD Specifies whether to enable C–axis jog and handle feed during synchronization between the C–axis and hob axis (G81.4/G81 mode). 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. DLY Specifies whether to enable C–axis servo delay compensation based on G84. 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. HBD S
  • Page 3001. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7712 Acceleration/decelerationtime constant applied to the C–axis when it is in sync with the hob axis [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 This parameter specifies an acceleration/deceleration (exponential acceleration/deceleration) time con
  • Page 301B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7730 RTRx [Data type] Bit axis RTRx Specifies whether to apply the retract function for each axis. 0 : Not applied. 1 : Applied. 7740 Retract speed for each axis [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of
  • Page 3021. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D If a servo alarm or retract–axis overtravel alarm occurs during retraction, the retraction is interrupted. If this occurs, the retract completed signal does not go 1. An alarm other than the overtravel alarm or servo alarm will not cause the retraction to be interrup
  • Page 303B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D Setting the workpiece D Always set a rotation axis as the workpiece axis (C–axis). axis (C axis) (Set RoTx (bit 0 of parameter No.1006) to 1.) D Gear ratio of spindle Set the parameter No. 7705#5 to 0, and set installation ratio with the (hobbing axis) and spindle (h
  • Page 3041. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Number Message Description 184 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN An invalid command was issued during G81.4/G81 G81.4/G81–based synchronization. 1. C–axis commands based on G00, G27, G28, G29, and G30 2. G20– or G21–based commands for switching between inch and metric inputs 3. Threa
  • Page 305B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.14 ELECTRIC GEAR BOX (M SERIES) 1.14.1 SIMPLE ELECTRIC GEAR BOX (G80, G81) General To machine (grind/cut) a gear, the rotation of the workpiece axis connected to a servo motor is synchronized with the rotation of the tool axis (grinding wheel/hob) connected to the sp
  • Page 3061. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Explanations D Synchronization control 1 Start of synchronization When synchronization mode is set with G81, the synchronization switch of the EGB function is closed, and synchronization between the tool axis and workpiece axis starts. At this time, synchronization mod
  • Page 307B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL D Example timing for starting/terminating synchronization Synchronization start com- mand (G81) Synchronization mode EGB mode confirmation signal SYNMOD Tool axis rotation com- mand (S–M03) Tool axis stop command (M05) Tool axis rotation speed Workpiece axis r
  • Page 3081. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 where Compensation angle: Signed absolute value (deg) Z : Amount of travel on the Z–axis after the specification of G81 (mm or inch) P : Signed gear helix angle (deg) T : Number of teeth Q: Module (mm) or diametral pitch (inch–1) The values of P, T, and Q are to be pro
  • Page 309B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 2 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 0 (Items (a) to (d) are the same as for 1.) (e) (f) (g) (h) +Z –C +Z –C +Z –C +Z –C –Z –Z –Z –Z C : – C : – C : – C : – Z : + Z : + Z : – Z : – P : + P : – P : + P : – Compensation Compensation Compensation Compensation direct
  • Page 3101. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Move command during During synchronization, a move command can be programmed for the synchronization workpiece axis and other servo axes. Note, however, that incremental command programming for cutting feed must be used to specify a workpiece axis move command. Limit
  • Page 311B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Signal Retract signal RTRCT [Classification] Input signal [Function] Performs retraction for the axis specified with a parameter. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit performs the following: · Performs retraction on the axis specified wit
  • Page 3121. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G066 RTRCT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F065 SYNMOD RTRCTF Parameter When setting the parameters for the simple electric gear box, note the following: (1) Set SYNMOD (bit 0 of parameter No. 2011) to 1 for the workpiece axis and EGB axi
  • Page 313B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 2) Re–set the parameters related to the EGB. Parameter No. 2011 bit 0 = 1 (for both the workpiece and EGB axes) Parameter No. 2011 bit 1 = 1 (for both the workpiece and EGB axes)(Note) NOTE Set this parameter when applying feed–forward control to rapid traverse also. (
  • Page 3141. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7709 Number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear [Data type] Byte [Valid range] 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes This parameter sets the number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear. If the value out of the valid range is specified, 3 (the 3rd axis)
  • Page 315B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 7741 Retracted distance for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Valid range] –99999999 to 99999999 Valid range Unit of data IS–B IS–C Millimeter input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch This parameter sets the retracted distance for each axis. 7771 N
  • Page 3161. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7773 Number of position detector pulses per rotation about workpiece axis [Data type] 2–word [Data unit] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the number of pulses per rotation about the workpiece axis (on the fourth axis side), for t
  • Page 317B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.14.2 Spindle Electronic Gear Box (M series) General A gear can be shaped (grind/cut) by the synchronization of the workpiece axis rotation to the tool axis (grinding axis /hob) rotation by using two spindles as a tool axis and a workpiece axis. To synchronize these t
  • Page 3181. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 CNC 2nd spindle (Slave) Position feedback – Velocity feedback + + – + Built–in Work– Cs Position control Velocity control (PI) motor & piece command Position gain + Detecto (Gear) + K2/K1 : Synchronous ratio a : Feedforward ratio αs EGB mode K2 K1 Position feedback Vel
  • Page 319B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter setting The following parameters should be set for the Spindle EGB control. (1) Master axis number (Parameter No.7771) * Only Cs contour axis (2) Slave axis number (Parameter No.7710) (3) Number of position detector pulses per rotation about master axis (Para
  • Page 3201. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Synchronization start command (G81) Synchronization mode Synchronization mode signal SYNMOD Tool axis rotation command Tool axis stop command Tool axis rotation speed Work axis rotation speed Synchronization cancel command (G80) Fig. 1.14.2(b) Example timing for
  • Page 321B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Program example Axis configuration X,Y,Z, B (Cs axis: tool axis/master axis), C (Cs axis: workpiece axis/slave axis) O1000 ; N00010 G80 ; N00020 G28 G91 B0 C0 ; Performs reference position return operation of the tool and the workpiece axis. N00030 G81 T20 L1 ; Starts
  • Page 3221. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 The direction of helical gear compensation is determined by bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No.7700 (1 is usually specified). The compensation direction is shown in figure 1.14.2(c). (1) When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No.7700 is 1. (a) (b) (c) (d) +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C –Z –Z
  • Page 323B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Synchronous ratio The synchronous ratio of the Spindle EGB control is internally represented using a fraction. The fraction is calculated from T and L command in G81 block and the number of position detector pulses per rotation about the tool and the workpiece axis (pa
  • Page 3241. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Position feedback – 0 36000 Slave axis *CMR Cs command (*1) Motor Workpiece Detector 0 + + K2/K1 : Synchronous ratio EGB *K2/K1 36000 *(1/10) 360000 + – Master axis *CMR Cs command (*1) Motor Tool axis Detector 360000 360000 Fig. 1.14.2(d) Pulse distribution As Fig. 1.
  • Page 325B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter D Parameters for serial spindle 4036 Feed forward coefficient for serial spindle [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 10000 Feed forward coefficient for Cs contour control axis is set. Specified value is smaller than or equal to 100 : In units of 1% Speci
  • Page 3261. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Parameters for synchronous control #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7700 HDR HBR [Data type] Bit axis HBR The synchronization is : 0 : Canceled by reset. 1 : Not canceled by reset. 1 is usually specified. HDR Setting of the direction for compensating a helical gear (1 is usua
  • Page 327B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE After setting this parameter, the power must be turned off then on again. 7772 Number of position detector pulses per rotation about tool axis [Data type] 2–Word [Data unit] Detection unit [Valid data range] Set 360000 to this parameter. This parameter specifies t
  • Page 3281. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7741 Retracted distance for each axis [Data type] 2 Word axis [Unit of data] Unit of data Increment system IS–B IS–C Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 This parameter sets the retracted distance
  • Page 329B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Retract completion signal RTRCTF [Classification] Output signal [Function] Posts notification of the completion of retraction. [Operation] The signal becomes ”1” when : S Upon the completion of retraction. The signal becomes ”0” when : S Upon the completion of
  • Page 3301. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Cautions 1) The EGB synchronization is not canceled by RESET when bit 0 (HBR) of parameter No.7700 is set to 1. Set 1 to this parameter usually. 2) The EGB synchronization performed even under the following operation of the slave axis. – Interlock – Feed hold – Machine
  • Page 331B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 12) The synchronization is not maintained in servo off status of the slave axis. 13) When the EGB control is used, the drilling canned cycle cannot be used. 14) The actual feedrate is displayed without the flexible synchronous pulse. Reference item CONNECTION MANUAL 1.
  • Page 3321. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Command sequence Spindle speed Synchronization Synchronization start command cancellation command Workpiece– axis speed Synchronization state Acceleration Deceleration G81R1 command execution Acceleration Synchronization–set G80R1 command execution Deceleration 1. Spec
  • Page 333B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Acceleration/deceleratio n plus automatic phase synchronization type Format G81 T _ L _ R2 ; Synchronization start G80 R2 ; Synchronization end T : Number of teeth (range of valid settings: 1–1000) L : Number of hob threads (range of valid settings: –200 to +200, exclu
  • Page 3341. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 2. Specify G81R2 to start synchronization. When G81R2 is specified, the workpiece axis is accelerated with the acceleration according to the acceleration rate set in the parameter (No.2135, 2136 or No.4384, 4385). When the synchronization speed is reached, phase synchr
  • Page 335B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE 1 The one–rotation signal used for automatic phase synchronization is issued not by the spindle position coder but by the separate pulse coder attached to the spindle and used to collect EGB feedback information. This means that the orientation position based on t
  • Page 3361. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Program example D Acceleration/deceleratio M03 : Clockwise spindle rotation command n type G81 T_ L_ R1 ; Synchronization start command G00 X_ ; Positions the workpiece at the machining position. Machining in the synchronous state G00 X_ ; Retract the workpiece from th
  • Page 337B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Signal Synchronization mode signal SYNMOD [Classification] Output signal [Function] Confirmation of the EGB synchronization [Operation] The signal becomes ”1” when : S The EGB synchronization is active. The signal becomes ”0” when : S The EGB synchronization is
  • Page 3381. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE After setting this parameter, the power must be turned off then on again. 7776 Speed for workpiece–axis automatic phase synchronization [Data type] 2–Word [Valid data range] 0 to 24000 [Unit of data] Unit of data Increment system IS–B IS–C Deg/min 10.0 1.0 When th
  • Page 339B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 4002 CSDRCT (This parameter is for spindle EGB.) [Data type] Bit CSDRCT SFR/SRV function in the Cs contouring mode If you use the spindle EGB function, this bit must be set to ”1”. In this case, the signal SFR/SRV only turn on/off the excitation
  • Page 3401. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 4385 Time constant related to the maximum speed in workpiece–axis acceleration/deceleration for the electronic gear box automatic phase synchronization function for the function of Spindle EGB. (This parameter is for spindle EGB.) 2136 Time constant related to the maxi
  • Page 341B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.14.4 Electronic Gear Box 2 Pair (M Series) General The Electronic Gear Box is a function for rotating a workpiece in sync with a rotating tool, or to move a tool in sync with a rotating workpiece. With this function, the high–precision machining of gears, threads, an
  • Page 3421. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE A sampling period of 1 ms is applied when feedback pulses are read from the master axis; the synchronization pulses for a slave axis are calculated according to synchronization coefficient K; and the pulses are specified for position control of the slave axis. Syn
  • Page 343B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE 1 A manual handle interruption can be issued to the slave axis or other axes during synchronization. 2 The maximum feedrates for the master axis and the slave axis are limited according to the position detectors used. 3 An inch/metric conversion command (G20 or G2
  • Page 3441. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Description of A command compatible with that for a hobbing machine can be used as commands compatible a synchronization command. with those for a hobbing Such a command cannot be used when a canned–cycle option is provided. machine Specify which axes starts synchroniz
  • Page 345B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Synchronization of all synchronized axes is canceled. When a synchronization cancellation command is issued, the absolute coordinates for the slave axis are updated according to the amount of travel during synchronization. For a rotation axis, the value obtained by rou
  • Page 3461. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Compensation direction Parameter HDR (bit 2 of No. 7700) in helical gear compensation When the HDR bit is set to 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) +Z +C +C +C +C C : +, Z : +, P : + C : +, Z : +, P : – C : +, Z : –, P : + C : +, Z : –, P : – –Z Compensation direction : + Compensatio
  • Page 347B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Sample programs (1) When the master axis is the spindle, and the slave axis is the C–axis 1. G81.5 T10 C0 L1 ; Synchronization between the master axis and C–axis is started at the ratio of one rotation about the C–axis to ten rotations about the master axis. 2. G81.5 T
  • Page 3481. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 (3) When two groups of axes are synchronized simultaneously Based on the controlled axis configuration described in Item “Configuration examples of controlled axes”, the sample program below synchronizes the spindle with the V–axis while the spindle is synchronized wit
  • Page 349B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL (4) Command specification for hobbing machines Based on the controlled axis configuration described in Item “Configuration examples of controlled axes”, the sample program below sets the C–axis (in parameter 7710) for starting synchronization with the spindle according
  • Page 3501. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 When Kn or Kd exceeds its allowable range above, an alarm is issued. In conversion to the detection unit, when the CMR (command multiplication: parameter 1820) is a fraction or when inch/millimeter conversion is used, the fraction is directly converted without modifica
  • Page 351B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Kn –360000 5 1 –5 = = Kd 72000 10 2 Both Kn and Kd are within the allowable range. No alarm is output. (c) Command : G81.5 T1 C3.263 ; Operation : Synchronization between the spindle and C–axis is started at the ratio of a 3.263–degree rotation about the C–axis to one
  • Page 3521. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Operation : Synchronization between the spindle and V–axis is started at the ratio of a 1.00 mm movement along the V–axis per spindle rotation. Pm : (Number of pulses per spindle rotation) 1 rotation → 72000 1 Ps : (Amount of V–axis movement) CMR → 1000 5 Kn 1000 5 5 =
  • Page 353B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Then, the C–axis detection unit is 0.002 degree. The V–axis detection unit is 0.002 mm. In this case, the synchronization ratio (Kn, Kd) is related with a command as indicated below. Here, let Pm and Ps be the amounts of movements represented in the detection unit for
  • Page 3541. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 When the retract signal goes on during automatic operation, retract operation is performed, and automatic operation is stopped. 2 Automatic operation cannot be performed in retraction. Signal Retract signal RTRCT [Classification] Input signal [Function]
  • Page 355B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL EGB mode signal SYNMOD [Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports that synchronization is being executed by EGB (G81). [Operation] This signal is set to ”1” in the following case. S During synchronization caused by EGB This signal is set to ”0” in the fo
  • Page 3561. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameters The following table lists the parameters related to EGB. Data Description number 1006 # 0 To specify a speed with L in a slave–axis amount of travel in a synchronization command, the slave axis 1006 # 1 needs to be set to a rotation axis (a parameter ROT, bi
  • Page 357B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Note the following points when specifying parameters for the electronic gear box. 1. Arrange the controlled axes such that a slave axis appears before a dummy axis. (Example) Example of incorrect setting Example of correct setting Servo axis Servo axis Axis name number
  • Page 3581. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes Specify the number of the servo axis that corresponds to each control axis. Normally, set each servo and control axis to the same numbers. Fo
  • Page 359B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL HDR Specifiy the direction for compensating a helical gear. (Usually, set 1.) Example: When the rotation direction of the C–axis is the negative (–) direction, and a left–twisted helical gear is cut: 0 : Set a negative (–) value in P. 1 : Set a positive (+) value in P.
  • Page 3601. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7709 Axial–feed axis number in helical compensation [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes This parameter sets the number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear. If the value out of the valid range is specified, 3 (the 3rd axi
  • Page 361B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 7740 Retract feedrate [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000 30 to 48000 This parameter sets the feed
  • Page 3621. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7783 Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB slave axis rotation [Data type] 2–word axis [Data unit] detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 999999999 Set the number of pulses from the position detector per EGB slave axis rotation. Specify the number of puls
  • Page 363B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.15 FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL (M SERIES) General This function is provided for machines that require synchronizing two or more different gear ratios, such as a hobbing machine. The function can simultaneously place up to four sets in synchronization independent
  • Page 3641. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter setting The flexible synchronization control parameters are listed below: (1) Denominators determining gear ratios (parameter Nos. 5681, 5683, 5685, and 5687) (2) Numerators determining gear ratios (parameter Nos. 5680, 5682, 5684, and 5686) (3) Indexes to ge
  • Page 365B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Program example Axis configuration of X, Y, Z, B (Cs axis), C, U, and V Group A: Master axis B, slave axis C, gear ratio of 1:50, M50 for turning on, M51 for turning off Group B: Master axis Z, slave axis C, gear ratio of 1:5, M52 for turning on, M53 for turning off Gr
  • Page 3661. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 5) Issuing G28, G30, G30.1 or G53 during synchronization control results in the PS010 (IMPROPER G CODE) alarm being issued. Before issuing G28, G30, G30.1 or G53, cancel synchronization control. 6) This function is disabled when the machine is in the RISC–based HPCC mo
  • Page 367B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 15) If the spindle is synchronized with the servo motor, it is necessary to cause the loop gain of the servo motor to match that of the spindle in order to make their positional deviations equal. 16) The actual speed display does not take synchronization pulses into ac
  • Page 3681. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 5680 Numerator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization (group A) 5681 Denominator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization (group A) 5682 Numerator determining gear ratio for flexible synchronization (group B) 5683 Denominator determining gear ra
  • Page 369B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Signal Flexible synchronization control mode select signals MTA, MTB, MTC, and MTD [Classification] Input signal [Function] Select flexible synchronization control. [Operation] 1) Synchronization is started by setting these signals to 1. 2) Synchronizatio
  • Page 3701. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE In flexible synchronization mode, reference position return cannot be performed. If REF mode is set, the warning message MODE ERROR is displayed. 344
  • Page 371B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.16 GENERAL PURPOSE RETRACT General When the retract signal RTRCT is turned to ”1” (the rising edge is detected) in auto mode or manual mode, the axis set in bit 0 (RTR) of the parameter No.7730 moves (retracts) by the amount set in the parameter No.7741. Upon the com
  • Page 3721. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 (2) The stopping of retract by the reset RTRCT RTRCTF Moving Retract movement stopping RST Signal Retract signal RTRCT [Classification] Input signal [Function] Performs retraction for the axis specified with a parameter. [Operation] When this signal turns to ”
  • Page 373B–63523EN–1/03 1. AXIS CONTROL Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G066 RTRCT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F065 RTRCTF Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7730 RTRx [Data type] Bit axis RTRx The retract function is : 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 7740 Feedrate during retraction for each axis [Data type] 2
  • Page 3741. AXIS CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Notes (1) Feedrate override is not supported for retracting. (2) Interlock is supported for retracting. (3) Machine lock is supported for retracting. Retract completion signal is output when retract operation is completed in the machine lock condition. (4) Feed hold is
  • Page 375B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 349
  • Page 3762. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP General If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, the machine movement stops in a moment. Red EMERGENCY STOP Fig. 2.1 (a) EMERGENCY STOP This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the mac
  • Page 377B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Emergency stop limit switch Emergency stop +X =X +Y =Y +Z =Z +4 =4 Relay power Emergency stop temporary release supply EMG SK Spark killer Fig. 2.1 (b) Connection of emergency stop limit switch The distance from the position where the dynamic brake is app
  • Page 3782. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X008 *ESP #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G008 *ESP Reference item FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series B–65142E DESCRIPTIONS FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series B–65262EN DESCRIPTIONS 352
  • Page 379B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.2 CNC READY SIGNAL General When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the CNC ready signal is set to 1. Signal CNC Ready Signal MA [Classification] Output signal [Function] The CNC ready signal indicates that the CNC is ready. [O
  • Page 3802. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Servo Ready Signal SA [Classification] Output signal [Function] Signal SA turns to “1” when the servo system is ready to operate. For an axis that is to be braked, release the brake when this signal is “1” and apply the brake when this signal is
  • Page 381B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.3 OVERTRAVEL CHECK 2.3.1 Overtravel Signal General When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops as a result of tripping the limit switch, and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed. Signal O
  • Page 3822. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 The following shows the deceleration distance at overtravel. (i) Rapid traverse Command pulse deceleration V ÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄ Servo system delay ÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄ VR t ÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄ *+La limit switch t1 t2 TR TR 1 L1=VR(t1+t2+ +TS) · [mm or inch] 2 60000 L1:Decelerati
  • Page 383B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION D Releasing overtravel First, move the tool into a safe zone under manual operation. Then press the reset button to reset the alarm. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1 G116 *–L8 *–L7 *–L6 *–L5 *–L4 *–L3 *–L
  • Page 3842. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1 General When the tool tries to moved beyond a stored stroke check limit, an alarm is displayed and the tool is decelerated and stopped. When the tool enters a forbidden zone and an alarm is generated, the tool may only be moved
  • Page 385B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Axis direction dependent stored stroke limit switch signal +EXL1 to +EXL8 –EXL1 to –EXL8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] Switches between stroke limit 1–I (parameter No. 1320 and No. 1321) and stroke limit 1–II (parameter No. 1326 and
  • Page 3862. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Stroke limit reached signals +OT1 to +OT8 –OT1 to –OT8 (M series) [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notify that the tool is about to enter the forbidden area of stored stroke check 1. Each direction of each controlled axis has one st
  • Page 387B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1300 BFA LZR LMS NAL [Data type] Bit NAL Specifies whether to issue an alarm related to stored stroke check 1, as follows: 0 : To issue an alarm. 1 : Not to issue an alarm; the stroke limit reached signal F124 or F126 is
  • Page 3882. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 CAUTION In the cases below, the automatic release function is disabled. To release an alarm, a reset operation is required. 1 When a setting is made to issue an alarm before a stored stroke limit is exceeded (bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300) 2 When an a
  • Page 389B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 1326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis 1327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction each axis [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Me
  • Page 3902. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE 1 Parameter LZR (bit 6 of No. 1300) selects whether each check becomes effective after the power is turned on and manual reference position return or automatic reference position return by G28 has been performed or immediately after the power is
  • Page 391B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.3.3 Stored Stroke Check 2, 3 General Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2,and stored stroke check 3. ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇ
  • Page 3922. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Stored stroke check 2 The stored stroke check 2 values are set either by parameters (Nos. 1322, 1323) or by command. The foribidden area may be defined as the area external to the limits, or internal to the limits. This is determinal by the value in param
  • Page 393B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ A(X1, Y1, Z1) ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ B(X2, Y2, Z2) ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ X1>X2, Y1>Y2, Z1>Z2 X1–X2> ζ (In least command increment) Y1–Y2> ζ (In least command increment) Z1–Z2> ζ (n least command increment) ζ is the distance the tool travels in 8 ms. It is 2000 in
  • Page 3942. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 B The position of the tool after reference position return b ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ A a ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Forbidden area boundary ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Fig. 2.3.3 (h) Setting the forbidden area (M series) D Forbidden area over– Forbidden areas can be set to overlap. ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
  • Page 395B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION D Change from G23 to When G23 is switched to G22 while the tool is in a forbidden area, the G22 in a forbidden area following results. (1) When the forbidden area is internal to the limits, an alarm is generated in the next move. (2) When the forbidden ar
  • Page 3962. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 BFA When a command is issued where the resulting motion would exceed the value of a stored stroke check 1, 3 0: An alarm is generated after the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded. 1: An alarm is generated before the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded. #7 #6 #5 #4 #
  • Page 397B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION WARNING For axes with diameter specification, a diameter value must be set. 1324 Coordinate value of stored stored check 3 in the positive direction on each axis 1325 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negatice direction on each axis [Data t
  • Page 3982. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Warning WARNING 1 Whenever the two check limits are set to the same value, the following results are seen. (1)In the case of stored stroke check 1, all areas are prohibited. (2)In the case of stored stroke check 2 or 3, no areas are prohibited. 2 Whenever
  • Page 399B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.3.4 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier (T series) General The chuck/tailstock barrier function prevents damage to the machine by checking whether the tool tip interferes with either the chuck or tailstock. Specify an area into which the tool may not enter (entry–p
  • Page 4002. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G060 *TSB Parameter D Profile of a chuck 1330 Profile TY of a chuck [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 or 1 0 : Chuck which holds a workpiece on the inner surface 1 : Chuck which holds a workpiece on the outer sur
  • Page 401B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Chuck which holds a workpiece on Chuck which holds a workpiece on the outer surface (TY=1) the inner surface (TY=0) X X L A L A W1 L1 W W W1 CX CX L1 Z Z CZ CZ Zero point of Zero point of the workpiece the workpiece coordinate coordinate system system Fig
  • Page 4022. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 1341 Length of a tailstock (L) 1342 Diameter of a tailstock (D) 1343 Length of a tailstock (L1) 1344 Diameter of a tailstock (D1) 1345 Length of a tailstock (L2) 1346 Diameter of a tailstock (D2) 1347 Diameter of the hole of a tailstock (D3) [Data type] T
  • Page 403B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Symbol Description TZ Z–axis coordinate of a tailstock L Length of a tailstock D Diameter of a tailstock (diameter input) L1 Length of a tailstock (1) D1 Diameter of a tailstock (1) (diameter input) L2 Length of a tailstock (2) D2 Diameter of a tailstock
  • Page 4042. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Warning WARNING 1 Invalid settings will result in the absence of a prohibited area, as follows: 1) In the setting of the chuck shape, if the jaw length (parameter No. 1331) is less than the grasp length (parameter No. 1333) or if the jaw width (parameter
  • Page 405B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.3.5 Tool Post Interference Check (T series (Two–path Control)) General When two tool posts machine the same workpiece simultaneously, the tool posts can approach each other very closely. If the two tool posts interfere with each other due to a program e
  • Page 4062. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Tool post interference alarm signal TIALM [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates that the tool post interference alarm is activated. [Output condition] This signal goes “1” when: (i) The control unit judges that the two tool posts wi
  • Page 407B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F064 TIALM TICHK Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8140 ZCL IFE IFM ITO TY1 TY0 [Data type] Bit TY0, TY1 This parameter specifies the relationship between the coordinate systems of the two tool posts. (1) When TY1=0
  • Page 4082. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 IFE Specifies whether interference between tool posts is checked. 0: Checked 1: Not checked ZCL Specifies whether interference along the Z axis is checked while checking interference between tool posts. 0: Checked 1: Not checked (Only interference along t
  • Page 409B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Alarm and message Number Message Description 169 ILLEGAL TOOL GEOME- Invalid tool figure data in interference TRY DATA check. 508 INTERFERENCE : +X An interference alarm has been gen- INTERFERENCE : +Z erated when X or Z axis is moving in the positive dir
  • Page 4102. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.20.3 Tool post interference check 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) 160is/180is 2.3.6 Stroke Limit Check Before Move General In automatic operation, before executing the move command by a given block, th
  • Page 411B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Example 2) End point Prohibited area defined by stored stroke check 2 or 3 a The tool is stopped at point (a) stipulated Start point by stored stroke check 2 or 3. Prohibited area defined by stored stroke check 2 or 3 End point Start point Immediately upo
  • Page 4122. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 D Cyrindrical interpolation In cylindrical interpolation mode, no check is made. mode D Polar coordinate In polar coordinate interpolation mode, no check is made. interpolation mode D Angular axis control When the angular axis control option is selected,
  • Page 413B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Alarm and message Number Message Contents The stroke limit check made prior to perform- ing movement reveals that the end point of a block is located within the stroke limit prohib- 510 OVER TRAVEL : +n ited area in the positive direction of the n– axis.
  • Page 4142. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 2.3.7 Rotation Area Interference Check General This function checks for interference among the tool post and chucks and stops the machine safely. Three major interference check areas can be set, each of which is specified by using rectangles. Two of the t
  • Page 415B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Operation There are three possible interference check patterns as follows. D Areas A and B A check is made to see whether an interference between areas A and B occurs as a result of the movement and rotation of area A and the movement and rotation of area
  • Page 4162. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 D Areas B and C A check is made to see whether the movement and rotation of area B interferes with area C. Interference check area A ËË ËË ËË Interference check Interference check area C Interference check area B Each interference check is performed as re
  • Page 417B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION D Example Axes along which interference check area A is displaced in parallel: X–axis, Z–axis Rotation axis: B–axis When a movement along the X–axis in the negative direction causes an interference with interference area C Interference check area A Moveme
  • Page 4182. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 Alarms cannot be issued before an interference check area is exceeded. Therefore, you need to define areas with enough allowance according to the feedrate. The distance of movement along an axis until an interference is determined (the distance of
  • Page 419B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 14900 IC4 IC3 IC2 IC1 IRB IRA IB2 IB1 [Data type] Bit IB1 Movement direction of group B (the first axis) 0 : The direction of movement along the first axis of the group–B movement plane is the same as the direction of mov
  • Page 4202. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 The processing time is a multiple of 8. If the calculated value of the processing time is smaller than 8, the processing time is assumed to be 8 msec. Setting IC4 IC3 IC2 IC1 16 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 1 0 12 0 0 1 1 16 0 1 0 0 20 0 1 0 1 24 0 1 1 0 28 0
  • Page 421B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 14911 Axis number of the second axis of the plane on which group A is moved [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] [Valid data range] 0 to the number of controlled axes This parameter sets the axis number of the second axis of the group–A movement plane. Set the
  • Page 4222. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 14915 Axis number of the rotation axis on which group B is rotated [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] [Valid data range] 0 to the number of controlled axes This parameter sets the axis number of a rotation axis used for rotating group B. If there is no relev
  • Page 423B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 14922 Maximum point of rectangle 1 of group A in the second axis 14923 Minimum point of rectangle 1 of group A in the second axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.
  • Page 4242. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 14926 Maximum point of rectangle 2 of group A in the second axis 14927 Minimum point of rectangle 2 of group A in the second axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.
  • Page 425B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 14930 Maximum point of rectangle 3 of group A in the second axis 14931 Minimum point of rectangle 3 of group A in the second axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.
  • Page 4262. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 14934 Maximum point of rectangle 4 of group A in the second axis 14935 Minimum point of rectangle 4 of group A in the second axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.
  • Page 427B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 14940 Maximum point of rectangle 1 of group B in the first axis 14941 Minimum point of rectangle 1 of group B in the first axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00
  • Page 4282. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 14944 Maximum point of rectangle 2 of group B in the first axis 14945 Minimum point of rectangle 2 of group B in the first axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00
  • Page 429B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 14948 Maximum point of rectangle 3 of group B in the first axis 14949 Minimum point of rectangle 3 of group B in the first axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00
  • Page 4302. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 14952 Maximum point of rectangle 4 of group B in the first axis 14953 Minimum point of rectangle 4 of group B in the first axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00
  • Page 431B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 14956 Rotation center in the first axis when group B is rotated 14957 Rotation center in the second axis when group B is rotated [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.0
  • Page 4322. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 14962 Maximum point of rectangle 1 of group C in the second axis 14963 Minimum point of rectangle 1 of group C in the second axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.
  • Page 433B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 14966 Maximum point of rectangle 2 of group C in the second axis 14967 Minimum point of rectangle 2 of group C in the second axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.
  • Page 4342. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 14970 Maximum point of rectangle 3 of group C in the second axis 14971 Minimum point of rectangle 3 of group C in the second axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.
  • Page 435B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 14974 Maximum point of rectangle 4 of group C in the second axis 14975 Minimum point of rectangle 4 of group C in the second axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.
  • Page 4362. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 D CNC axis configuration 1st axis X–axis Axis along which check area A is moved 2nd axis Z–axis Axis along which check area A is moved 3rd axis C–axis 4th axis Y–axis 5th axis B–axis Axis on which check area A is rotated 6th axis A–axis Axis along which c
  • Page 437B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION D Rectangles that make up After positioning the B–axis at the reference angular displacement and interference check area performing reference position return for the X– and Z–axes, set rectangles A that make up interference check area A. Interference chec
  • Page 4382. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Similarly, measure the distances for rectangles 2 and 3. Parameter No. 14924 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 2 in 1st axis Parameter No. 14925 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 2 in 1st axis Parameter No. 14926 = Distance of maximum point
  • Page 439B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION D Setting interference In the same manner as interference check area A, set interference check check area B area B as follows. After performing reference position return along the A–axis, measure the rectangle data that makes up the interference check are
  • Page 4402. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter No. 14952 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 4 in 1st axis Parameter No. 14953 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 4 in 1st axis Parameter No. 14954 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 4 in 2nd axis Parameter No. 14955 = Distance
  • Page 441B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION D Setting interference In the same manner as interference check area A, set interference check check area C area C as follows. Measure the rectangle data that makes up the interference check area, then set measured values in parameters. Like interference
  • Page 4422. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter No. 14973 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 4 in 1st axis Parameter No. 14974 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 4 in 2nd axis Parameter No. 14975 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 4 in 2nd axis Setting example for a milling
  • Page 443B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION D Positioning of the Rotate the A–axis so that the sides of the rectangles of interference check rotation axis at the area B are parallel to the Y– and Z–axes. reference angular displacement Z O.K. N.G. Y After determining the reference angular displaceme
  • Page 4442. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter No. 14920 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 1 in 1st axis Parameter No. 14921 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 1 in 1st axis Parameter No. 14922 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 1 in 2nd axis Parameter No. 14923 = Distance
  • Page 445B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Parameter No. 14946 = Distance of maximum point of rectangle 2 in 2nd axis Parameter No. 14947 = Distance of minimum point of rectangle 2 in 2nd axis D Rotation center of In the same manner as rectangle data measurement, measure the center interference ch
  • Page 4462. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 514 INTERFERENCE : +n The rotation area interference check function found interference on the plus side of the n axis. 515 INTERFERENCE : –n The rotation area interference check function found interference on t
  • Page 447B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.4 ALARM SIGNAL General When an alarm is triggered in the CNC, the alarm is displayed on the screen, and the alarm signal is set to 1. If the voltage level of the memory backup battery falls to below a specified level while the CNC is turned off, the bat
  • Page 4482. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 NPA [Data type] Bit NPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator message is entered 0 : The display shifts to the alarm or message screen. 1 : The display does not shift to the alarm or message scr
  • Page 449B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.5 START LOCK/ INTERLOCK General These signals disable machine movement along axes. When any of these signals is activated during movement, tool movement along the affected axis (or axes) is decelerated, then stopped. Signal Start lock signal STLK
  • Page 4502. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 All axes Interlock signal *IT [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal is used to inhibit the machine from moving, and is effective regardless of the selected mode. [Operation] When the *IT signal is “0”, the axis movement is decelerat
  • Page 451B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Interlock signal for each axis *IT1 to *IT8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals disable feed along axes on an axis–by–axis basis. A separate interlock signal is provided for each controlled axis. The number at the end of each sign
  • Page 4522. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE In the T series, when bit 4 (DAU) of parameter No. 3003 is 0, a directional interlock for each axis is applied only during manual operation. To allow a directional interlock for each axis also during automatic operation, set bit 4 (DAU) of parameter
  • Page 453B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION NOTE This signal is effective for any blocks including blocks for cycle operation internally created by a canned cycle and so on. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G007 STLK #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G008 *BSL *CSL *IT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G130 *IT8
  • Page 4542. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3004 BCY BSL [Data type] Bit BSL The block start interlock signal *BSL and cutting block start interlock signal *CSL are: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. BCY When more than one operation is performed by one block command such as a canne
  • Page 455B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.6 MODE SELECTION General The mode select signal is a code signal consisting of the three bits MD1, MD2, and MD4. The following seven modes can be selected. D Memory edit (EDIT) D Memory operation (MEM) D Manual data input (MDI) D Manual handle/increment
  • Page 4562. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 For this example mode switching, only MD2 should change from 0 to 1. However if a transient signal status change were to occur in a signal other than MD2 during mode switching, another mode (manual continuous feed mode, for example) would be set between a
  • Page 457B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Operation mode check signal MMDI, MMEM , MRMT, MEDT, MH, MINC, MJ, MREF, MTCHIN [Classification] Output signal [Function] The currently selected operation mode is output. [Operation] The following lists the relationship between the mode sel
  • Page 4582. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE Precautions on modes and mode switching 1 In MDI mode, the STL signal turns to “0” and the CNC stops as soon as the commands entered via the MDI have been executed. But the SPL signal does not turn to “1”. Therefore, another command can be enter
  • Page 459B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION NOTE 4 Manual operation in TEACH IN JOG mode a) When bit 1 (THD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 0 Only jog feed is possible. b) When bit 1 (THD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1 Both jog feed and manual handle feed are possible, provided the manual hand
  • Page 4602. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 6 When the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode is selected while the CNC is operating in the MEM or MDI mode, the automatic or MDI operation stops, the STL signal turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to “1”, and the CNC enters the HANDLE/
  • Page 461B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION NOTE 7 When the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected during RMT, MEM or MDI mode operation, operation stops, the STL signal turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to “1”, and the CNC enters the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode. Under these conditions,
  • Page 4622. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 8 The mode switching operation is summarized in the time chart below (Fig. 2.6 (f)). M M M M D D D Disable because of Disable because of feed hold state of MDI operation possible here- feed hold state of automatic operation MDI operation after H / S
  • Page 463B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.7 PATH SELECTION/ DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES (TWO–PATH CONTROL) General Path selection specifies whether operations performed using the MDI panel are for path 1 or path 2. The operations, as used here, include displaying and setting data items (such
  • Page 4642. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8100 IAL RST [Data type] Bit RST Reset key on the MDI panel 0 : Effective for both paths 1 : Effective only for that path selected by the path select signal IAL When an alarm is raised in one tool post in automatic operat
  • Page 465B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.8 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL General The table below lists the status output signals. They indicate the state of the CNC. See the sections listed in the table for details of each signal. Signal name Symbol Reference section Alarm signal AL 2.4 Battery alarm s
  • Page 4662. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 Rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference point return, etc., as well as the move command G00. Rapid traverse in manual operation also includes rapid traverse in reference po
  • Page 467B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.9 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL General The German VDE safety standard requires that the motor be deactivated when the safety guard is opened. By using the VRDY OFF Alarm Ignore signal, however, the CNC can be restarted without resetting, even if the saf
  • Page 4682. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G066 IGNVRY G192 IGVRY8 IGVRY7 IGVRY6 IGVRY5 IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1804 SAK [Data type] Bit SAK When the VRDY OFF Alarm Ignore signal IGNVRY is 1, or when any of the VRDY OFF A
  • Page 469B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.10 ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTION General Machine collision, defective, and damaged cutters cause a large load torque on the servo and spindle motors, compared with normal rapid traverse or cutting feed. This function detects the load torque on the motors and
  • Page 4702. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 D Parameter setting The following flowcharts explain how to specify parameters for the abnormal load detection function. (1) Servo axis Abnormal load detection function is available. Abnormal load detection No. 2016#0 = 0 function to be used? No Yes No. 2
  • Page 471B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal Servo axis abnormal load detected signal ABTQSV [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs the PMC that an abnormal load was detected on a servo axis. [Output condition] This signal becomes “1” if: S An abnormal load is detected for
  • Page 4722. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Abnormal load detection ignore signal IUDD1 to IUDD8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals disable the abnormal load detection function for corresponding axes. These signals correspond to the controlled axes. The suffixed number o
  • Page 473B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2016 ABNTDT [Data type] Bit axis ABNTDT Output of the estimated load torque (for each axis) 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled This parameter must be specified when using the estimated load torque output function or the abnormal load detecti
  • Page 4742. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 2104 Threshold for abnormal load detection alarm [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Torque command unit (Refer to the digital servo operator’s manual for details.) [Valid data range] 0 to 7282 (The maximum motor torque is 7282, regardless of the motor t
  • Page 475B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 4248 Spindle load torque monitor constant [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 [Standard setting] Depends of the motor model. This constant is determined by the maximum output torque and inertia of the motor. It is used for observer process
  • Page 4762. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 PMC window function D Reading the load torque The load torque data can be read at the PMC using its window function. data (1) Servo axis [Input data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 211 2 (Completion code) (Not to be set) 4 (Data length) (Not to
  • Page 477B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 211 2 (Completion code) ? (Refer to the above description about the completion code.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 2*n, where n is the num- ber of specified axes) 6 (Data number) 0 8 (Data attribute) M (M:
  • Page 4782. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 (2) Spindle [Input data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 211 2 (Completion code) (Not to be set) 4 (Data length) (Not to be set) 6 (Data number) 1 8 (M = 1 to n: Specifies separately (Data attribute) for each axis whether data for the axis is to
  • Page 479B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 211 2 (Completion code) ? (Refer to the above description about the completion code.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 2*n, where n is the num- ber of specified axes) 6 (Data number) 1 8 (Data attribute) M (M:
  • Page 4802. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 2.11 SERVO/SPINDLE MOTOR SPEED DETECTION General The servo axis and spindle motor speeds are monitored. If the speed of an axis exceeds a preset maximum (specified by parameter setting), the corresponding signal is output to a Y address (specified by para
  • Page 481B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal Motor speed detection function enable signal MSDFON [Classification] Input signal [Function] Enables the motor speed detection function. [Operation] When this signal is 1, the motor speed detection function is enabled. The servo/spindle mo
  • Page 4822. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Spindle motor speed detection signals DSP1, DSP2, DSP3 [Classification] Output signal [Function] Report the motor speed status of each of the axes controlled by spindle motors. [Operation] Eac
  • Page 483B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G016 MSDFON #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Y (n+0) DSV8 DSV7 DSV6 DSV5 DSV4 DSV3 DSV2 DSV1 Y (n+1) DSP3 DSP2 DSP1 Reserved Parameter 1890 Servo motor speed for detection NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power mus
  • Page 4842. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 The spindle motor speeds and servo motor speed of each axis are monitored and motor speed detection signals are output to the Y address specified in this parameter and (Y address +1) to indicate whether speeds exceed the values set in the parameters. WARN
  • Page 485B–63523EN–1/03 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Note NOTE 1 Spindle motor speed detection is enabled only for serial spindles. 2 The relationship between servo motor speed detection signals DSV1 to DSV8 and the servo motors depends on the servo axis number (servo connector number) set in parameter No.
  • Page 4863. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 3 MANUAL OPERATION 460
  • Page 487B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.1 JOG FEED/ INCREMENTAL FEED General D Jog feed In jog mode, setting a feed axis and direction selection bit to “1” on the machine operator’s panel moves the tool along the selected axis in the selected direction. Manual operation is allowed one axis at a time. 3
  • Page 4883. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal The following signals determine that way the jog feed or incremental feed is executed. Selection Jog feed Incremental feed Mode selection MD1, MD2, MD4, MJ MD1, MD2, MD4, MINC Selection of the axis to move +J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, +J3, –J3, ... Selection of the d
  • Page 489B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION [Operation] When the jog bit is “1”, the control unit operates as described below. D When jog feed or incremental feed is allowed, the control unit moves the specified axis in the specified direction. D In jog feed, the control unit continues to feed the axis while
  • Page 4903. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Incremental feed mode (TEACH IN HANDLE mode) Reset +J1 1st axis move +J1 is inef- fective dur- Axis is fed again Move is stopped by ing this resetting after signals have period. turned to “0” once. Manual Feedrate Override Signal *JV0 – *JV15 [Classifi
  • Page 491B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION The override value is assumed to be zero when all of the signals, (*JV0 to *JV15) are set to “1” or “0”. When this occurs, the feed is stopped. The override value can be specified in the range of 0% to 655.34% in units of 0.01%. Same examples are listed below. *JV0
  • Page 4923. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE The JVi signals also serve as the override signals during dry run in automatic operation mode. Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects a rapid traverse rate for jog feed or incremental feed. [Operation
  • Page 493B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1002 JAX [Data type] Bit JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in jog feed, manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return 0 : 1 axis 1 : 3 axes #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1401 RPD [Data type] Bit RPD Manual rapid t
  • Page 4943. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 – 240000 30 – 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 – 96000 30 – 48
  • Page 495B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION Warning WARNING For incremental feeding along an axis under diameter programming, the tool moves in units of the diameter. Note NOTE 1 Time constant and method of automatic acceleration/ deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00 in programmed comma
  • Page 4963. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 3.2 MANUAL HANDLE FEED General In manual handle feed mode, the tool can be incrementally moved by rotating the manual pulse generator. Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection signal. The minimum distance the tool is m
  • Page 497B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION Signal Manual Handle Feed Axis Selection Signals [Classification] Input signal D (M series) HS1A – HS1D [Function] Selects the axis of manual handle feed. A set of four code signals, A, B, C, and D is provided for each manual pulse generator. (Up to t
  • Page 4983. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Manual handle feed axis selection Feed axis HSnD#1 HSnC#1 HSnB#1 HSnA#1 0 0 0 0 No selection (no axis is used for path 1) 0 0 0 1 1st axis of path 1 0 0 1 0 2nd axis of path 1 0 0 1 1 3rd axis of path 1 0 1 0 0 4th axis of path 1 0 1 0 1 5th axis
  • Page 499B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION WARNING 1 Because the least input increment is used as the units for manual handle and incremental feed, the same value represents a different distance depending on whether the metric or inch input system is used. 2 For an axis under diameter programming, the tool
  • Page 5003. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 The following table lists the relationships between each manual handle feed travel distance select signal and the travel distance specified by the signal. Manual handle feed travel Travel distance distance select signal MP2 MP1 MP22 MP21 Manual handle feed Manual h
  • Page 501B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION THD Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG mode 0: Invalid 1: Valid HPF When a manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is issued, 0: The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses corresponding to the excess are ignored. (The gra
  • Page 5023. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 7113 Manual handle feed magnification m [Data type] Word [Unit of data] One time [Valid data range] 1 to 127 This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed movement selection signal MP2 is on. 7114 Manual handle feed magnification n [Data type] Word
  • Page 503B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION NOTE Parameter Nos. 7131 to 7136 are valid only in the Series 20i. Warning WARNING Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such as x100 moves the tool too fast or the tool may not stop immediately after the handle is no longer rotated or the distance
  • Page 5043. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 3.3 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION General Rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation can increase the distance traveled by the amount corresponding to the handle feed. The axis to which the handle interrupt is applied is selected using the manual h
  • Page 505B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Series 20i manual handle In the Series 20i, up to three (T series) or four (F series) manual handle interrupt pulse generators can be used. So, the following manual handle interrupt select signals are also valid for the Series 20i. HS3IA to HS3ID (
  • Page 5063. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Warning WARNING The distance travelled by handle interruption is determined according to the amount by which the manual pulse generator is turned and the handle feed magnification (x1, x10, xM, xN). Since the movement is not accelerated or decelerated, it is very d
  • Page 507B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.4 The tool axis direction handle feed function allows the tool to be moved through a specified distance by handle feed in the axis direction of the TOOL AXIS tool, tilted by rotating the rotation axes. DIRECTION HANDLE Tool axis direction handle feed function B p
  • Page 5083. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 (1) A–C axis type (2) B–C axis type Z Z (Tool axis) (Tool axis) C C B X Y X Y A (3) A–B axis (A–axis master) type (4) A–B axis (B–axis master) type Z Z (Tool axis) (Tool axis) B B X Y X A Y A Output pulse (Hp) distribution by the manual pulse generator to the X–axi
  • Page 509B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION For tool axis direction handle feed B, the coordinates (angular displacements) of the rotation axes that determine the direction of the tool axis can be set. These coordinates are set using bits 3 and 4 (3D1 and 3D2) of parameter No. 7104, and parameter Nos. 7144 a
  • Page 5103. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 CXC Tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed is performed with: 0 : 5–axis machine. 1 : 4–axis machine. 3D1 When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed function is used, the coord
  • Page 511B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Axis selection in the tool axis direction handle feed mode 7121 Axis selection in tool axis direction handle feed mode [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes This parameter sets an axis number for the manual handle feed axis selection
  • Page 5123. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.6 Tool axis direction handle feed / 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) Tool axis direction handle feed B 160is/180is (B–63534EN) 3.4.2 Tool Axis Perpendicular Direction Handle Feed Function General This function
  • Page 513B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION (1) A–C axis type (2) B–C axis type Z Z (Tool axis) (Tool axis) C C B A X Y X Y Output pulse (Hp) distribution by the manual pulse generator to the X–axis, Y–axis, and Z–axis for the four types is expressed below. (1) A–C axis type (X axis direction) Xp = Hp cos (c
  • Page 5143. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode signal RGHTH [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal selects tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode. When the following conditions are all satisfied, tool axis direction han
  • Page 515B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3D1 When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed function is used, the coordinates of the first rotation axis are: 0: The machine coordinates when the tool axis direction handle feed mode or tool axis perpendicular direc
  • Page 5163. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 D Axis selection setting in handle feed mode, in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis 7141 Direction of the X–axis in handle feed mode, in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis 7142 Direction of the Y–axis in handle feed mode, in a direction perpendicula
  • Page 517B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION Note NOTE 1 The basic axes X, Y, and Z are determined by parameter No. 1022 (plane selection). The rotation axes A, B, and C are determined by parameter No. 1020 (axis name). 2 If one of the two axes specified by a type set based on the axis configuration does not
  • Page 5183. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 3.5 MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION General In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operations are enabled along with conventional single axis feed operation. D Feed along a tilted straight line in the XY plane (M series) or ZX plane (T
  • Page 519B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Data setting (a) Input data (PMC –> CNC) Lines and circles are defined by setting the data listed below. Num- Setting Data name ber of bytes Linear feed Circular feed R960 1 (Reserve) Do not use. (1) R961 1 Linear or circular feed selection Set value Description
  • Page 5203. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 (1) Setting for linear feed Assume that P is the length of a line segment starting at the origin and perpendicular to a given line, and θ is the angle between the perpendicular and the positive X–axis. The given line can be defined as: X@ cosθ + Y@ sinθ = P NOTE Th
  • Page 521B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 1) Select linear feed. (R961) Set R961 to 1. 2), 3) Specify the approach direction. (R962 to R969) Specify the X and Y components (Ix, Iy) of a unit vector (+cosθ, +sinθ ) or (–cosθ , –sinθ ), which is parallel to perpendicular op, with four bytes. The setting valu
  • Page 5223. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 7) Notify changes in the setting (R979). Reset R979 to 0. CAUTION 1 Line and circle definitions (data items 1 to 6) can be set or changed during manual operation mode (manual handle or jog feed mode). This data notifies the CNC when the definitions are changed. Aft
  • Page 523B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 1) Specify circular feed and the direction of circle rotation. (R961) Set R961 to 2 or 3. If R961 is 2, the tool moves along the circle clockwise, when the guidance handle is rotated in the forward direction. If R961 is 3, the tool moves along the circle counterclo
  • Page 5243. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Where (inside or outside of the circle) the prohibited area is set is determined according to the setting of R974 (which is to be machined, the inside or outside of the circle). If the inside of the circle is to be machined, the prohibited area is outside the circl
  • Page 525B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 7) Notify changes in the setting (R979). Reset R979 to 0. 8) The values of R980 to R983 (distance to a given line or circle) are output as 0. D Manual handle feed In manual handle feed, the tool can be moved along a specified axis (X–axis, Y–axis, Z–axis, ..., or t
  • Page 5263. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 (3) Circular feed (simultaneous 2–axis control) By turning a manual handle, the tool can be moved from the current position along a concentric circle that has the same center as a specified circle on a simultaneous 2–axis control basis. This manual handle is referr
  • Page 527B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION (1) Feed along a specified axis (simultaneous 1–axis control) While a feed axis and its direction are specified with the feed axis direction select switch, the tool moves in the specified axis direction at the feedrate specified in parameter No. 1423. The feedrate
  • Page 5283. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 To perform jog feed, select the feed axis and the direction in which the tool is to be moved, using the feed axis and direction selection signals (+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, ... +J8, –J8). While the feed axis and direction are selected, the tool is moved along the specifi
  • Page 529B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION Feed Axis and Direction Selection Signal +J1 – +J8 –J1 – –J8 +Jg, –Jg, +Ja, –Ja [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects a desired feed axis and direction in jog feed or incremental feed. The sign (+ or –) in the signal name indicates the
  • Page 5303. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Manual Handle Feed Axis Selection Signals [Classification] Input signal D (M series) HS1A – HS1D [Function] Selects the axis of manual handle feed. A set of four code signals, A, B, C, and D is provided for each manual pulse generator. (Up to three HS
  • Page 531B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Series 20i manual handle In the Series 20i, up to three (T series) or four (F series) manual handle feed pulse generators can be used. So, the following manual handle feed axis select signals are also valid for the Series 20i. HS3A to HS3D (T serie
  • Page 5323. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis [Data type] Word axis (1) In M series, or in T series when JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is set to 0 (feed per minute), specify a jog feedrate at feed per minute with an override of 100%. [Unit of
  • Page 533B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 7110 Number of manual pulse generators used [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1, 2, or 3 This parameter sets the number of manual pulse generators. For Series 20i, varid data range is below: 1, 2, 3 (T series) 1, 2, 3, 4 (F series) 7113 Manual handle feed magnifi
  • Page 5343. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE Parameter Nos. 7131 to 7136 are valid only in the Series 20i. Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.7 Manual linear/circular 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) interpolation 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.6 Manual linear/circula
  • Page 535B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.6 HANDLE– SYNCHRONOUS FEED General Generally, tools are fed at a program–specified feedrate or at a feedrate that matches a dry run feedrate in cutting feed blocks (such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 and G03)) during automatic oper
  • Page 5363. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Handle–synchronous feed signal [Classification] Input signal HDLF [Function] This signal selects handle–synchronous feed. To put another way, it causes the cutting feedrate used during automatic operation to be synchronized with the rotation of the m
  • Page 537B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 1 Selecting a feed axis for manual handle feed The following table lists the relationships of code signals (A, B, C, and D) with feed axes. Manual handle feed axis select signal Feed axis HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA 0 0 0 0 Not selected (no feed axis) 0 0 0 1 First axis 0
  • Page 5383. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Manual handle feed travel distance select signals MP1, MP2 [Classification] Input signal [Function] Each of these signals selects the tool’s travel distance per pulse from a manual pulse generator for handle–synchronous feed or manual handle feed. The
  • Page 539B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION D A block not containing a feedrate command (F command) that is 0 is executed during automatic operation. D For the F series, the cutting feedrate (except 0) specified in parameter No. 1411 is made valid when the power is switched on or a reset occurs. D Parameter
  • Page 5403. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 7114 Manual handle feed magnification n [Data type] Word [Unit of data] One time [Valid data range] 1 to 1000 This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed movement selection signals MP1 and MP2 are set to 1. Movement Movement selection signal (Manu
  • Page 541B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.7 MANUAL RIGID TAPPING (M SERIES) General To execute rigid tapping, set rigid mode, then switch to handle mode and move the tapping axis with a manual handle. Manual rigid tapping is enabled by setting bit 0 (HRG) of parameter No. 5203 to 1. D Basic Procedure 1 S
  • Page 5423. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 D Arbitrary tapping axis By setting bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 to 1, an arbitrary tapping axis can be selected. In this case, specify a G code for plane selection and tapping axis address when rigid mode is commanded in MDI mode. D Specification of M29 and I
  • Page 543B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.3.8 MANUAL RIGID TAPPING 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) CONNECTION MANUAL 9.11 RIGID TAPPING (This manual) Series 20i OPERATOR’S MANUAL III3.7 MANUAL RIGID TAPPING (For Manual Milling Ma
  • Page 5443. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 3.8 MANUAL NUMERIC COMMAND General The manual numeric command function allows data programmed through the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system is ready for jog feed, a manual numeric command can be executed. The following eight functions are supporte
  • Page 545B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION NOTE When the manual rapid traverse selection signal RT is 0, the jog feedrate for each axis is clamped by a parameter–set feedrate, determined by bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 as shown below: LRP = 0 : Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis (parameter No. 14
  • Page 5463. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 D 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference The tool returns directly to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position without position return (G30) passing through any intermediate points, regardless of the specified amount of travel. To select a reference position, specify P2, P3, or
  • Page 547B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION D B codes After address B, specify a numeric value no more than the number of (second auxiliary digits specified by parameter No. 3033. functions) NOTE 1 B codes can be named U, V, W, A, or C by setting parameter No. 3460. If the new name is the same as an axis nam
  • Page 5483. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7001 JSL [Data type] Bit JSL Specifies whether to output automatic operation signal STL during automatic operation based on a manual numeric command. 0 : Not output. 1 : Output. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7002 JBF JTF JSF JMF [Data ty
  • Page 549B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.9 STOP POSITION SETTING FOR JOG FEED General This function feeds the tool until the absolute coordinate value reaches a round number at the termination of jog feed or manual rapid traverse. This function operates only at the falling edge of the relevant feed axis
  • Page 5503. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Signals for setting the jog feed stop position JGRD3 to JGRD1 [Classification] Input signal [Function] Sets a factor by which to multiply the least input increment to obtain the unit to be used by the function of setting the stop position
  • Page 551B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.10 HANDLE– SYNCHRONOUS FEED (Series 20i) General Generally, tools are fed at a program–specified feedrate or at a feedrate that matches a dry run feedrate in cutting feed blocks (such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 and G03)) during
  • Page 5523. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Handle–synchronous feed signal [Classification] Input signal HDLF [Function] This signal selects handle–synchronous feed. To put another way, it causes the cutting feedrate used during automatic operation to be synchronized with the rotation of the m
  • Page 553B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION 1 Selecting a feed axis for manual handle feed The following table lists the relationships of code signals (A, B, C, and D) with feed axes. Manual handle feed axis select signal Feed axis HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA 0 0 0 0 Not selected (no feed axis) 0 0 0 1 First axis 0
  • Page 5543. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Manual handle feed travel distance select signals MP1, MP2 MP21, MP22 MP31, MP32 MP41, MP42 [Classification] Input signal [Function] Each of these signals selects the tool’s travel distance per pulse from a manual
  • Page 555B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION Feed zero signal FEED 0 [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the feedrate command (F command) is 0. [Output condition] Outputting the feed zero signal (FEED0) requires that parameter FC0 (bit 7 of parameter No. 1404) be set
  • Page 5563. MANUAL OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7100 MPX [Data type] Bit MPX Specifies how the manual handle feed travel distance select signals are to be used, as follows: 0 : The signals (MP1 and MP2; bits 4 and 5 of G019) for the first manual pulse generator are used for the
  • Page 557B–63523EN–1/03 3. MANUAL OPERATION The following table lists the relationships between each manual handle feed travel distance select signal valid for an individual manual pulse generator and the parameter No. for specifying its magnification. State of bit 5 of Valid manual handle Parameter for sett
  • Page 5584. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 532
  • Page 559B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General The tool is moved in the direction specified by parameter ZMI (bit 5 of No. 1006) setting the feed axis and direction select signal to “1” during manual reference position return mode. Movement will conti
  • Page 5604. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Basic Procedure for (1) Select JOG mode or TEACH IN JOG mode, and the manual reference Manual Reference position return selection signal ZRN to “1”. Position Return (2) Feed a target axis toward the reference position by setting an appropriate feed
  • Page 561B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Installation conditions When installing the deceleration limit switch for manual reference for deceleration limit position return, ensure that following conditions are satisfied: switch Deceleration limit Deceleration limit operation position releas
  • Page 5624. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 By reversing the formula above, the following formula gives the feedrate F needed to obtain a servo position error of 128, when the servo loop gain G is 30 s–1 and the detection unit U is 1 mm: 128 60 30 F= 1000 = 230 [mm/min] Therefore, when the se
  • Page 563B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Manual reference position return selection check signal MREF [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that manual reference position return has been selected. [Output condition] This signal turns to “1” when: ⋅ Manual
  • Page 5644. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE When reference position return is selected, an axis who has already completed referencing movement along that axis is disabled while the reference position return selection signal (ZRN) is “1”. To perform movement again, ZRN must be set “0”, an
  • Page 565B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT [Output condition] These signals are set to “1” when: D Manual reference position returns is completed, and the axis position is in the in–position area. D Automatic reference position return (G28) is completed, and the axis position is in the in–po
  • Page 5664. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1002 JAX [Data type] Bit JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in JOG feed, manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return 0 : 1 axis 1 : 3 axes #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1005 ZRNx [Data type] Bit a
  • Page 567B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 1240 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis in the machine coordinate system NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off, then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Increme
  • Page 5684. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201#1 is set to 1. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1300 LZR [Data type] Bit LZR Checking of stored stroke limit 1 during the time from power–on to the manual reference position return 0 : The stroke limit
  • Page 569B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT < Conditions > D When there is a remaining distance to travel. D When an auxiliary function (miscellaneous function, spindle–speed function, tool function) is being executed. D When a dwell or cycle such as a canned cycle is being executed. 1821 Ref
  • Page 5704. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 1850 Grid shift for each axis [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 A grid shift is set for each axis. To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set in this para
  • Page 571B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Alarm and message Number Message Description 090 REFERENCE RETURN 1. The reference position return can- INCOMPLETE not be performed normally be- cause the reference position re- turn start point is too close to the reference position or the speed is
  • Page 5724. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 4.2 SETTING THE REFERENCE POSITION WITHOUT DOGS General This function moves each axis in the manual continuous feed mode near the reference position. It then sets the reference position in the reference position return mode without the deceleration
  • Page 573B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Manual reference position return mode +J1 or –J1 Grid . . . . . . ZP1 ZRF1 Feedrate FL rate The following figure shows the positional relation between the reference position and the point to which the tool is positioned by manual continuous feed. –
  • Page 5744. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1002 DLZ JAX [Data type] Bit JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in manual continuous feed, manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return 0 : 1 axis 1 : 3 axes DLZ Function for setting the refe
  • Page 575B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT [Data type] Bit axis ZMIx The direction of reference position return and the direction of initial backlash at power–on 0 : Positive direction 1 : Negative direction #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1201 ZCL ZPI ZPR [Data type] Bit ZPR Automatic setting of a
  • Page 5764. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm (input in mm) Linear axis 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch (input in inches) Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 Set the coordinat
  • Page 577B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position return is performed for each axis. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1800 OZR [Data type] Bit OZR When manual reference position return is attempted in feed hold during automatic operation
  • Page 5784. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 WARNING When bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value ten times greater than the value set in this parameter is used to make the check. Example: When the value 10 is set in this parameter, and bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, referen
  • Page 579B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Alarm and message Number Message Description 090 REFERENCE RETURN 1. The reference position return can- INCOMPLETE not be performed normally because the reference position return start point is too close to the reference position or the speed is too
  • Page 5804. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 4.3 REFERENCE POSITION SHIFT General When reference position return is performed using the grid method, the reference position can be shifted by a parameter–set distance without having to move the deceleration dog. This function is enabled by settin
  • Page 581B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT (3) Perform reference position return again. The tool stops when it reaches the reference position. Direction of reference position return Deceleration dog LSFT | | | | | ↑ ↑ Grid point Reference position (stop position) Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2
  • Page 5824. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message D Diagnostic display 0302 Distance from the position where the deceleration dog is turned off to the first grid point [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] 0.001 mm (metric output), 0.0001 inch (inch output) [Valid data range] –
  • Page 583B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.4 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General The G28 command positions the tool to the reference position, via the specified intermediate point, then sets the completion signal for reference position return (see Section 4.1) to 1. The reference position mu
  • Page 5844. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 405 SERVO ALARM: Position control system fault. Due to (WRONG ZRN) an CNC or servo system fault in the reference position return, there is a possibility that reference position re- turn could not be execu
  • Page 585B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.6 REFERENCE POSITION 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.6 REFERENCE POSITION (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.6 REFERENCE POSITION 21i/
  • Page 5864. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 4.5 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN/3RD, 4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General The G30 command positions the tool to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position, via the specified intermediate point. It then sets the completion signal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th
  • Page 587B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ZP 2 1 1 : Return end signal for the first axis 2 : Return end signal for the second axis 3 : Return end signal for the third axis : : 2 : Second reference position return 3 : Third reference position return 4 : Fourth reference position return [Out
  • Page 5884. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RE- Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded TURN COMMAND for 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position re- turn command. Correct program. Caution CAUTION 1 If the G30 command is issued in m
  • Page 589B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.6 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General It is possible to return the tool to the floating reference position by commanding the G30.1. The floating reference position is located on the machine and can be a reference position for some sort of m
  • Page 5904. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Floating reference position return end signal FRP1 to FRP8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notify the system that the tool is at the floating reference position on a controlled axis. A floating reference position return end s
  • Page 591B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1201 FPC [Data type] Bit FPC When the floating reference position is specified using soft keys on the current position display screen 0 : The value of the displayed relative position is not preset. (In other words,
  • Page 5924. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 4.7 BUTT–TYPE REFERENCE POSITION SETTING General This function automates the procedure of butting the tool against a mechanical stopper on an axis to set a reference position. The purpose of this function is to eliminate the variations in reference
  • Page 593B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Cycle operation When no reference position has been set (APZx, bit 4 of parameter No. 1815, is 0), operations (A) to (E), below, are performed automatically to set a reference position. Mechanical stopper Current position (A)The tool is moved along
  • Page 5944. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Mechanical stopper The direction, feedrate, and torque are all specified with parameters. (E)After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper end on the axis, the tool is withdrawn in the direction opposite to the butting direction, along the axis for
  • Page 595B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT After the reference When the reference position has already been set (when APZx, bit 4 of position is set parameter No. 1815, is 1), performing butt–type reference position setting causes the tool to be positioned to the reference position at the ra
  • Page 5964. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Torque limit reach signals for butt–type reference position setting CLRCH1 to CLRCH8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals are used to post notification of the torque limit having been reached for each corresponding a
  • Page 597B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 When the butt–type reference position setting function is used, this parameter sets a distance on an axis, along which withdrawal is performed after the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanical
  • Page 5984. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 When the butt–type reference position setting function is used, this parameter sets the feedrate used to hit the stopper on an axis for a second time. 7185 Withdrawal feedrate (common to the first and second butting operations) in butt–type referenc
  • Page 599B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.8 LINEAR SCALE I/F WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESS REFERENCED MARK (A/B PHASE)/LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE–CODED REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL) Outline By using optional function ”Linear scale I/F with absolute address referenced mark”, we can use ”Linear scale I/
  • Page 6004. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Linear scale with The basic structure of Linear scale with distance–coded reference marks distance–coded (serial) is same as A/B–phase scale (Linear scale with absolute address reference marks (serial) referenced mark). But this scale differs from A
  • Page 601B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Specifications (linear scale I/F with absolute address referenced mark (A/B phase)) Procedure for reference (1) Select the JOG mode, and set the manual reference position return position establishment selection signal ZRN to ”1”. (2) Set a direction
  • Page 6024. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Simple synchronous The function is available for only FS16i/18i/21i–MB,18i–MB5. axis When the function is applied for simple synchronous axis, the following condition should be kept. (1) Linear scale I/F with absolute address referenced mark (A/B ph
  • Page 603B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT [Synchronization] By setting bit 7 (for one simple synchronization pair) of parameter No. 8301 for synchronization or bit 7 (for multiple simple synchronization pairs) of parameter No. 8303 to 1, compensation pulses are output to the slave axis at r
  • Page 6044. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Note (1) In the following case, P/S090 alarm occurs. (a) The actual interval of reference marks is different from parameter setting value. (2) In this procedure, the axis does not stop until three or four reference marks are detected. If this proced
  • Page 605B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT (b) When the reference point return procedure is executed, the coordinate value are rounded in 0 to 360 degree, even if a parameter No. 1006#1(ROS) is set to ”1” (Machine coordinate values are linear axis type). (c) In case of rotary encoder with ab
  • Page 6064. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 (b) Because an incorrect value is set in parameter No.1883 and 1884 when setting parameter SCP is incorrect when the automatic setting of parameter No.1883 and 1884 was executed. It is very dangerous. In this case, please execute automatic setting o
  • Page 607B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Simple synchronous The function is available for only FS16i/18i/21i–MB,18i–MB5. axis When the function is applied for simple synchronous axis, the following condition should be kept. (1) Linear scale with distance–coded reference marks (serial) with
  • Page 6084. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Reference position (1) When the reference position is not established and the axis moved by return turning the feed axis direction signal (+J1,–J1,+J2,–J2,...) to ”1” in REF mode, the reference position establishment procedure is executed. (2) When
  • Page 609B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT (d) During the reference point establishment operation of the angular axis, the command in the perpendicular axis is invalid in the manual reference point return. (e) On angular axis control, if you use automatic setting of parameter No.1883,1884 on
  • Page 6104. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1802 DC2 DC4 [Data type] Bit DC4 When the reference position is established on the linear scale with reference marks: 0 : An absolute position is established by detecting three reference marks. 1 : An absolute position is est
  • Page 611B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT WARNING If you set parameter 1818#3 (SDCx), please don’t forget to turned off before operation is continued. This parameter doesn’t generate P/S alarm 0 (Power–off alarm). #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1819 DAT [Data type] Bit axis DATx When manual refere
  • Page 6124. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 CAUTION This parameter is unavailable on linear scale with distance–coded reference marks (serial). 1883 Distance 1 between the scale origin and reference position (for a linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks) or distance 1 between t
  • Page 613B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Reference point Scale zero Scale end ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Mark1 Mark2 Mark1 Mark2 Mark1=Mark2 8.0 42.0 8.2 41.8 PRM.1821 PRM.1882 PRM.1884 100,000,000 ) PRM.1883 (For a linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks) For a liner scale with abs
  • Page 6144. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter No.1821 (Mark1 interval) = ”20000” No.1882 (Mark2 interval) = ”20020” No.1883 (Reference position) = Position of point A + 5.000 = (Distance of A to B) / ( Mark2 interval – Mark1 interval) * Mark1 interval + 5.000 = 9960 / (20020–20000) *
  • Page 615B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT (4) Set an actual machine coordinate value (DGN.301) to the parameter No.1883 after conversion of least command increment to detection unit. (Multiply DGN.301 and CMR) (5) Set a parameter No.1240 if necessary. NOTE When the setting value is greater
  • Page 6164. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 When the parameter SCP is set to ”1”, ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 Mark1=Mark2 M1 M2 M1 0.020 0.040 9.940 9.960 9.980 Scale zero Machine coordinate system + – Reference point #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8301 SOF [Data type] Bit SOF The synchroni
  • Page 617B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT CAUTION 1 When a reference position is established on the M series by using the simple synchronous manual feed axis select signal , and this parameter is set for one of the master axis and slave axis, the setting is automatically applied to th
  • Page 6184. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Number Message Description 5327 SERIAL DCL:MISMATCH Master/slave axes of simple synchro- (SSYNC CTRL) nized control, one of them is the linear scale with distance–coded reference marks (serial), and the other of them is not the linear scale with dis
  • Page 619B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.9 The linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks has reference marks at intervals that change at a constant rate. By determining the EXTENDED reference mark interval, the corresponding absolute position can be FUNCTION OF THE deduced. W
  • Page 6204. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 D Operation The reference position establishment procedure is explained below. <1> The tool is fed along a specified axis at the reference position return FL feedrate (parameter No. 1425). <2> Upon detection of a reference mark on the scale, the too
  • Page 621B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT (2) When all axes require the reference position establishment operation Suppose that the reference position is not established for the X–, Y–, and Z–axes and that G00 Xxx Yyy Zzz; is specified. The operation in this case is shown in the figure belo
  • Page 6224. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 ← Operation 1 → ← Operation 2 → X–axis No movement Rapid traverse rate Y–axis FL feedrate Z–axis Time Fig. 4.9 (d) When an axis does not require the reference position establishment operation and others require the establishment operation D Absolute
  • Page 623B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT (2) When an incremental command is specified Movement is made along each axis by a specified distance. (The movement is indicated with the bold line in the figure below. Note that the intermediate tool path is not always of the linear interpolation
  • Page 6244. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 D When an illegal If a correct reference mark interval cannot be detected for a cause, the tool reference mark interval is positioned to the end point without establishing the reference position. is detected Therefore, the machine position, absolute
  • Page 625B–63523EN–1/03 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT When the feed axis direction selection signal is set to 0 during steps <2> to <4>, feed operation stops. When the feed axis direction selection signal is set to 1 again, the reference position is established. A time chart for the above procedure is
  • Page 6264. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Caution CAUTION 1 PMC axis control In rapid traverse (axis control command 00h) and continuous feed (axis control command 06h) under PMC axis control, the reference position is not established. 2 Rapid traverse by other than G00 In rapid traverse op
  • Page 627B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION 601
  • Page 6285. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 5.1 CYCLE START/ FEED HOLD General D Start of automatic When automatic operation start signal ST is set to 1 then 0 while the CNC operation (cycle start) is in memory (MEM) mode, DNC operation mode (RMT), or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters the autom
  • Page 629B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Halt of automatic When the feed hold signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, the operation (feed hold) CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation. At the same time, cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0 and feed hold lamp signal SPL is set
  • Page 6305. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Cycle start signal ST [Classification] Input signal [Function] Starts automatic operation. [Operation] When signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in memory (MEM) mode, DNC operation mode (RMT) or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters the cycle star
  • Page 631B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Feed hold lamp signal SPL [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that feed hold state is entered. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 or 0, according to the state of the CNC, as listed in Table 5.1. Signals OP, STL, and SPL ar
  • Page 6325. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message D Self–diagnosis During automatic operation, the machine may sometimes show no information movement while no alarm is detected. In that case, the CNC may be performing processing or waiting for the occurrence of an event. The state of the CNC c
  • Page 633B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.2 RESET AND REWIND General The CNC is reset and enters the reset state in the following cases: 1. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0 2. When the external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1 3. When the reset and rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1 4. Whe
  • Page 6345. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 The following parameters are also used to select how to handle processing for CNC data when the CNC is reset. S Bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No. 3203 Whether programs created in MDI mode are erased or stored S Bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No. 6001 Whether custom macro v
  • Page 635B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Resetting signal RST [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that the CNC is being reset. This signal is used for reset processing on the PMC. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following cases: 1. When the emergency st
  • Page 6365. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 3017 Output time of reset signal RST [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 16 ms [Valid data range] 0 to 255 To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added is specified in this parameter. RST signal output time = time required for reset + paramete
  • Page 637B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL APPENDIX E STATUS WHEN TURNING 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) POWER ON, WHEN 160is/180is (B–63534EN) CLEAR AND WHEN RESET OPERATOR’S MANUAL APPENDIX E STATUS WHEN TURNING (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) POWER ON, WHEN C
  • Page 6385. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 5.3 Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine TESTING A as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine or PROGRAM viewing the position display change
  • Page 639B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION All–axis machine lock check signal MMLK [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the all–axis machine lock signal. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: – When all–axis machine lock signal ML
  • Page 6405. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE 1 Automatic operation in the machine lock state (M, S, T, and B commands) Machine lock applies only to move commands along controlled axes. Updating modal G codes or setting a coordinate system is performed normally. M, S, T, and B (2nd auxilialy funct
  • Page 641B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK Series OPERATOR’
  • Page 6425. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 JVmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum value of manual feedrate override *1:Dry run feedrate  JV when parameter RDR (bit 6 of No. 1401) is 1. Rapid traverse rate when parameter RDR is 0. *2 Clamped by max. cutting feedrate. Signal Dry run signal DRN
  • Page 643B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1401 RDR TDR [Data type] Bit TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84; rigid tapping) 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled 1410 Dry run rate [Data type
  • Page 6445. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use parameter No. 1430 instead. Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.4 Dry run 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.4 Dry run (For Lathe) (B
  • Page 645B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state during single block operation, the mode can be changed to manual data input (MDI), manual handle feed (HNDL), incremental feed (INC), or jog feed (JOG), by using the mode select signals (MD1, MD2, and MD4). S
  • Page 6465. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 If you want to disable the single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, set this parameter to 0. If this parameter is set to 1, the single blocks in custom macro statements cannot be disabled using system variable #3003. To control singl
  • Page 647B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.5 Single block 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.5 Single block (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.5 Single block 21i/210i/210is (For Machin
  • Page 6485. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 D Forward movement Forward movement is to execute a program in the forward direction regardless of the rotation of the manual pulse generator (with the check mode handle valid signal MCHK set to 0) or by rotating the manual pulse generator in the positive direct
  • Page 649B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Control using the manual The machine travel distance per pulse generated from the manual pulse pulse generator generator is determined by parameter No. 6410 and handle magnification. The machine travel distance when the manual pulse generator is actually rotat
  • Page 6505. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 D End of execution Executing an M2 or M30 block stops program checking. Backward movement cannot be performed from the M2 or M30 block. After program execution ends, set the RESET signal to 1, and set the check mode signal and check mode handle valid signal MCHK
  • Page 651B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Inversion inhibition In the inversion inhibition state, the program execution direction cannot be changed. When the manual pulse generator is rotated in the direction opposite to the direction of the previous rotation in the inversion inhibition state, the rot
  • Page 6525. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Other notes D Move command plus M, When a block contains a move command and an M, S, or T code, the time S, and T codes when the M, S, or T code is output differs between forward movement and backward movement. Therefore, at the time of backward movement, some m
  • Page 653B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Forward execution of During execution of threading blocks (G32, G76, G84, G88, and G92), threading handle pulses are ignored, and these blocks are always executed at a feedrate with an override of 100%. In a threading cycle, pulses are ignored only when thread
  • Page 6545. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Check mode backward movement inhibition signal MRVM [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal enables and disables backward movement in check mode. [Operation] When this signal is set to 0, backward movement is enabled. When this signal is se
  • Page 655B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G067 MCHK MMOD MRVM F091 MRVSP MNCHG MRVMD Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6400 HMP HM8 HM5 HFW HRP [Data type] Bit HRP With the manual handle retrace function, the rapid traverse rate is clamped, assuming that: 0 : An ov
  • Page 6565. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 6410 Travel distance per pulse generated from the manual pulse generator for the manual handle retrace function [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 1% [Valid data range] 0 to 100 This parameter sets the travel distance per pulse generated from the manual pulse gener
  • Page 657B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 6425 M code (3) in group D for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6426 M code (4) in group D for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6427 M code (1) in group E for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6
  • Page 6585. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 6443 M code (1) in group I for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6444 M code (2) in group I for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6445 M code (3) in group I for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6
  • Page 659B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 6461 M code (3) in group M for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6462 M code (4) in group M for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6463 M code (1) in group N for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6
  • Page 6605. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 6479 M code (1) in group R for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6480 M code (2) in group R for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6481 M code (3) in group R for backward movement by the manual handle retrace function 6
  • Page 661B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAUTION The above explanation of M code groups assumes that the standard setting is made. The number of M codes for each group and the number of M code groups vary depending on bits 2 (HM5) and 3 (HM8) of parameter No. 6400. Caution CAUTION 1 This function is op
  • Page 6625. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 5.4 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF General This function selects whether the movement of the tool with manual operation (such as jog feed and manual handle feed) is counted for calculating the current position in the workpiece coordinate system. A check signal is also o
  • Page 663B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION When manual absolute The manual move amount is not counted to the present position on the turns off (manual workpiece coordinate system. The present position display on the CRT absolute signal includes the manual move amount. The display is reset to the initial
  • Page 6645. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Manual absolute check signal MABSM [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the manual absolute signal. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: – When the manual absolute signal *ABSM is set to
  • Page 665B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP General When a slash followed by a number (/n, where n = 1 to 9) is specified at the head of a block, and optional block skip signals BDT1 to BDT9 are set to 1 during automatic operation, the information co
  • Page 6665. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 2. When BDTn is set to 1 while the CNC is reading a block containing /n, the block is not ignored. BDTn ”1” ”0” Reading by CNC ³ ...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 .... Not ignored 3. When BDTn, currently set to 1, is set to 0 while the CNC is reading a block conta
  • Page 667B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Optional block skip check signals MBDT1 MBDT2 to MBDT9 [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notify the PMC of the states of the optional block skip signals BDT1 to BDT9. Nine signals are provided, corresponding to the nine optional block ski
  • Page 6685. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.12.2 Program section configuration 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.12.2 Program section configuration (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.12.2 Progr
  • Page 669B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP General During program execution, this function causes a single block stop right after a block with a specified sequence number is executed. To use this function, first specify the program number (1 to 9999) of a program t
  • Page 6705. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 5.7 PROGRAM RESTART General A program may be restarted at a block by specifying the sequence number of the block, after automatic operation is stopped because of a broken tool or for holidays. This function can also be used as a high–speed program check function
  • Page 671B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G006 SRN F002 SRNMV Parameter 7310 Movement sequence to program restart position Setting entry is accepted. [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1 to no. of controlled axes This parameter sets the axis sequence when the
  • Page 6725. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Warning WARNING As a rule, the tool cannot be returned to a correct position under the following conditions. Special care must be taken in the following cases since none of them cause an alarm: ⋅ Manual operation is performed when the manual absolute mode is OFF
  • Page 673B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.8 TOOL RETRACTION AND RETURN General The tool can be retracted from a workpiece to replace the tool, if damaged during machining, or to check the status of machining. Then, the tool can be returned to restart machining efficiently. :Position in which the tool
  • Page 6745. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 D In the manual mode, when it is necessary to replace the tool or measure workpieces, the tool can be moved manually, such as by manual continuous feed, or manual handle feed. This operation is called manual retraction. The path along which the tool retracts is
  • Page 675B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Signal Tool retraction signal TRESC [Classification] Input signal [Function] Tool retraction mode is selected. [Operation] When this signal is turned to 1, the control unit retracts the tool by a pre–programmed distance. Tool retraction mode signal TRACT
  • Page 6765. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G059 TRRTN TRESC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F092 TRSPS TRACT Warning WARNING The retraction axes and retraction distances specified with G10.6 need to be changed in appropriate blocks depending on the figure to be machined. An
  • Page 677B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.9 EXACT STOP/ EXACT STOP MODE/ TAPPING MODE/ CUTTING MODE (M SERIES) General NC commands can be used to control a feedrate in continuous cutting feed blocks as described below. D Exact stop (G09) The tool is decelerated in a block specifying G09, and an in–pos
  • Page 6785. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61) 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) Cutting Mode (G64) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) Tapping Mode (G63) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61) 21i/210i/210is (For Machining C
  • Page 679B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.10 BALANCE CUT (2–PATH CONTROL FOR T SERIES) General When a thin workpiece is to be machined as shown in fig. 5.10, a precision machining can be achieved by machining each side of the workpiece with a tool simultaneously;this function can prevent the workpiece
  • Page 6805. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Caution CAUTION 1 If feed hold operation is performed during balance cutting using both tool posts, balance cut processing is not performed at restart time, it is performed when the next move command is specified for both tool posts. 2 Balance cutting is not per
  • Page 681B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.11 DNC OPERATION General By starting automatic operation during the DNC operation mode (RMT), it is possible to perform machining (DNC operation) while a program is being read from the remote buffer or memory card. If the floppy cassette directory display opti
  • Page 6825. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G043 DNCI #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F003 MRMT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0100 ND3 Setting entry is accepted. [Data type] Bit ND3 In DNC operation, a program is: 0 : Read block by block. (A “DC3” code is output for each
  • Page 683B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Alarm and message Number Message Description 086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was off. Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is defec
  • Page 6845. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 5.12 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN General If the tool movement along the axes is stopped by a feed hold during automatic operation, then restarted after manual intervention such as tool exchange, the tool moves back to the point of intervention before automati
  • Page 685B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.13 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING (M SERIES) General When rigid tapping is stopped, either as a result of an emergency stop or a reset, the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently be drawn out by using a PMC signal. This function automatically s
  • Page 6865. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 (4) Resume Once rigid tapping retraction has been stopped, it can be resumed by performing the same operation as that used for starting rigid tapping retraction. If rigid tapping retraction has been completed, however, the start operation does not restart rigid
  • Page 687B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Time chart for stopping tapping retraction Tapping retraction start signal RTNT Spindle enable signal ENB Rigid tapping signal RGTAP Spindle excitation Retract movement When tapping retraction is stopped, spindle enable signal is set to 0, in the same way as for
  • Page 6885. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 Example: D Machining program –––––––––– M29 S1000 ; G84 X20. Y20. R–10. Z–30. F500 ; X50. Y50. ; X100. Y100. ; G80 –––––––––– D Retraction program –––––––––– G30 P99 M29 S1000 ; G00 Z–10. ; –––––––––– (Supplementary) If a value other than 0 is set in parameter N
  • Page 689B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5200 DOV [Data type] Bit DOV For tool extraction during rigid tapping, override is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5201 OVU [Data type] Bit OVU The increment unit of the override parameter (No.5381) for rigid
  • Page 6905. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 This parameter is enabled only when the parameter used to enable tool extraction override (DOV:bit 4 of No.5200) is set to 1. 2 If bit 3(OVU) of parameter No.5201 is set to 1, 10% is set as the unit of data. Thus, an override of up to 2000% can be applied
  • Page 691B–63523EN–1/03 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Note NOTE 1 Setting rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT to “1” starts rigid tapping retraction only when the CNC is placed in both the reset state and MDI mode. 2 The machining data for rigid tapping retraction is maintained until a rigid tapping command
  • Page 6926. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 666
  • Page 693B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.1 POSITIONING General The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system specified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse rate. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is programmed. In the increm
  • Page 6946. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 – 240000 30 – 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 – 96000 30 – 480
  • Page 695B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.1 POSITIONING (G00) 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.1 POSITIONING (G00) (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.1 POSITIONING (G00) 21i/210i/21
  • Page 6966. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION General Tools can move along a line A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate specified in F. The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. It need not be specified for each block.
  • Page 697B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Parameter 1411 Cutting feedrate when the power is turned on This parameter can be set in “Setting screen”. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 – 32767
  • Page 6986. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in parameter No. 1422 is effective. 2 If the setting for each axis is 0, th
  • Page 699B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION General The command below can move a tool along a circular arc in the defined plane. “Clockwise”(G02) and “counterclockwise”(G03) on the XpYp plane (ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewed in the positive
  • Page 7006. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc can be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K. In this case, one arc is less than 180_, and the other is more than 180_ are considered. For T series, an
  • Page 701B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION (Example) (M series) For arc (1) (less than 180_) G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R50.0 F300.0 ; For arc (2) (greater than 180_) G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R–50.0 F300.0 ; (2) r=50mm End point (1) Start point r=50mm Y X When the option for specifying arc radius R with nine digi
  • Page 7026. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 Specifying an arc center with addresses I, K, and J When the distance from the arc start point to the arc center is specified with addresses I, K, and J, a P/S alarm (No. 5059) is issued if: Maximum value which can be specified < ǸI 2 ) K 2 Example: Wh
  • Page 703B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Parameter 1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system NOTE When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte axis To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cutter compens
  • Page 7046. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 3410 Tolerance of arc radius [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 When a circular interpolation command (G02, G03) is e
  • Page 705B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Note NOTE 1 For T series, the U, V and W axes (parallel with the basic axis) can be used with G–code system B and C. 2 If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the arc specified by address R takes precedence and the other are ignored. 3 If an
  • Page 7066. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.4 THREAD CUTTING 6.4.1 Thread Cutting General Tool movement can be synchronized with spindle rotation when cutting threads. The spindle speed is continuously read through the position coder attached to the spindle. Then, it is converted to a cutting feedrat
  • Page 707B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Signal Thread cutting signal THRD [Function] This signal indicates that thread cutting is in progress. [Output condition] This signal turns to “1” in the following cases: S Thread cutting mode in progress S Thread cutting cycle for turning This signal
  • Page 7086. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Checking the spindle speed arrival signal before starting threading #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3708 SAT SAR SAR [Data type] Bit SAR: The spindle speed arrival signal is: 0 : Not checked 1 : Checked SAT: Check of the spindle speed arrival signal at the start of e
  • Page 709B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Setting the FL feedrate for the thread cutting cycle 1627 FL rate of exponential acceleration /deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A,
  • Page 7106. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Setting the finishing allowance for the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 5141 Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch i
  • Page 711B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Warning WARNING During threading, stopping feed without stopping the spindle is dangerous because the cutting depth will abruptly increase. Feed hold is, therefore, disabled during threading. If attempted during threading, feed stops in the same way as single
  • Page 7126. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.15 THREAD CUTTING 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.9 CONSTANT LEAD THREAD (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) CUTTING II.4.10 VARIABLE LEAD THREAD CUTTING II.4.11 CONTINU
  • Page 713B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.4.2 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract (T series) General When the automatic operation stop signal *SP is set to 0 during threading in a threading cycle, the tool immediately retracts while performing chamfering, then returns to the start point of the cu
  • Page 7146. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Caution CAUTION While the tool is retracting, automatic operation stop signal *SP is ignored. Note NOTE The chamfering distance for retraction is determined by the setting of parameter No. 5130. Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.1.2 Threa
  • Page 715B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.5 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING General For accurate positioning without play of the machine (lost motion), positioning is performed in one direction finally. Overrun distance Start point Start point Temporary stop End point + Example where positioning is pe
  • Page 7166. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D Overview of operation X Overrun distance in the Z–axis direction Overrun distance in the X–axis direction Programmed end point Z Programmed start point In the case of positioning of non–linear interpolation type (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 = 0) As sh
  • Page 717B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5431 PDI MDL [Data type] Bit MDL Specifies whether the G code for single direction positioning (G60) is included in one–shot G codes (00 group) or modal G codes (01 group) 0: One–shot G codes (00 group) 1: Modal G codes (01 g
  • Page 7186. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Notes 1. Single direction positioning is not performed along an axis for which no overrun distance is set in parameter No. 5440. 2. Single direction positioning is not performed along an axis for which travel distance 0 is specified. 3. The mirror image funct
  • Page 719B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION The direction of the compensation command Xa is determined by the inclination angle q of the angular axis and the direction of the move command Yp for the orthogonal axis. When tan q is plus, the direction of the move command for the angular axis is opposite
  • Page 7206. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 +X (orthogonal axis) X–axis: Compensation in the plus direction Move command in the minus direction Y–axis: Positioning in the +Y (angular axis) minus direction Actual move coordinate system q (inclination angle) Program coordinate system Move command in the
  • Page 721B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Program coordinate system +X (orthogonal axis) Y–axis: Positioning in the minus direction X–axis: Compensation in the minus direction Move command in the minus direction q (inclination angle) +Y (angular axis) Actual move coordinate system Move command in the
  • Page 7226. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION General Helical interpolation is enabled by specifying up to two other axes which move synchronously with the circular interpolation by circular commands. The command method is to simply add one or two move command axes which are not
  • Page 723B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION When HFC is 0 No. 1430: Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis Since the cutting feedrate for the arc is clamped to the above parameter value, the feedrate along the linear axis is clamped to the smaller parameter value. Example
  • Page 7246. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.7 INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) General With the involute interpolation function, an involute curve can be machined. Cutter compensation C is also possible. The use of involute interpolation eliminates the need to use short lines or arcs to approximate
  • Page 725B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION (b) Override in the neighborhood of a basic If a programmed cutting feedrate is directly used in the neighborhood of a basic circle where the curvature of an involute curve changes relatively sharply, the cutter may be overloaded, resulting in a failure to pr
  • Page 7266. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 5616 Override value (OVR2) for starting basic circle neighborhood override 2 5617 Override value (OVR3) for starting basic circle neighborhood override 3 5618 Override value (OVR4) for starting basic circle neighborhood override 4 5619 Override value (OVR5) f
  • Page 727B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.8 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION General Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and the movement o
  • Page 7286. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter 1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 – 240000 6 – 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 – 96000 6
  • Page 729B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Alarm and message No. Message Description 145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS The conditions are incorrect when the polar IN POLAR COORDINATE coordinate interpolation starts or it is can- INTERPOLATION celed. 1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1 was specified. 2) An er
  • Page 7306. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.9 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION General The amount of travel of a rotary axis specified by an angle is internally converted to a distance of a linear axis along the outer surface so that linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be performed with anoth
  • Page 731B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system [Data type] Byte axis To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cutter compensation C (for the M series), tool nose radius compensation (for the T series), etc., each control ax
  • Page 7326. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.9 Cylindrical Interpolation 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.7 Cylindrical Interpolation (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.6 Cylindrical I
  • Page 733B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.10 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION CUTTING POINT COMPENSATION (M SERIES) General The conventional cylindrical interpolation function controls the movement of the tool center so that the tool axis moves along a specified path on the cylindrical surface to always f
  • Page 7346. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Format [G05 P10000 ; AI high–precision contour control mode ON] : G07.1 IPr ; Starts the cylindrical interpolation mode (enables cylindrical interpolation). : : G07.1 IP0 ; Cancels the cylindrical interpolation mode. [G05 P0 ; AI high–precision contour contro
  • Page 735B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Set value Meaning 0 Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis 1 X axis of the basic three axes 2 Y axis of the basic three axes 3 Z axis of the basic three axes 5 Axis parallel to the X axis 6 Axis parallel to the Y axis 7 Axis parallel to the Z axis 1
  • Page 7366. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 19532 Tool offset axis number for the Z–X plane [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes Specify a tool offset axis that is normal to the cylindrical rotation axis. 19533 Tool offset axis number for the Y
  • Page 737B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 19535 Limit travel distance value for executing cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation of the previous block without modification [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Valid data range] 1 to 9999
  • Page 7386. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.11 Polygonal turning means machining a polygonal figure by rotating the workpiece and tool at a certain ratio. POLYGONAL TURNING (T SERIES) Workpiece Workpiece Tool Fig. 6.11 (a) Polygonal turning By changing conditions which are rotation ratio of workpiece
  • Page 739B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.11.1 Polygonal Turning General One of the axes (servo axes) controlled by the CNC is assigned as a tool rotation axis. Either serial spindle or analog spindle can be used as a workpiece axis (spindle). Polygonal turning using a servo axis is detailed in the
  • Page 7406. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 (With the above setting, the reference counter capacity is 36000.) Parameter No. 1820 = 2 (CMR) Parameter No. 1821 = 36000 (reference counter capacity) Parameter No. 2084 = 36 (DMR numerator) Parameter No. 2085 = 1000 (DMR denominator) For the other servo par
  • Page 741B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 360 No. 1420 = 72000 (= 2000 ) 10 Also specify other feedrates in 10 degrees/min units. D Commands from the NC program When the machine is not performing polygonal turning, the machining program can issue move commands to the polygon axis. Such commands can b
  • Page 7426. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7600 PLZ [Data type] Bit PLZ Synchronous axis using G28 command 0: Returns to the reference position in the same sequence as the manual reference position return. 1: Returns to the reference position by positioning at a rapid
  • Page 743B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Alarm and message Number Message Description 217 DUPLICATE G251 (COM- G51.2 (or G251) is further comman- MANDS) ded in the polygonal turning mode. Modify the program. 218 NOT FOUND P/Q COM- P or Q is not commanded in the MAND IN G251 G51.2 (or the G251) block
  • Page 7446. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.11.2 Polygonal Turning with Two Spindles General In a configuration where two or more serial spindles are used, spindle rotation control is applied to the workpiece rotation axis (master axis) and the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis) with a
  • Page 745B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION (R is omissible. If it is not specified at all, the phase difference is assumed to be 0. If bit 5 (PCOF) of parameter No. 7602 = 1 to disable phase control, the R command is ignored, but no alarm condition is assumed.) The G51.2 command is modal. Once specifi
  • Page 7466. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 If the specified polygon synchronization axis speed (S Q/P for the first spindle at S rpm) exceeds the clamp speed specified in parameter No. 7621, the polygon synchronization axis speed is clamped, and P/S alarm No. 5018 is issued. Each time the spindle spee
  • Page 747B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION G50. 2 ; Step 9. Release the polygon synchronization mode. M∆j ; Change to a finishing tool. T∆∆ jj ; . G51. 2 P1 Q2 ; Step 10. Change the spindle speed for finishing S2000; (master axis at 2000 min–1 and polygon synchronization axis at 4000 min–1 with a . ph
  • Page 7486. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 CAUTION 1 DGN indicates the loop gain because this function requires that both spindles be controlled with the same loop gain. However, no alarm is issued even if the loop gain is different between the spindles. (For the serial spindle control unit, the param
  • Page 749B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION #4 to #7 Causes for P/S alarm No. 218 When P/S alarm No. 218 occurs, the polygon synchronization mode is released, but the indication of its causes remains until the alarm is cleared by a reset. #0 The specified speed is too low during spindle–spindle polygon
  • Page 7506. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Indication of values specified during the spindle–spindle polygon synchronization mode DGN 474 Rotation ratio for the master axis during the spindle–spindle polygon synchronization mode (P command value) This indication is the current rotation ratio (P comman
  • Page 751B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Signal Polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs the PMC that the system is in the polygon synchronization mode. [Output condition] The polygon synchronization mode command (G51.2) sets this signal
  • Page 7526. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Spindle polygonal speed arrival signal PSAR [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs the PMC that the spindle has reached its constant–speed for polygon synchronization during polygonal turning with two spindles. [Output condition] During pol
  • Page 753B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION D PMC sequence When a G51.2 is issued to put the system in the polygon synchronization mode, the polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN turns on. Set up a PMC sequence for the polygon synchronization mode by monitoring this signal with a PMC la
  • Page 7546. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Sequence common to methods (A) and (B) Regardless of whether the method you use is (A) or (B), set up the PMC sequence as follows: D Do not use the SFR/SRV signal to switch the rotation direction of the first spindle. Instead, fix the energizing method of the
  • Page 755B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7602 COF HST HSL HDR SNG MNG [Data type] Bit MNG The rotational direction of the master axis (first spindle) in the spindle–spindle polygon turning mode is: 0: Not reversed. 1: Reversed. SNG The rotational direction of the po
  • Page 7566. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 COF In spindle–spindle polygon turning mode, phase control is: 0: Used. 1: Not used. CAUTION When the use of phase control is not selected, the steady state is reached in a shorter time because phase synchronization control is not applied. Once steady rotatio
  • Page 757B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 7621 Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] min–1 [Valid data range] For polygon turning with two spindles: Set a value between 0 and 32767, but which does not exceed the maximum allow
  • Page 7586. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Master axis in spindle–spindle polygon turning 7640 Polygon synchronous axis in spindle–spindle polygon turning 7641 [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0, 1 to Number of spindles, or m × 10 + n (m:1 to Number of paths, n:1 to Number of spindles) These parame
  • Page 759B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Alarm and message Number Message Description 218 NOT FOUND P/Q COM- The G51.2 block does not contain P or Q, MAND IN G251 or a specified value is invalid. The causes of this alarm are detailed in DGN No. 471. (See below.) DGN No. 471#7 NPQ → When P and Q are
  • Page 7606. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 ⋅ To the contrary to P/S alarm No. 221, P/S alarm No. 194 occurs if another NC control spindle function is specified during the two–spindle polygon synchronization mode. Caution CAUTION 1 The maximum spindle speed for each gear stage (No. 3741 to 3744) must b
  • Page 761B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION CAUTION 6 During polygon synchronization mode, speed change and phase adjustment are performed each time the spindle speed is changed. Therefore, this mode cannot be used together with a function that causes continuous spindle speed change (such as G96 consta
  • Page 7626. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.12 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES) General When a tool with a rotation axis (C–axis) is moved in the XY plane during cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so that the C–axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig. 6.
  • Page 763B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION [Data type] Bit axis [Valid data range] ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis ROSx ROTx Description 0 0 Linear axis @ Inch/metric conversion is done. @ All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Not rounded in 0 to 360_) @ Stored pitch error compensati
  • Page 7646. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 5482 Limit value that ignores the rotation insertion of normal direction control axis [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 The rotation block of a normal
  • Page 765B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5484 ANM CTI SDC [Data type] Bit SDC In normal direction control: 0 : A C–axis movement is automatically inserted between blocks so that the C–axis is directed at right angles to the direction of motion at the start point of each block
  • Page 7666. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, no interference check is made in cutter compensation C. ANM In AI contour control mode, the normal direction control function is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 5485 Limit imposed on the insertion of a single block for rotati
  • Page 767B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 – 240000 6 – 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 – 96000 6 – 48000 Sp
  • Page 7686. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.13 EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) General Exponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of a workpiece with respect to movement on the rotary axis. Furthermore, exponential interpolation performs linear interpolation with respect to ano
  • Page 769B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 5643 Amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponential interpolation [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 Th
  • Page 7706. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.14 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) General Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on the program command. D For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such as at corners, machining is performed exactly as specified
  • Page 771B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.12 Smooth interpolation 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) 745
  • Page 7726. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.15 HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION General In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation is enable. When one of the circular interpolation axes is set to a hy
  • Page 773B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.16 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B (M SERIES) General Helical interpolation B moves the tool helically. This interpolation can be executed by specifying the circular interpolation command together with up to four additional axes in AI contour control mode. Basicall
  • Page 7746. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6.17 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) General Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolation command together with a desired number of revolutions or a desired increment (decrement) for the radius per revolution
  • Page 775B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Parameter 3471 Allowable difference between the specified end point and that calculated from the increment (or decrement) and number of revolutions for spiral or conical interpolation [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Me
  • Page 7766. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 5122 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN An invalid command has been speci- SPIRAL fied for spiral or conical interpolation. The most likely causes are as follows: 1) L = 0 specified 2) Q = 0 specified 3) R/, R/, C specified 4) Hei
  • Page 777B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.18 NURBS INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) General Many computer–aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal dies for automobiles and airplanes utilize non–uniform rational B–spline (NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies. This functi
  • Page 7786. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NURBS interpolation must be specified in high–precision contour control mode (between G05 P10000 and G05 P0). The CNC executes NURBS interpolation while smoothly accelerating or decelerating the movement so that the acceleration on each axis will not exceed t
  • Page 779B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.19 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G28, G30, G53) General When positioning operation of linear interpolation type is specified (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 = 1), the following operations can also be set as operations of linear interpolation type by setting bit
  • Page 7806. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Note 1 Manual intervention Positioning of non–linear interpolation type is performed if the automatic operation stop state is set by feed hold or mode switching during movement then the subsequent operation of the program is performed after the machine is mov
  • Page 781B–63523EN–1/03 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.20 THREE– DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) General By specifying an intermediate point and end point for an arc, circular interpolation can be performed in three–dimensional space. As shown below, three points, namely, a start point (current po
  • Page 7826. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 5430 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In modal state where three–dimension- 3–D al circular interpolation must not be spe- cified, three–dimensional circular inter- polation (G02.4/G03.4) was specified. A code that must not be s
  • Page 7837. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL 757
  • Page 7847. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1 The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed functions are available: FEEDRATE CONTROL 1. Rapid traverse When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at a rapid traverse rat
  • Page 7857. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE 1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference point return, etc., as well as the move command G00. The manual rapid traverse also includes the rap
  • Page 7867. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 – 240000 30 – 100000 Inch m
  • Page 7877. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp General A common upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along each axis with parameter No. 1422. If an actual cutting feedrate (with an override applied) exceeds a specified upper limit, it
  • Page 7887. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in parameter No. 1422 is effective. 2 If th
  • Page 7897. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting Feed 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting Feed (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting
  • Page 7907. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Format For M series G94; G code for feed per minute (Group 05) F_; Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min) For T series G98; G code for feed per minute (Group 05) F_; Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min) Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1403
  • Page 7917. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE 1 When FCD = 1: If the block containing a G command (G98, G99) does not include an F command, the last F command specified is assumed to be specified in the G command mode of the block. Example 1: N1 G99 ; N2 Faaaa G98 ; -
  • Page 7927. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.4 Feed Per Revolution/ Manual Feed Per Revolution General D Feed per revolution After specifying G95 (G99 for T series) (in the feed per revolution mode), the amount of feed of the tool per spindle revolution is to be direc
  • Page 7937. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1423 Feedrate in jog feed for each axis [Data type] Word axis When JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is set to 1 (feed per revolution) in T series, specify a feedrate in jog feed (feed per revolution) with an override of 100% a
  • Page 7947. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.5 One–digit F Code Feed (M series) General When a one–digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrate set for that number in a parameter (Nos. 1451 to 1459) is used. When F0 is specified, the rapid traverse rate
  • Page 7957. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Parameter 1450 Number of revolution of manual pulse generator to reach maximum feedrate [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 127 Set the constant that determines the change in feedrate as the manual pulse generator is rotat
  • Page 7967. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1460 Upper limit of feedrate for the F1–digit feed command (F1 to F4) 1461 Upper limit of feedrate for the F1-digit feed command (F5 to F9) [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Val
  • Page 7977. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.6 Feedrate Inverse Time Specification (M series) General Feedrate of the tool can be specified by the move distance of the block and inverse time (FRN). D Linear interpolation 1 Speed Speed: mm/min (metric input) (G01) FRN=
  • Page 7987. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.7 Override 7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override General An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No. 1421). Also, 1% rapid traverse override select s
  • Page 7997. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Signal Rapid traverse override signal ROV1,ROV2 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals override the rapid traverse rate [Operation] These code signals correspond to the rates as follows: Rapid trave
  • Page 8007. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 ⋅ Signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are inverted signals. To set an override value of 1%, set signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 to 1111110, which corresponds to a binary code of 0000001. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G014 ROV2 ROV1 G096
  • Page 8017. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.3 Rapid traverse override 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.5.3 Rapid traverse override (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR
  • Page 8027. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Feedrate Override signal *FV0 to *FV7 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals override the cutting feedrate. Eight binary code signals correspond to override values as follows: 7 Override value = Σ
  • Page 8037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Same examples are listed below. *FV0 – *FV7 Override value 4 0 (%) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 3 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 5 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 15 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
  • Page 8047. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting feed 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting feed (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.3 Cutting
  • Page 8057. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0 7.1.7.4 Override cancel General The override cancel signal fixes the feedrate override to 100%. Signal Override cancel signal OVC
  • Page 8067. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.8 Automatic Corner Override (M series) General D Inner corner automatic When G62 is specified, and the tool path with cutter compensation override applied forms an inner corner, the feedrate is automatically overridden at b
  • Page 8077. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL D Override value An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value is valid even for dry run and F1–digit feed specification. In the feed per minute mode, the actual feedrate is as follows: F × (inner corner a
  • Page 8087. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 In circular cutting with an inward offset, the actual feedrate for a specified feedrate (F) becomes as follows: Rc Rc: Radius of the path of the cutter’s center F Rp: Programmed radius Rp As the actual feedrate becomes the valu
  • Page 8097. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1713 Distance Le from the starting point in inner corner automatic override [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Input in mm 1 0.1 0.01 mm Input in inches 0.1 0.01 0.001 inch [Valid data range] 0
  • Page 8107. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.9 External Deceleration General These signals decelerate the feedrate of the control axes down to the speed which has been set by parameter No. 1426 and 1427. Signal External deceleration signal *+ED1 to *+ED8 *–ED1 t
  • Page 8117. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1005 EDMx EDPx [Data type] Bit axis EDPx External deceleration signal in the positive direction for each axis 0 : Valid only for rapid traverse 1 : Valid for rapid traverse and cutting feed EDM
  • Page 8127. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.10 Feed Stop Function General During axis motion, the feed stop function checks a position deviation amount at all times. When the amount exceeds the “feed stop position deviation amount” set by the parameter (No. 1832), th
  • Page 8137. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.11 Feedrate Clamping by Arc Radius (M series) General When an arc is cut at a high speed in circular interpolation, a radial error exists between the actual tool path and the programmed arc. An approximation of this error c
  • Page 8147. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 When a given arc radius R and the maximum permissible speed V for that arc radius are set as parameters, the maximum permissible speed v for an arc with a programmed radius r can be obtained from expression 3. Then, if a specif
  • Page 8157. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Expressions 1, 2, and 4 are approximate expressions. This means that, as the arc radius becomes smaller, the approximate precision lowers. Therefore, even when the feedrate is clamped to the maximum permissible speed v obtained
  • Page 8167. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.12 Automatic Corner Deceleration General This function automatically controls the feedrate during corner machining according to the angle of a corner made by machining blocks or according to the feedrate difference for each
  • Page 8177. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL @ When linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feed is enabled If the angle made by blocks A and B is smaller than that specified in parameter No. 1740 (for the selected plane), and if the feedrates pr
  • Page 8187. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Block A (G01) Block B (G01) θ θ Block A (G02) Block B(G01) Angle made by two lines If a circular path is included, the angle between the tangent of the arc and another line is considered. 1741 Feedrate for assuming the terminat
  • Page 8197. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Caution CAUTION 1 The angle of the machining tool path is compared with that specified in parameter No. 1740 only for the selected plane. The actual feedrate and that specified in parameter No. 1741 are compared only for the fi
  • Page 8207. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 @ When linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feed is enabled If the difference between the feedrates of blocks A and B for each axis exceeds the value specified in parameter No. 1780, the feedrate at
  • Page 8217. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ; N2 N2 Y100. ; N1 Tool path if corner deceleration is not applied ← Tool path when corner deceleration was applied Speed F1000 Feedrate Without corner deceleration along With corner deceleration X axis F
  • Page 8227. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1601 ACD [Data type] Bit ACD Function for automatically reducing the feedrate at corners (automatic corner deceleration function) 0 : The function is not used. 1 : The function is used. #7 #6
  • Page 8237. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1781 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference–based automatic corner deceleration function (for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Un
  • Page 8247. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.4.3 Automatic corner deceleration 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.5.4.3 Automatic corner deceleration (For Machining Center) (B
  • Page 8257. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Parameter 1431 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the advanced preview control mode [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine
  • Page 8267. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in parameter No. 1431 is effective. 2 If a
  • Page 8277. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1602 LS2 CSD BS2 FWB [Data type] Bit FWB Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before interpolation 0 : Type A of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used. 1 : Type B of acceleration/decel
  • Page 8287. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 CSD In the function for automatically reducing a feedrate at corners, 0 : Angles are used for controlling the feedrate. 1 : Differences in feedrates are used for controlling the feedrate. LS2 Acceleration/deceleration after int
  • Page 8297. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE 1 For linear acceleration/deceleration, the function of linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is required. 2 For bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration, the function of bell–shaped acceleration/d
  • Page 8307. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1771 Parameter 2 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in the advanced preview control mode (time used to reach the maxi- mum machining speed during linear acceleration/decelerati
  • Page 8317. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Block A (G01) Block B (G01) θ θ Block A (G02) Block B (G01) Angle formed by two straight Angle formed an arc tangent and lines straight line 1780 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference based corner deceleration fun
  • Page 8327. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Deceleration is started beforehand to reach the feedrate set in the parameter when an overtravel alarm is issued (when a limit is reached) during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. By using this parameter, t
  • Page 8337. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Parameters for advanced @ Parameters for the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before in- preview control mode terpolation and normal mode Parameter No. Parameter description Advanced Normal mode preview control mode Accel
  • Page 8347. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE The optional functions usable in the advanced preview control mode are listed below. When using an optional function other than those listed below, turn off the advanced preview control mode before using the function,
  • Page 8357. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE S Workpiece coordinate system S Figure copy (M series) S Workpiece coordinate system preset S Cutter compensation B (M series) S Cutter compensation C (M series) S Tool–nose radius compensation (T series) S Corner arc S To
  • Page 8367. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.14 High–precision Contour Control by RISC (M series) General Some machining errors are due to the CNC. Such errors include machining errors caused by acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. To eliminate these errors,
  • Page 8377. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Name Function Absolute/incremental com- Combined use possible in the block mand Sequence number 5 digits Tape code EIA, ISO Tape format Word address format Control in/out Yes Optional block skip Yes Circle radius R specificatio
  • Page 8387. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 G18 : Plane selection (ZpXp plane) where, Yp is the Y–axis or its parallel axis; G19 : Plane selection (YpZp plane) where, Zp is the Z–axis or its parallel axis. G38 : Cutter compensation C with vector held G39 : Cutter compens
  • Page 8397. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.14.1 When feed per minute is specified, this function reads several tens of Look–ahead blocks ahead to perform acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, that is, to apply acceleration/deceleration to the specified fee
  • Page 8407. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Example of deceleration To ensure that the feedrate specified for a block is reached when the block is executed, deceleration is started in the previous block. Feedrate Specified feedrate Feedrate after accel- F3 P1 eration/dec
  • Page 8417. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Look–ahead bell–shaped To use this function, set bit 7 (BDO) and bit 1 (NBL) of parameter No. acceleration/deceleration 8402 to 1, and also set the following parameters: before interpolation Parameter No. 8400: Parameter 1 for
  • Page 8427. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D When maximum acceleration is not reached Acceleration + Time – Feedrate Time Acceleration The tool is accelerated to a specified feedrate, starting at the beginning of a block. The tool can be accelerated over multiple blocks
  • Page 8437. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Feedrate clamping based When the distance required to decelerate the tool from a specified feedrate on the total travel of the is less than the total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance, the tool in look–ahead feed
  • Page 8447. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D At the end of acceleration Feedrate control by look–ahead bell– shaped acceleration/ Feedrate deceleration before interpolation ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Specified feedrate ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Clamp feedrate ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
  • Page 8457. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL When the feed hold When the feed hold function is used during acceleration, control is function is used during performed as described below. acceleration D While applying constant or increasing acceleration Starting at the poin
  • Page 8467. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Feedrate command and If an F command is changed by, for example, another F command, the deceleration corner deceleration function, or the automatic feedrate determination function, look–ahead bell–shaped acceleration/decelerati
  • Page 8477. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Single block function When the single block function is specified while look–ahead while look–ahead bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used, bell–shaped control is performed as described below. accele
  • Page 8487. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 While the tool is not (1) A x Remaining travel for the tool in the block being executed when being accelerated or the single block function is specified decelerated when the The tool is gradually decelerated so that the feedrat
  • Page 8497. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL How the tool is stopped The tool is decelerated (or accelerated) over multiple blocks until the when decelerated over feedrate becomes 0. multiple blocks Feedrate Single block function specified Time CAUTION 1 Depending on the
  • Page 8507. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Caution CAUTION 1 When the specification of the dry run function or feedrate override function is changed, the acceleration/deceleration curve must be recalculated while the tool is actually moving along an axis. For this reaso
  • Page 8517. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL (3) The acceleration/deceleration change time is constant. If deceleration becomes necessary during acceleration, an acceleration/deceleration change occurs for the constant time specified in parameter No. 8416. This means that
  • Page 8527. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.14.2 This function reads several tens of blocks ahead to exercise automatic Automatic feedrate feedrate control. control function A feedrate is determined on the basis of the conditions listed below. If a specified feedrate
  • Page 8537. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Feedrate control In automatic feedrate control mode, the feedrate for the tool is controlled conditions as described below. - The feedrate required at a corner is calculated from the specified feedrate difference at the corner
  • Page 8547. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Suppose that the specified feedrate for the tool is 1,000 mm/min, and that the direction of tool movement changes by 90 degrees (from along the X–axis to along the Y–axis). Suppose also that an allowable feedrate difference of
  • Page 8557. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Example of feedrate As shown below, when a curve is formed by very short successive line determination based on segments, there is no significant feedrate difference along each axis at acceleration along each each corner. Conse
  • Page 8567. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 N8 N7 N9 N6 N5 Y N1 X N4 N3 N2 Feedrate along the X–axis Feedrate along the Y–axis Feedrate along the tangent to the path N1 N5 N9 N1 N5 N9 830
  • Page 8577. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Feedrate determination When a block specifies circular feed per minute and bit 3 (CIR) of based on an allowable parameter No. 8475 is set to 1, the feedrate of the tool is automatically acceleration during determined so that th
  • Page 8587. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Example of feedrate This function can be used when bit 4 (ZAG) of parameter No. 8451 is set determination based on to 1. cutting load Fig. 7.1.14.2 (a) When the tool is moving up along the Z–axis θ Fig. 7.1.14.2 (b) When the to
  • Page 8597. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Z XY plane 30 deg 90 Area 1 deg 60 Area 4 deg 45 deg Area 3 Area 2 CAUTION The feedrate determination function that is based on cutting load uses an NC command to determine the direction of movement along the Z–axis. This means
  • Page 8607. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Automatic speed control Involute interpolation automatic speed control overrides a specified in involute interpolation feedrate automatically, in the following two ways, during involute interpolation to obtain a high–quality su
  • Page 8617. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL (2) Override near the basic circle Near the basic circuit, the change in curvature of an involute curve is relatively large. If such areas are cut at a programmed feedrate, a heavy load may be placed on the cutter, preventing a
  • Page 8627. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.14.3 Signal HPCC mode signal MHPCC [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates that the system is set to high–precision contour control mode (HPCC mode). [Output condition] The signal is set to 1 if G05 P10
  • Page 8637. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.14.4 Parameter Parameters of linear accelĆ eration and deceleration before interpolation 8400 Parameter 1 for determining a linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Valid dat
  • Page 8647. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8402 BDO DST BLK NBL [Data type] Bit BDO, NBL Set the type of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. BDO NBL Meaning 0 0 Acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation is of lin- ear type 1 1
  • Page 8657. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL In case this parameter is set to 1, Fine acceleration/deceleration is disabled at the rapid travers in HPCC mode. Type of rapid traverse MSU SG0 STG HG0 Executed on CNC side 1 0 0 — Executed as G01 — 1 0 — with the RISC board E
  • Page 8667. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 8416 The time required to the maximum acceleration in advanced preview bell– shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets th
  • Page 8677. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Parameters of automatic feedrate control 8410 Allowable velocity difference in velocity determination considering the velocity difference at corners [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of
  • Page 8687. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 8456 Area–2 override [Data type] Word [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 100 (Standard setting: 80) This parameter specifies an override in area 2 of velocity calculation considering the cutting load. 8457 Area–3 override
  • Page 8697. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 8465 Maximum allowable feedrate for automatic feedrate control [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 10 – 240000 1 – 100000 I
  • Page 8707. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8475 CIR BIP [Data type] Bit CIR The function of automatic feedrate control considering acceleration and deceleration during circular interpolation is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. When 1 is set, parameter No
  • Page 8717. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1768 Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed in HPCC mode [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 8 to 512 NOTE The function for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpola
  • Page 8727. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 5616 Override value at the start of override 2 near the basic circle 5617 Override value at the start of override 3 near the basic circle 5618 Override value at the start of override 4 near the basic circle 5619 Override value
  • Page 8737. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE When parameter No. 5621 or 5622 is set to 0, constant acceleration control is not applied during involute interpolation in high–precision contour control mode. The other parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6901 PSF [Data ty
  • Page 8747. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 LM2 In HPCC mode, a stroke check before movement for the second stored stroke limit is: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. SG0 When G00 is specified in HPCC mode: 0 : The setting of bit 1 (MSU) of parameter No. 8403 is followed.
  • Page 8757. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8485 CDS INV PRW G02 G81 G51 [Data type] Bit G51 In high–precision contour control (HPCC) mode, the scaling/coordinate system rotation functions are: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. G81 In high–precision cont
  • Page 8767. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.14.6 Note D Acceleration/deceleratio n before interpolation in look–ahead blocks NOTE If there is a series of very short blocks, for each of which the rate of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is low, the actua
  • Page 8777. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Notes on positioning When executing a G00 command when bit 7 of parameter No. 8403 (SG0) (G00) is set to 1, note the following: WARNING Linear interpolation positioning is performed. CAUTION 1 The G00 command is replaced with t
  • Page 8787. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.15 Positioning by Optimal Acceleration General When a rapid traverse command is specified during automatic operation, the function positioning by optimal acceleration can be used to adjust the rapid traverse rate, time cons
  • Page 8797. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Rapid traverse When rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration is used, T1 in bell–shaped the figure below and the rapid traverse rate are adjusted. T2 is not acceleration/deceleration adjusted. Rapid traverse rate Ti
  • Page 8807. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6131 OAD [Data type] Bit axis OAD The function for positioning by optimul acceleration is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 6141 Distance D1 for level 1 (metric input, or rotation axis) 6142 Distance
  • Page 8817. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE 1 The settings must satisfy the relationship D1 < D2 < D3 < D4 < D5 < D6. 2 Up to seven levels can be used for adjustment. When using four levels, for example, set D4 to 99999999. 3 For diameter programming axes, set a dia
  • Page 8827. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 6181 Level 1 servo loop gain 6182 Level 2 servo loop gain 6183 Level 3 servo loop gain 6184 Level 4 servo loop gain 6185 Level 5 servo loop gain 6186 Level 6 servo loop gain 6187 Level 7 servo loop gain [Data type] Word axis [U
  • Page 8837. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL With AI nano contour control, a position command to be output to the digital servo system is calculated in nanometers by nano interpolation, so that the machine moves very smoothly for improved surface precision. Format G05.1 Q
  • Page 8847. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Nano interpolation (AI A program conventionally used (IS–B command or IS–C command) can nano contour control be used, and a position command to be output to the digital servo system only) is calculated in nanometers. As a resul
  • Page 8857. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL (Example of deceleration) To execute a block at a specified feedrate, the feedrate is reduced from that of the previous block. Feedrate Point 1 Specified feedrate Feedrate resulting F3 from acceleration/ deceleration before Poi
  • Page 8867. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Look–ahead bell–shaped Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feedrate in the acceleration/deceleration AI contour control/AI nano contour control mode can be switched from before interpolation (The the line
  • Page 8877. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Acceleration/deceleration is performed as described below when the feedrate is changed. Deceleration: In order to end deceleration before entering into a block that changes the feedrate, bell–shaped deceleration is performed st
  • Page 8887. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ; N2 Y100. ; N2 Tool path when tool movement is not decelerated at the corner Tool path when tool movement is decelerated at the corner Feedrate on the X–axis N1 Feedrate When deceleration is not performe
  • Page 8897. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Feedrate clamping by When a curve is made up of a series of short straight lines as shown in the acceleration figure below, the difference in feedrate on each axis at each corner is not large. Therefore, deceleration by feedrat
  • Page 8907. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Feedrate on X Feedrate on Y Tongent direction feed rate N1 N5 N9 N1 N5 N9 Without feedrate clamping Without feedrate clamping Feedrate clamping by This function can suppress acceleration in an arc machining block to an arc radi
  • Page 8917. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE As the specified arc radius becomes smaller, the maximum allowable feedrate v falls. To prevent the maximum allowable feedrate from becoming too small, the lower limit for feedrate clamping based on the arc radius can be s
  • Page 8927. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Feedrate Linear acceleration/deceleration Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration ta: Depends on linear acceleration/deceleration. tb: Bell–shaped time constant tc: Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time tc = ta + tb ta is no
  • Page 8937. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Involute interpolation During involute interpolation, the following two overrides are applied to a specified cutting feedrate to produce a cutting surface of higher machining precision: (1) Override at the time of cutter compen
  • Page 8947. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 When the curvature radius at a cutting point reaches a value in the range specified by (Rlmt1) to (Rlmt5), an override is applied as described below. When Rlmt1 > Rcp " Rofs y Rlmt2 100 – OVR2 OVRb = (Rcp " Rofs – Rlmt2) + OVR2
  • Page 8957. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE 1 When an override in the neighborhood of a basic circle is enabled, an override at the time of cutter compensation inside offsetting is disabled. The two overrides cannot be enabled at the same time. 2 When the distance f
  • Page 8967. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Name Description Chopping Hobbing machine function Simple electric gear box Learning control Preview repetitive control Inch/metric switching f * (G20, G21) Interlock f Specified–axis interlock f The movement of the tool on all
  • Page 8977. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Name Description Exact stop (G09) f Exact stop mode (G61) f Tapping mode (G63) f Linear interpolation (G01) f Circular interpolation f (Multiple quadrants allowed) (G02, G03) Exponential interpolation (G02.3, G03.3) Dwell (G04)
  • Page 8987. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Name Description 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference f * position return (G30) Floating reference position f * return (G30.1) Normal direction control f (AI contour control) (G41.1, G42.1) Bit 2 (ANM) of parameter No. 5484 must be set
  • Page 8997. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Name Description Feedrate override 0% to 254% Second feedrate override Feed by F command with To enable feedrate changing by the manual one digit handle, bit 1 (AF1) of parameter No. 7055 must be set to 1. Inverse time feed (G9
  • Page 9007. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Name Description Programmable data input f * (G10) Only the tool offset value, workpiece origin offset, and parameter can be modified. Custom macro B f See the item of notes on using custom mac- ros. Custom macro common vari- f
  • Page 9017. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Name Description Simple spindle synchroniza- f tion Rigid tapping f * Bit 5 (G8S) of parameter No. 1602 or bit 3 (ACR) of parameter No. 7051 must be set to 1. (AI contour control) f * Bit 3 (ACR) of parameter No. 7051 must be s
  • Page 9027. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Name Description Program restart f As an acceleration/deceleration time constant for movement to a restart position, the following parameters are used: When exponential acceleration/decelera- tion is used: Parameter No. 1624 an
  • Page 9037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Conditions for entering Before G05.1 Q1, the following modal codes must be specified. If this AI contour control mode condition is not satisfied, P/S alarm No. 5111 will be issued. G code Description G00 Positioning G01 Linear
  • Page 9047. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter D Parameters related to linear acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation 1770 Maximum machining feedrate during linear acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Valid data r
  • Page 9057. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1784 Speed when an overtravel alarm is issued during linear acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millime
  • Page 9067. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 When 0 is set, the above control is not performed. 2 When stroke check is invalid, the above control is also invalid. 3 The above control is valid only for stored stroke check 1. 4 The above control is exercised on those
  • Page 9077. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL D Parameters related to feedrate clamping by arc radius 1731 Arc radius for the upper limit imposed on feedrate [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input
  • Page 9087. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Involute interpolation 5611 Radius of curvature at cutting point for starting basic circle neighborhood override 1 (Rlmt1) 5612 Radius of curvature at cutting point for starting basic circle neighborhood override 2 (Rlmt2) 56
  • Page 9097. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL The curvature radiuses Rlmt1 through Rlmt5 and the override values OVR2 through OVR5 must have the relationships indicated below. If the following relationships are not satisfied, overrides in the neighborhood of a basic circle
  • Page 9107. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE To select bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration, the option for rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration is required. BEL In AI contour control mode or AI nano contour control: 0 : Linear acceleration/decelerat
  • Page 9117. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6901 PSF [Data type] Bit PSF In high–precision contour control mode (M series), AI contour control mode (M series), AI nano–contour control mode (M series), or advanced preview control mode, position swi
  • Page 9127. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 When the serial spindle does not support advanced preview control of rigid tapping, AI contour control mode or AI nano contour control mode must be turned off in rigid tapping. Setting this parameter and satisfying the followin
  • Page 9137. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7054 AIL AZR AIR HPL [Data type] Bit HPL If HPCC mode is specified in AI contour control mode or AI nano contour control mode and a command unavailable in HPCC mode is found, the NC processes the command
  • Page 9147. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 When an index table indexing axis is specified, G27, G28, G30, G30.1, or G53 is executed with AI contour control turned off, regardless of the setting of bit 3 (AZR) of parameter No. 7054. 2 When G27, G28, G30, G30.1, or
  • Page 9157. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE 1 If an axis for which a reference position is established and an axis for which no reference position is established are simultaneously specified with G28 when bit 2 (ALZ) of parameter No. 7055 is set to 1, G28 is execute
  • Page 9167. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Parameter numbers in (In the tables below, the AI contour control mode and AI nano contour standard mode, control mode are referred to as AI contour control.) advanced preview (1) Parameters related to linear acceleration/dec
  • Page 9177. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL (4) Parameters related to feedrate clamping by arc radius Parameter No. Parameter Standard Advanced AI contour mode preview control control Arc radius for the upper limit 1731 of feedrate Upper limit imposed on fee- 1730 drate
  • Page 9187. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 5110 IMPROPER G–CODE An invalid G code is specified in AI (G05.1 G1 MODE) contour control mode or AI nano con- tour control mode. A command is specified for the index table indexing
  • Page 9197. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 3 When the dry run signal is inverted from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 during movement along an axis, the speed of movement is increased or reduced to a specified speed without first being reduced to zero. 4 When a no–movement block
  • Page 9207. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Notes on using system When a system variable listed in the table below is used in a macro variables program, and the macro program needs to be executed after the block immediately preceding the macro program is executed, an M c
  • Page 9217. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Example) O0001 O2000 N1 X10.Y10.; (Mxx;) Inserts an M code block for suppressing buffering. N2 M98P2000; N100 #1=#5041; (Reads the current position along the X–axis.) N3 Y200.0; N101 #2=#5042; (Read the current position along t
  • Page 9227. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Format G05.1 Q_ ; Q1: AI advanced preview control mode on Q0: AI advanced preview control mode off NOTE 1 Always specify G05.1 in an independent block. 2 AI advanced preview control mode is also canceled by a reset. Functions v
  • Page 9237. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE When a value of ”0” is set as the character code, ”AI APC” blinks. For other parameters, see the description of ”Parameter” in the subsection describing AI contour control. NOTE 1 Some parameters of functions unavailable f
  • Page 9247. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 The detection unit is normally used as the unit for output from the NC to the servo system. The nano–interpolation function can perform output to the servo system in thousandths of the detection unit to increase the machining p
  • Page 9257. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.18.1 Look–ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Acceleration/ There are the following types of acceleration/deceleration: Linear deceleration types acceleration/deceleration before interpolation and bell–shap
  • Page 9267. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Example of acceleration Acceleration is performed so that the feedrate specified for the target block is reached at the execution. Feedrate Specified feedrate F3 Feedrate determined by acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpol
  • Page 9277. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL D Determining the Acceleration/deceleration is performed with the maximum tangential tangential acceleration acceleration which does not exceed the acceleration set for each axis. (Example) Allowable acceleration for the X–axis
  • Page 9287. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 D Deceleration Deceleration is started in a prior block so that the feedrate specified for the target block is reached at the beginning of the block. Deceleration extending over multiple blocks can be performed. Feedrate Feedra
  • Page 9297. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL B: Travel distance required until the feedrate after acceleration/ deceleration terminates is decreased to feedrate 0 (b) When A + B is longer than the remaining travel distance of the block being executed when a single block i
  • Page 9307. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 (b) When A is longer than the remaining travel distance of the block being executed when a single block is specified Deceleration may extend over multiple blocks and be stopped. Deceleration is stopped with the method described
  • Page 9317. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.18.2 In fine HPCC mode, blocks are read in advance to automatically control Feedrate control method the feedrate. The feedrate is determined according to the following conditions. If the specified feedrate exceeds the deter
  • Page 9327. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 (b) The feedrate in a block is obtained according to the condition for the acceleration for each axis at the corners at the start and end points of the block. Deceleration is performed so that the feedrate in the block does not
  • Page 9337. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Deceleration according With look–ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the to the feedrate difference tangential feedrate is smoothly changed. For this reason, no path error is at each corner caused by accelerat
  • Page 9347. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 The method for deceleration according to the feedrate difference differs depending on the setting of bit 6 (FNW) of parameter No. 19500. When this parameter is set to ”0”, the maximum feedrate at which the allowable feedrate di
  • Page 9357. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Deceleration according When continuous minute straight lines form curves as shown in the to the acceleration for example in the figure below, the feedrate difference for each axis at each each axis corner is not so large. For t
  • Page 9367. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 The method for feedrate determination according to the acceleration differs depending on the setting of bit 6 (FNW) of parameter No. 19500. When this parameter is set to ”0”, the maximum feedrate at which the allowable accelera
  • Page 9377. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Deceleration according This function is valid when bit 4 (ZAG) of parameter No. 8451 is set to the cutting load 1. ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ Fig. 7.1.18.2 (c) When the tool moves upward along the
  • Page 9387. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 X–Y plane 30° Range 1 90° 60° 45° CAUTION 1 The function of determining the feedrate according to the cutting load is effective only when the tool is attached in the direction parallel to the Z–axis. For this reason, this funct
  • Page 9397. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Override for the The following shows the override specifications for the feedrate determined feedrate determined by the function of decelerating according to the feedrate difference in look–ahead acceleration/deceleration befor
  • Page 9407. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter 1768 Time constant used for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in mode in which look–ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [
  • Page 9417. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Set the acceleration change time for bell–shaped acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation (time required for changing from the constant feedrate status (A) to the constant acceleration/deceleration status (C) in which th
  • Page 9427. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 8456 Override for range 2 that is applied during deceleration according to the cutting load in AI high–precision contour control 8457 Override for range 3 that is applied during deceleration according to the cutting load in AI
  • Page 9437. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 8465 Maximum feedrate for automatic feedrate control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 1 to 60
  • Page 9447. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 When this parameter is set to 1, the feedrate decreased by feedrate determination according to the feedrate difference and acceleration is reduced by up to about 30% as compared with the feedrate determined when the parameter i
  • Page 9457. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE In AI high precision contour control mode or AI NANO high precision contour control mode, when very small linear interpolation blocks which have the following 1) condition, are commanded continuously, since these commands
  • Page 9467. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE (2) Parameter No.19503#7 (FLP) This parameter is available in case both CNC software and RISC software are the following series and edition. In this condition, this parameter No.19503#7 (FLP) should be set to ”0”. Also, in
  • Page 9477. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL If the override is enabled for the function of decelerating according to the cutting load, the feedrate may be lower than the lowest feedrate. When AI high–precision contour control is not used, the lowest feedrate for decelera
  • Page 9487. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.19 RISC Processor Operation (AI High–precision Contour Control/ AI Nano High– precision Contour Control/Tool Length Compensation Along the Tool Axis/ Three–dimensional Cutter Compensation/ Tool tip Control/ Three–dimensiona
  • Page 9497. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL When execution of the above commands on the CNC is specified, AI high–precision contour control, AI nano high–precision contour control, tool tip control, tool length compensation along the tool axis, three–dimensional cutter c
  • Page 9507. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Function Specifics Remarks Least input increment 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, 0.0001 inch One–tenth input increment 0.0001 mm, 0.0001 deg, 0.00001 inch Inch/metric conversion Switching between inch and metric modes cannot be per- forme
  • Page 9517. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Function Specifics Remarks Interpolation functions Positioning G00 The advanced preview control function, multibuffer function, AI high–precision contour control function excluding nano–inter- polation, and AI nano high–precisi
  • Page 9527. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Function Specifics Remarks Look–ahead linear accelera- tion/deceleration before inter- polation Look–ahead bell–shaped ac- Constant acceleration celeration/deceleration before change time type interpolation AI high–precision co
  • Page 9537. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Function Specifics Remarks Coordinate system rotation G68, G69 By setting the related parameter, AI high–precision contour control or AI nano high–precision contour control mode can be turned on and off in coordinate system rot
  • Page 9547. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Function Specifics Remarks Tool tip control G43.4, G43.5 A command which automatically cancels AI high–precision con- tour control or AI nano high–precision contour control mode temporarily cannot be specified. An independent M
  • Page 9557. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL D When bit 0 (R_SCL) of parameter No. 19600 is set to 1, G51 is specified in the program. (Scaling) D When bit 1 (R_MIR) of parameter No. 19600 is set to 1, G51.1 is specified in the program. (Programmable mirror image) D When
  • Page 9567. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 X–, Y–, Z–, and A–axes Axes for which control on the RISC processor is enabled B– and C–axes Axes for which control on the RISC processor is disabled #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8480 RI2 RI1 RI0 [Input type] Parameter input [Data t
  • Page 9577. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL R_ROT The coordinate system rotation function is: 0 : Executed on the CNC. 1 : Assumed to be 5–axis control mode and executed on the RISC processor. R_3DC The three–dimensional coordinate conversion function is: 0 : Executed on
  • Page 9587. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 S AI contour control G05.1Q1, G5.1Q0 S Hypothetical axis interpolation G07 S Advanced preview control G08 (Use AI high–precision contour control.) S Polar coordinate interpolation G12.1, G13.1 S Polar coordinate command G15, G1
  • Page 9597. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL S Feed per revolution G95 S Constant surface speed control G96, G97 S In–feed control G160, G161 Restriction 4 In AI high–precision contour control, AI nano high–precision contour control, and 5–axis control modes, the followin
  • Page 9607. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.1.20 High–speed Linear Interpolation (M series) General The high–speed linear interpolation function processes a move command related to a controlled axis not by ordinary linear interpolation but by high–speed linear interpol
  • Page 9617. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL D Interpolation period In high–speed linear interpolation mode, the NC interpolation period can be changed. As the interpolation period decreases, the machining speed and precision increase. IT2, IT1, and IT0 bits (bits 6, 5, a
  • Page 9627. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7501 IT2 IT1 IT0 [Data type] Bit IT2 IT1 IT0 0 0 0 : The interpolation period in high–speed linear interpolation mode is 8 ms. 0 1 0 : The interpolation period in high–speed linear interpolatio
  • Page 9637. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.21 Look–ahead Bell–Shaped Acceleration/ Deceleration Before Interpolation Time Constant Change Function (M Series) General In Look–ahead bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the speed during accelerat
  • Page 9647. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching Speed specifiedacceleration/deceleration Specified speed Time T1 T1 T2 Fig. 7.1.21(b) If linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching the specified acceleration occurs in AI contou
  • Page 9657. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Description D Methods of specifying The acceleration/deceleration reference speed is the feedrate used as the the acceleration/ reference for calculating optimum acceleration. In Fig. 7.1.21(c), it is deceleration reference equ
  • Page 9667. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Even if the feedrate is changed during the execution of the machining program, the acceleration/deceleration reference speed specified with the above command remains in effect. If this occurs, the machining time may become long
  • Page 9677. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL (1) If the bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation time constant T2’ is calculated under the condition that the bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation must not have a linear portion, T2Ȁ +
  • Page 9687. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7066 Acceleration/decelerationreference speed for the bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant change function in AI Contour control mode or AI Nano contour control mode [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2 wor
  • Page 9697. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2 ACCELERATION/ DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/ Deceleration 7.2.1.1 Automatic acceleration/ deceleration General D Automatic acceleration/ To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automa
  • Page 9707. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Rapid traverse:Linear acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is set by parameter 1620) Cutting feed: Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is set by parameter 1622) Jog feed : Exponential acce
  • Page 9717. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE This parameter is effective only when the function of bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed is provided. If the function is not provided, the setting in CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No. 1610
  • Page 9727. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis. Except for
  • Page 9737. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1626 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/
  • Page 9747. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Rapid traverse block overlap disable signal ROVLP [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal disables rapid traverse block overlap. Siganl address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G053 ROVLP Parameter #7 #6 #5
  • Page 9757. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Example Fh: Rapid traverse feedrate X–axis feedrate α: Setting of parameter No. 1722 (feedrate reduction ratio) Fd: Feedrate where deceleration is terminated: = Fh×α/ 100 N1 G00 X- - ; N2 G00 X- - ; When the function of overlap
  • Page 9767. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 This function is enabled when the time constants for rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration T1 and T2 are specified in parameter Nos. 1620 and 1621, respectively.
  • Page 9777. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL D When the function is provided, set this parameter to time constant T1 used in bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse, and set parameter No. 1621 to time constant T2. D When the function is not provided, speci
  • Page 9787. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/ Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation General If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is enabled (bit 0 of parameter No. 1610, CTL), acceleration/deceleration
  • Page 9797. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is an optional function. This function is enabled when the CTL bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 1610) is specified. If bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after int
  • Page 9807. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1624 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis. [Data type] Word axis [
  • Page 9817. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Note NOTE If the optional function for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is not provided, exponential acceleration/deceleration is always selected, irrespective of the setting. 1 If linear ac
  • Page 9827. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 7.2.4 Bell–Shaped Acceleration/ Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation General The bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation provides smooth acceleration and deceleration to reduce stress and
  • Page 9837. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1610 JGLx CTBx CTLx [Data type] Bit axis CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run 0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied. 1 : Linear acceleration/d
  • Page 9847. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1622 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, linear acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, in cutting feed for each axis [Data type] Word axi
  • Page 9857. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Note NOTE 1 If bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation during cutting feed is enabled, bell–shaped acceleration/ deceleration is executed during cutting feed and during a dry run. Bell–shaped acceleration/dece
  • Page 9867. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 The function of linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in- creases or decreases the feedrate specified in the tangential direction. If the feedrate command is changed D Type A Acceleration/deceleration is started
  • Page 9877. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Deceleration is performed when the following condition is satisfied: Distance needed to reduce the cur- Distance to stored stroke limit 1 rent feedrate (tangential feedrate) for each axis < to that specified in parameter No. 17
  • Page 9887. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Feedrate Parameter 1: Parameter No. 1630 Parameter 1 Parameter 2: Parameter No. 1631 Time Parameter 2 NOTE 1 When 0 is set in parameter No. 1630 or parameter No. 1631, linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is di
  • Page 9897. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1784 Feedrate when overtravel alarm has generated during acceleration/decelerationbeforeinterpolation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter
  • Page 9907. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 If a block without a move command is found during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the movement is decelerated and temporarily stopped in the previous block. 2 If a one–shot G code is specified during acce
  • Page 9917. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.6 Corner Control 7.2.6.1 In–position check General Whether the position of the servo motor is within a specified range is checked. If the in–position check function is enabled, the CNC checks the position during deceleratio
  • Page 9927. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address . #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F104 INP8 INP7 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1601 NCI [Data type] Bit NCI Inposition check at deceleration 0 : Performed 1 : Not performed 1826 In–posit
  • Page 9937. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.6.2 In–position check independently of feed/rapid traverse General If separate in–position check for cutting feed and rapid traverse is executed, a small in–position check range can be specified between those cutting feed b
  • Page 9947. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 1826 In–position width for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 The in–position width is set for each axis. When the deviation of the machine position from the specified po
  • Page 9957. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63523EN–1/03 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.6.3 Error detect (T series) General Generally, the CNC does not zero the feedrate at the interface of two blocks during cutting feed. Because of this, a corner of a tool path may be rounded. This part causes the corner of t
  • Page 9967. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE If the error detect signal is on, a cutting block is not executed until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous cutting block has been completed. This function alone cannot prevent corner rounding due to delay c
  • Page 997B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 8 AUXILIARY FUNCTION 971
  • Page 9988. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 8.1 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION General D Miscellaneous Function When an M code address is programmed, a code signal and a strobe signal (M code) are sent to the machine. The machine uses these signals to turn on or off its functions. Usually, o
  • Page 999B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 3. It is possible to change over the scale factor of B output 1000 or 10000 when the decimal point input is omitted in the inch input system, using the parameter AUX (No.3405#0). When DPI=1. Command Output value When AUX is 1: B1 10000 When AUX is 0: B1 1000 Basi
  • Page 10008. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 (6) If the completion signal remains set to 1 for longer than period TFIN, specified in parameter No. 3011 (standard value: 16 msec), the CNC sets the strobe signal to 0 and reports that the completion signal has been received. (7) When the strobe signal is set t
  • Page 1001B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 2b. Execution of a miscellaneous function after move command completion (1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)(7)(8) (9) M command Mxx Move command Code signals M00–M31 (*2) Strobe signal MF PMC side action End signal FIN Distribution end signals DEN TMF TFIN Signal Miscellaneou
  • Page 10028. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Decode M signals DM00 , DM01 , DM02 , DM30 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals report particular miscellaneous functions are specified. The miscellaneous functions in a command program correspond to output sign
  • Page 1003B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Second auxiliary function code signals B00 to B31 Second auxiliary function strobe signal BF (T series) (M series) [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals report that second auxiliary functions have been specified. [O
  • Page 10048. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 The DEN signal turns to “0” when: · The execution of one block is completed NOTE A parameter NCI (No.1601#5) can specify, whether to only check if an acceleration/deceleration delay is eliminated, or to also check if a servo delay (error) has been reduced to with
  • Page 1005B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Parameter 3010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 1 ms [Valid data range] 16 to 32767 The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF after the M, S, T, and B codes are sent, respectively. M, S, T, B code MF,
  • Page 10068. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight. Example: When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed. 3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code 3031 Allowable number of digits for the S
  • Page 1007B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3405 AUX [Data type] Bit AUX The least increment of the command of the second miscellaneous function specified with a decimal point 0 : Assumed to be 0.001 1 : Depending on the input increment. (For input in mm, 0.001 is assumed, or for in
  • Page 10088. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameter Nos. 3421 and 3422, 3433 and 3424, 3425 and 3426, 3427 and 3428, 3429 and 3430, or 3431 and 3432, buffering for the next block is not performed unt
  • Page 1009B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Note NOTE 1 When a move command and miscellaneous function are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the following two ways: i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and miscellaneous function commands. ii) Executing miscellaneous
  • Page 10108. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.11.1 Miscellaneous function (M code) 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) II.11.4 2nd Auxiliary function (B code) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.11.1 Miscellaneous function (M code) (For Lathe) (B–6352
  • Page 1011B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 8.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK General Inhibits execution of a specified M, S, T and B function. That is, code signals and strobe signals are not issued. This function is used to check a program. Signal Auxiliary function lock signal AFL [Classification] In
  • Page 10128. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Auxiliary function lock check signal MAFL [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal reports the state of the auxiliary function lock signal AFL. [Output condition] This signal turns to “1” when: · The auxiliary function lock signal AFL is “1”
  • Page 1013B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 8.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK General So far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. However, this function allows up to three M codes to be contained in one block. Up to three M codes specified in a block are simultaneously output to the
  • Page 10148. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 M command (MaaMbbMcc;) Code signal M00-M31 Strobe signal MF Code signal M200-M215 Strobe signal MF2 Code signal M300-M315 Strobe signal MF3 PMC side operation End signal FIN TMF TFIN Signal 2nd, 3rd M function code signal M200 to M215 M300 to M315
  • Page 1015B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3404 M3B [Data type] Bit M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block 0 : One 1 : Up to three Caution CAUTION 1 M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not be specified together with another M code. 2 Some M co
  • Page 10168. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.11.2 Multiple M commands in a single 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) block 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.11.2 Multiple M commands in a single (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) block Series OPERATOR’S MANUA
  • Page 1017B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 8.4 HIGH–SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE General To accelerate M/S/T/B function execution, the high–speed M/S/T/B interface has simplified the transfer of the strobe and completion signals of the M/S/T/B functions. Whether to use the usual system or high–speed system for
  • Page 10188. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Next block Code signal Mxx Myy Strobe signal MF PMC side operation Miscellaneous function completion signal MFIN Fig. 8.4 (a) Timing chart of the high–speed system Next block Code signal Mxx Myy Strobe signal MF PMC side operation Completion signal FIN Fig. 8.4 (
  • Page 1019B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Spindle function completion signal SFIN [Classification] Input signal [Function] Reports that the execution of a spindle speed function using the high–speed M/S/T/B interface is completed. [Operation] For the operation and procedure of the control unit w
  • Page 10208. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 [Operation] Refer to the description of the output conditions and procedure described in “basic procedure.” External operation function completion signal (M series) EFIN [Classification] Input signal [Function] Indicates that the external operation funct
  • Page 1021B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 8.5 WAITING M CODE (TWO–PATH CONTROL) General Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the other during machining. By specifying an M code in a machining program for each path, the two paths can wait for each other at a specified block. When
  • Page 10228. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G063 NOWT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F063 WATO #1 Parameter 8110 Waiting M code range (minimum value) [Data type] Two–word [Valid data range] 0 and 100 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the minimum value of the waiting M cod
  • Page 1023B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 8.6 M CODE GROUP CHECK FUNCTION General This function checks whether combinations of M codes (up to three) specified in one block are correct. The function has two purposes. One of the purposes is to alarm if an M code which must not be combined with any other M
  • Page 10248. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 For M codes which must be used separately from other M codes, always set their group number to “1”. Such M codes include M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99. For M codes for which the CNC performs internal processing in addition to sending them to the machine, also
  • Page 1025B–63523EN–1/03 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION (iii) No. 3441 = 234, No. 3442 = 345, No. 3443 = 456, No. 3444 = 567 In this case, item numbers 100 to 199 correspond to M234 to M333, 200 to 299 correspond to M345 to M444, 300 to 399 correspond to M456 to M555, and 400 to 499 correspond to M567 to M666. The gro
  • Page 10268. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Now pressing the [READ] key displays the soft keys shown in Fig. 8.6 (d). > MDI **** *** *** 00 : 00 : 00 CANCEL EXEC Fig. 8.6 (d) To execute the read operation, just press the [EXEC] key. D Output Pressing the [PUNCH] key on the screen shown in Fig. 8.6 (c) disp
  • Page 1027B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 1001
  • Page 10289. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) General When up to five digits are specified after address S, code and strobe signals are sent out and used to control the spindle speed. The code signals are retained until another S code is issued. One S code is us
  • Page 1029B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT General There are two types of spindle motor control interfaces, spindle serial output and spindle analog output. The spindle serial output interface can control up to two serial spindles. The spindle analog out
  • Page 10309. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions. f=Available ×=Unavailable Serial spindle Analog spindle Spindle Function When used as the When used as the First serial Second serial first spindle (with third spindle spindle spindle
  • Page 1031B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE 1 The multispindle function is necessary. The function cannot be used for the first and second spindles simultaneously. 2 The multispindle function can control the speed of three spindles and switch the feedback signal between two position coders. It als
  • Page 10329. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal · Spindle control unit signals for the serial spindle (input), (output) → for the first serial spindle (input), (output) → for the second serial spindle These addresses are on the CNC.
  • Page 1033B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Parameter D Connection of serial spindle control unit #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3701 SS2 ISI [Data type] Bit ISI Specifieds whether the serial spindle interface is used. 0 : Used 1 : Not used NOTE 1 This parameter is enabled only when the serial spindle interfa
  • Page 10349. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Contents 749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR It is serial communication error while system is executing after power supply on. Following reasons can be considered. 1) Optical cable connection is fault or cable is not connected or cable is
  • Page 1035B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS SCREEN D Information on spindle control #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 400 SAI SS2 SSR POS SIC SIC 0: No module is present for spindle serial output. 1: A module for spindle serial output is present. POS 0: No module is present for spindle analog output. 1
  • Page 10369. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D Load and speed meter readings for the serial spindle 410 First serial spindle: Load meter reading (%) 411 First serial spindle: Speed meter reading (min–1) 412 Second serial spindle: Load meter reading (%) 413 Second serial spindle: Speed meter reading (min
  • Page 1037B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.3 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL General This section describes spindle speed control. It also explains the position coder and the spindle speed arrival signal (SAR). 1011
  • Page 10389. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Command flow of The following chart summarizes spindle speed control. spindle speed control CNC PMC and machine Machining program, etc. ↓ Gear select signal output Output to the PMC ⋅ S command (M series) (to change the machine gear). (GR3O, GR2O, GR1O) ⋅S co
  • Page 1039B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D S command The S command specifies the spindle speed entered from machining programs, etc. for the CNC. For constant surface speed control (during G96 mode), the CNC converts the specified surface speed to the spindle speed. In the M series with bit 4 (GTT)
  • Page 10409. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D Processing for gear Although the S command contains the spindle speed, the object that is changing actually controlled is the spindle motor. Therefore, the CNC must have some provision to detect the gear stage between the speed and spindle motor. There are
  • Page 1041B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION The speed commands output to the spindle motor are as follows: ⋅ For the serial spindle, the speed commands are processed as values 0 to 16383 between the CNC and spindle control unit. ⋅ For the analog spindle, the speed commands are output to the analog volt
  • Page 10429. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE If a specified voltage of 10 V is already higher than the acceptable input voltage for the spindle drive system, calculate the spindle speed that corresponds to 10 V using a proportional calculation method and use it instead. Now, in response to the spec
  • Page 1043B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle motor speed command (analog voltage output) 10V VC VH GR3O VL GR1O GR2O Spindle speed command A B C (S code input) Vmin Vmaxl Vmaxh Vmax A× A× B× C× 4095 4095 4095 4095 VC: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor. VH:
  • Page 10449. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 · Spindle speed A (Parameter No.3741) (min–1) with low-speed gears when the command voltage is 10V · Spindle speed B (Parameter No.3742) (min–1) with high-speed gears when the command voltage is 10V (medium-speed gear for 3-stage) · Spindle speed C (Parameter
  • Page 1045B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D When Gear select signal change S code read To next block Gear select signal TMF GR3O /GR2O /GR1O SF FIN TMF TFIN Spindle speed command VH VL 0V Fig. 9.3 (e) Time chart when gear select signal changes In this case, the gear select signal is output; after ela
  • Page 10469. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 In addition, for the speed command output to the spindle motor, analog voltages 0 to 10 V for analog spindle control correspond to digital data 0 to 16383 for serial spindle control. However, it might be easier if you consider them code signals from 0 to 4095
  • Page 1047B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Reference→ Block Diagram for Analog Voltage Output With the constant surface speed control option equipped. CNC Power magnetics cabinet [Surface speed] M code Gear change command S(m/min) Spindle speed X–axis pres- command ent value Constant r S (min–1) surfa
  • Page 10489. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Keep the following in mind: Even with bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 1, the CNC cannot determine the output polarity if it has not issued M03/M04, and therefore, actual output does not work even if the speed command has been specified. D Command output t
  • Page 1049B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Control unit max+10V SVC SVC Spindle speed 2mA analog voltage Name Connector/Pin ES Output ES output SVC JA8A/7 impedance 100Ω ES JA8A/5 ENB1 ENB Enable signal ENB1 JA8A/8 ENB2 ENB2 JA8A/9 WARNING Since the output voltage is a weak signal, do not relay it thr
  • Page 10509. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Spindle stop signal *SSTP [Classification] Input signal [Function] The command output to the spindle is disabled. [Operation] When the spindle stop signal turns to “0” , the output voltage becomes 0V and the enable signal ENB turns to “0” (M05
  • Page 1051B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION low gear range, the gear select signal does not change and the command output is calculated and output to obtain the set speed at high gear. When the spindle motor speed is set by parameter GST (No. 3705#1)=1, the command output is output regardless of gear s
  • Page 10529. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 → When this function is not in use, specify an override of 100%; otherwise, an override of 0% becomes effective, thus disabling the spindle from rotating. Spindle speed arrival signal SAR [Classification] Input signal [Function] The SAR signal initia
  • Page 1053B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle enable signal ENB [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs absence or presence of spindle output command. [Output condition] The ENB signal becomes logical 0 when the command output to the spindle becomes logical 0. Otherwise, the si
  • Page 10549. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 S12–bit code signal R01O to R12O [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal converts the spindle speed command value calculated by the CNC to code signals 0 to 4095. [Output condition] The relationship between the spindle speed c
  • Page 1055B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G027 CON *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1 G028 GR2 GR1 G029 *SSTP SOR SAR G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0 G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I #7 #6 #5 #4 #3
  • Page 10569. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 GST: The SOR signal is used for: 0 : Spindle orientation 1 : Gear shift SGB: Gear switching method 0 : Method A (Parameters No. 3741 to 3743 for the maximum spindle speed at each gear are used for gear selection.) 1 : Method B (Parameters No. 3751 and 3752 fo
  • Page 1057B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE 1 Type M: The gear selection signal is not entered externally. In response to an S command, the CNC selects a gear according to the speed range for each gear specified in parameters. Then the CNC reports the selection of a gear by outputting the gear sel
  • Page 10589. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3709 SAM [Data type] Bit SAM The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle speed 0 : 4 (Normally, set to 0.) 1: 1 3730 Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 0.1 %
  • Page 1059B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (5) After setting the parameters, command “0”, confirm that the output is 0V. NOTE This parameter need not to be set for serial spindles. 3732 The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift [Data type] Two–wo
  • Page 10609. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Spindle motor speed Max. speed (4095, 10V) Spindle motor max. clamp speed (Parameter No. 3736) Spindle motor minimum clamp speed (Parameter No. 3735) Spindle speed (S command) NOTE If the function of constant surface speed control or bit 4 (GTT) of parameter
  • Page 1061B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 3742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3 3744 Maximum spindle speed for gear 4 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] min–1 [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the maximum spindle speed correspon
  • Page 10629. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 3751 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 3752 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 4095 For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the gears are switched. Spi
  • Page 1063B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 3761 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping 3762 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] min–1 [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 When method B is selected (SGT,#3 of parameter 37
  • Page 10649. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 3772 Maximum spindle speed [Data type] Word [Unit of data] min–1 [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed of the spindle is specified , or the speed of the spind
  • Page 1065B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Caution CAUTION This section mentioned a spindle speed control that should be prepared on the CNC side. But it is also necessary to design the signals to the spindle control unit. Consult the manual of the spindle control unit used and take necessary actions
  • Page 10669. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.4 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL FOR TWO–PATH LATHE General In a two–path lathe application, the additional path section (path No. 2) can have the same spindle interface as a one–path lathe (see Section 9.2.). Each spindle is controlled by a command issued by tool p
  • Page 1067B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Position coder feedback When an analog spindle is used, supplying the position coder feedback signal (Analog) signal to the position coder interface of tool post 2 via an external distribution circuit makes it possible to use either tool post for thread cut
  • Page 10689. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Two–spindle control The spindle interfaces for both tool posts are used. D Selection of spindle The spindle command select signals SLSPA and SLSPB command (input) specify the tool post whose spindle command is to be followed by each spindle.
  • Page 1069B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Position coder feedback If either tool post uses an analog spindle as the first spindle, the spindle signal (when an analog feedback signals SLPCA and SLPCB (input) spindle is used) cannot cause the NC to select a position coder feedback sig
  • Page 10709. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 2nd and 3rd spindles If the first spindle is a serial spindle, the second and third spindles can also be used in a two–path lathe application. (See Section 9.2.) In the following chart, all spindles are connected under two–spindle control. Under one–spindle c
  • Page 1071B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Options related to Optional functions for spindles are valid for both tool posts. However, spindles you may want to use the optional functions for only one of the tool posts because of relationships with the interface and PMC ladder. Parameters are available
  • Page 10729. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 (2) In the 2-spindle control mode Signal input Command to the Command to the spindle connected to spindle connected to SLSPA SLSPB tool post 1 tool post 2 0 0 Spindle command of Spindle command of tool post 1 tool post 2 0 1 Spindle command of Spindle command
  • Page 1073B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE The SLPCA and SLPCB signals are effective only in the 2-spindle control mode using two serial spindles. In the 2-spindle control mode using analog spindles, the feedback signal of spindle 1 is input to tool post 1, and the feedback signal of spindle 2 is
  • Page 10749. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3702 ECS ESS EAS ESI EMS [Data type] Bit EMS Multi–spindle control function 0 : Used 1 : Not used NOTE If the multi–spindle control function is not required for one tool post in two–path control, specify this parameter for th
  • Page 1075B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3703 2SP [Data type] Bit 2SP Specifies whether one or two spindles are controlled (at 2–path control). 0 : One spindle (two tool posts) 1 : Two spindle (two tool posts) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3706 PCS [Data type] Bit PCS When multi–sp
  • Page 10769. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Table 9.4 lists the position coder feedback signals used for each tool post in the above configuration. These position coder feedback signals are selected according to the following: ⋅ Bit 3 (PCS) of parameter No. 3706 ⋅ Spindle feedback select signals SLPCA
  • Page 1077B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Note NOTE 1 The spindle commands include S code commands, maximum speed command (G50S__), M03, M04, M05, and constant surface speed control commands (G96 and G97) 2 Signals to operate the spindle control unit are not affected by the spindle command select sig
  • Page 10789. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.5 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL General With the spindle serial output or analog output function, specifying the surface speed (m/min or feet/min) directly in an S command makes it possible to change the spindle output continuously so as to maintain a cons
  • Page 1079B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Example of Spindle Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed Analog Output with the output 10 V is 1000 min–1 for the low speed gear (G1) and 2000 min–1 for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds to the parameter No. 3741, 37
  • Page 10809. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Spindle Serial Output The output to the spindle in spindle serial output is a digital data. Therefore assume the following relation for calculation: Spindle analog output (voltage) 10V = Spindle serial output (digital data) 4095. The above calculation becomes
  • Page 1081B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Z N3 N4 X In this program, block N2 issues a constant surface speed control command (G96), a surface speed command (S12 m/min), and a feed–per–revolution command (G95). Block N3 causes the CNC to change the spindle speed specification from 76.4 min–1 to 191 m
  • Page 10829. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1405 FPR [Data type] Bit FPR Specifies the feed–per–revolution function with no position coder. 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. NOTE If you set this parameter to 1, reset parameter NPC (bit 0 of parameter No. 1402) to 0. 3741 Maximum
  • Page 1083B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 3772 Maximum spindle speed [Data type] Word [Unit of data] min–1 [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum spindle speed is specified, or the spindle speed exceeds the
  • Page 10849. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE Simultaneous use of multi–spindle control enables constant surface speed control for spindles other than the first spindle. (See Section 9.10.) Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.9.3 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining C
  • Page 1085B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.6 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION General With this function, an overheat alarm (No. 704) is raised and the spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is issued when the spindle speed deviates from the specified speed due to machine condition
  • Page 10869. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 1. When an alarm is issued after a specified spindle speed is reached Spindle speed Sr Sd Sq Specified Sq Sd speed Sr Actual speed Check No check Check Time Specification of Start of check Alarm another speed 2. When an alarm is issued before a specified spin
  • Page 1087B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Signal Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the actual spindle speed is not within a tolerance to the specified speed. [Output condition] The signal becomes logical “1” w
  • Page 10889. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 4911 Percent tolerance (q) of the target spindle speed to begin checking [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Unit of data 1% 0. 1% (T series) Data range 1 – 100 1 – 1000 [Valid data range] NOTE Unit of data depends on parameter No. 4900#0 FLR (T series only) Set
  • Page 1089B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Alarm and message Number Message Description 704 OVER HEAT : SPINDLE Spindle overheat in the spindle fluc- tuation detection (1) If the cutting load is heavy, relieve the cutting condition. (2) Check whether the cutting tool is share. (3) Another possible cau
  • Page 10909. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.7 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES) General The PMC can read actual spindle speed. Signal Actual spindle speed signal AR0 to AR15 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These 16-bit binary code signals output from the CNC to the PMC the
  • Page 1091B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.8 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) General This function positions the spindle using the spindle motor and position coder. The function has a coarser least command increment compared with the Cs contour control function and has no interpolation capability wit
  • Page 10929. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Selecting a spindle Any axis in the control axis group can be used as the C axis (parameter positioning axis no. 1020). Specify *1 as its servo axis number (parameter no. 1023). Only one set of this setting can be used for each control path. The spindle subje
  • Page 1093B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Command system The command system comes in two types: The first positions a semi-fixed angle; the second positions an optional angle. D Semi-fixed angle A 2-digit numerical value following the M address is used for the positioning by M code command. There are
  • Page 10949. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D Absolute and Positioning by specifying a semi–fixed angle (by M code) is always incremental commands incremental. To perform positioning by specifying an optional angle, specify the distance between the program origin and the end point (absolute) with addre
  • Page 1095B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Signal Spindle stop complete signal SPSTP [Classification] Input signal [Function] When this signal is 1, the CNC orients and positions the spindle. Spindle unclamp signal SUCLP [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal specifies
  • Page 10969. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Other signals Gear selection signal Refer to 9.3 “Spindle Speed Control.” GR1, GR2, CTH1A, CTH2A Refer to the manual for serial spindle. The spindle loop gain multiplier corresponding to the gear currently selected by this signal is
  • Page 1097B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Sequence (Time chart) - Spindle Orientation M code MF SPSTP POSITION LOOP INITIALIZE Spindle enable on SUCLP *SUCPF Spindle movement ZPx SCLP Spindle enable off *SCPF FIN ⇒ POSITION LOOP INITIALIZE is performed within the CNC. ⇒ Spindle ENABLE ON/OFF specifie
  • Page 10989. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 - Spindle Positioning by M code M code MF SPSTP Spindle enable on SUCLP *SUCPF Spindle movement SCLP Spindle enable off *SCPF FIN 1072
  • Page 1099B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - Spindle Positioning by Address C,H SPSTP Spindle enable ON SUCLP *SUPCF Spindle movement SCLP Spindle enable OFF *SCPF - Spindle Positioning Reset M code MF SPSTP POSITION CODER INITIALIZE SUCLP *SUPCF FIN ⇒ POSITION CODER INITIALIZE is performed only in th
  • Page 11009. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ZMIx [Data type] Bit axis ZMIx The direction of reference position return and the direction of initial backlash at power–on 0 : Positive direction 1 : Negative direction NOTE When the serial spindle is being used, this p
  • Page 1101B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 0 : Not set automatically 1 : Set automatically 1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed [Data type] Two–word axis Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be used for
  • Page 11029. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 1620 Time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Set time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration for each axis. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #
  • Page 1103B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis. 1850 Grid shift for each axis [Data t
  • Page 11049. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE The direction for spindle orientation (or reference position return) in spindle positioning using a serial spindle is determined by this parameter. 4044 Velocity loop proportion gain in servo mode (High gear) 4045 Velocity loop proportion gain in servo m
  • Page 1105B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE Set the gear ration between spindle and AC spindle motor when the spindle positioning is performed with serial spindle. For which gear is used, it depends on the clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH1B. 4065 Position gain in servo mode (HIGH) 40
  • Page 11069. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 ESI Selection of a spindle positioning specification 0 : The conventional specification is used. 1 : The extended specification is used. NOTE The extended specification includes the following two extensions: D With the conventional specification, the number o
  • Page 1107B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 4960 M code specifying spindle orientation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Integer [Valid data range] 6 to 97 Set an M code to change the spindle rotating mode to the spindle positioning mode. Setting the M code performs the spindle orientation. Spindle posit
  • Page 11089. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE θ represents the basic angular diplacement set in pamrameter No. 4963. 4963 M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] deg [Valid data range] 1 to 60 This parameter sets a basic angular displacement used for semi–fi
  • Page 1109B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 4971 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 1 4972 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 2 4973 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 3 4974 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 4 [Data type] Word Set the se
  • Page 11109. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 053 TOO MANY ADDRESS In the chamfering and corner R com- COMMANDS mands, two or more of I, K and R are specified. Otherwise, the character af- ter a comma(”,”) is not C or R in direct drawing dimensions programming
  • Page 1111B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Caution CAUTION 1 Feed hold is invalid during spindle positioning. 2 Spindle positioning stops when emergency stop is applied; restart with orientation operation. 3 Dry run, machine lock, and auxiliary function lock are not available during spindle positionin
  • Page 11129. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.9 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL 9.9.1 Cs Contour Control General The Cs contour control function positions the serial spindle using the spindle motor in conjunction with a dedicated detector mounted on the spindle. This function can perform more accurate positioning t
  • Page 1113B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Command Address The address for the move command in Cs contour control is the axis name specified in parameter no.1020. This address is arbitrary. When the second auxiliary function option is provided, address B cannot be used for the name of the contour axis
  • Page 11149. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Reference Position After the serial spindle is switched from spindle speed control to Cs Return of Cs Contour contour control mode, the current position is undefined. Return the Control Axis spindle to the reference position. The reference position return of
  • Page 1115B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - Interruption of reference position return (i) Manual operation Return to the reference position can be interrupted by reset- ting, emergency stop, or turning off the feed axis and direction select signal. When the interrupted return operation is re- sumed,
  • Page 11169. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Spindle contour control change completion signal FSCSL [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates the axis is under Cs contour control. [Output condition] Spindle speed control mode → 0 Cs contour control mode → 1 Time Chart Spin
  • Page 1117B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Clutch/Gear signal Refer to the manual of serial spindle. (Serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH2A These signals determine what parameter (loop gain, etc.) to be used for each gear position. CTH1A and CTH2A are the gear select signals for the serial spindle
  • Page 11189. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Signals on manual Feed axis and direction select signal +Jn, *Jn (Input) operation Manual handle feed axis select signal HSnA, HSnB, HSnC, HSnD (Input) (Refer to respective items in this manual) The Cs contour control axis can be man
  • Page 1119B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 1020 Name of the axis used for programming for each axis [Data type] Byte axis Set the name of the program axis for each control axis, with one of the values listed in the following table: Axis Set Axis Set Axis Set Axis Set name value name value name value n
  • Page 11209. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis [Data type] Byte axis Set the servo axis for each control axis. Generally, the same number shall be assigned to the control axis and the corresponding servo axis. Set –1 as the number of servo axis to the Cs contour
  • Page 1121B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 1820 Command multiply for each axis (CMR) [Data type] Byte axis D When command multiply is 1/2 to 1/27 1 Set value= +100 [Valid data range: 102 to 127] (Command multiply) D When command multiply is 0.5 to 48 Set value = 2 command multiply [Valid data range: 1
  • Page 11229. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 3900 The number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 8 Set the number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis (1st group) NOTE Set 0 when there is no servo axis that interpo
  • Page 1123B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 3911 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis during interpolation (High gear) 3912 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis during interpolation (Medium high gear) 3913 Loop gain of the serv
  • Page 11249. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 3930 Number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 8 Set the number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis (4th group) NOTE When there is no servo axis or less than four servo axe
  • Page 1125B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 3941 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis during interpolation (High gear) 3942 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis during interpolation (Medium high gear) 3943 Loop gain of the serv
  • Page 11269. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE For which position gain is used in actual spindle operation, it depends on clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH2A. 4135 Grid shift value at Cs contour control [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] 1 pulse unit (360000 p/rev) [Valid data range] –3
  • Page 1127B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Warning WARNING In the spindle contour control mode, do not switch the spindle gears. When the gears need to be changed put the system in the spindle speed control mode first. Note NOTE In the T series machines, the spindle contour control function and the sp
  • Page 11289. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Setting This function is put in effect by setting the CSF parameter (bit 2 of parameter No. 3712) and the CSPTRE parameter (bit 5 of parameter No. 4353) to 1. (Using this function requires resetting the RFCHK3 parameter (bit 7 of parameter No. 4016) to 0.) Th
  • Page 1129B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Sequence (timing chart) When Cs axis coordinate setup is normally completed: Codes M code for entering the Cs contour mode MF CSPENA CSFI1 CON FSCSL Coordinate increment ZRFx CSFO1 F
  • Page 11309. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 If an attempt to set up Cs axis coordinates fails (because of suspension by an emergency stop, for example) Codes M code for entering the Cs contour mode MF CSPENA CSFI1 CON FSCSL Suspension Coordinate in
  • Page 1131B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3700 NRF [Data type] Bit NRF Once the Cs contour control mode has been entered, the first positioning command G00: 0 : Makes a reference position return. 1 : Performs normal positioning. To use the Cs axis coordinate setup function, it
  • Page 11329. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Cs axis coordinate setup alarm signal CSFO1 [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that Cs axis coordinate setup has not normally been completed. [Output condition] The signal becomes ’1’ under the following condition: – Cs a
  • Page 1133B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Alarm and message Number Message Description 5346 RETURN TO REFERENCE The Cs coordinate setup function was sus- POINT pended. Make a manual reference position return. 1. An attempt was made to perform Cs axis coordinate setup for the Cs axis for which CSPEN =
  • Page 11349. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Whereas the Cs axis may stop at a machine position of 5.000 to 5.003 if the Cs contour control mode is entered after rotation in the spindle speed control mode. In this case, the relationship between the machine coordinates and machine position is adjusted by
  • Page 1135B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.10 MULTI–SPINDLE CONTROL General In addition to the conventional (first) spindle, maximum four additional (second, third, and fourth) spindles can be controlled. These additional spindles allow two-stage gear changes. A single S code is used to command to a
  • Page 11369. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Basic control (Common An S command is sent as a speed command to each spindle selected, using to TYPE-A and TYPE-B) a spindle selection signal (SWS1 to SWS4 , ). Each spindle rotates at the specified speed. If a spindle is not sent a spindl
  • Page 1137B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION The concept of Type B multi-spindle control outlined below. SIND SWS 1 * SSTP 1 Hold 1 First spindle SIND2 SWS 2 * SSTP 2 Hold 2 Second spindle S command SIND3 SWS 3 * SSTP 3 Hold 3 Third spindle SIND4 SWS 4 * SSTP 4 Hold 4 Fourth spindle Spindles to be contr
  • Page 11389. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Connection of spindle Spindle configuration when multi-spindle control is used: · Multi-spindle control Necessary · Spindle serial output option and · Parameter SS2 (No. 3701#4) = 1 parameter (to use second spindle) · Spindle analog output (to use third spind
  • Page 1139B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Spindle positioning or When the spindle motor is used for positioning, as in the case of spindle Cs contour control positioning or Cs contour control, the first spindle will allows function as the positioning spindle. Switching to the positioning mode and p
  • Page 11409. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 SWS3 1 : Outputs a speed command to the third spindle. 0 : Outputs no speed command to the third spindle. SWS4 1 : Outputs a speed command to the fourth spindle. 0 : Outputs no speed command to the fourth spindle. Individual spindle stop signal *SSTP1, *SSTP2
  • Page 1141B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 2nd/3rd/4th position coder selection signal PC2SLC PC3SLC PC4SLC [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals select the position coder of the serial spindle used for multi–spindle control. The 3rd and 4th position coder s
  • Page 11429. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Spindle control signal by First spindle SIND, SSIN, SGN PMC R01I to R12I Second spindle SIND2, SSIN2, SGN2 R01I2 to R12I2 Third spindle SIND3, SSIN3, SGN3 R01I3 to R12I3
  • Page 1143B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Parameter The parameters for the 1st spindle and the 1st position coder are the same as usual. This section describes the parameters which are added by the multi–spindle control function. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3701 SS3 SS2 [Data type] Bit SS2 In serial spin
  • Page 11449. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3702 EMS [Data type] Bit EMS Multi–spindle control is 0 : Used 1 : Not used NOTE If the multi–spindle control function is not required for one path in two–path control, set this parameter for the path to which the multi–spindle control
  • Page 1145B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3706 PCS PG2 PG1 GTT PG2 PG1 [Data type] Bit PG2, PG1 Gear ration of spindle to first position coder For the setting, see the description of parameter No.3707. PCS When multi–spindle control is applied to two tool posts in two–path con
  • Page 11469. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3707 P42 P41 P32 P31 P22 P21 PG2, PG1 (Bits 1 and 0 of parameter No.3702) Gear ratio of spindle to first position coder P22, P21 Gear ratio of spindle to second position coder P32, P31 Gear ratio of spindle to third position coder P42,
  • Page 1147B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION WARNING 1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is not clamped. 2 When spindle speed command control is applied using the PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the speed of the spindle is not clamped. NOTE 1 When the constant surface spee
  • Page 11489. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 This parameter is valid when the multi–spindle control option is selected. 2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected, the spindle speed is clamped at the specified maximum speed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is spec
  • Page 1149B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 3822 Maximum speed of the third spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] min–1 [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum speed for the third spindle. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum spindle speed is specified, or the
  • Page 11509. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 3850 Maximum speed of the fourth spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] min–1 [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum speed for the fourth spindle. NOTE 1 These parameters are used for the multi–spindle control. 2 When this parameter is
  • Page 1151B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Caution CAUTION 1 If the primary spindle stop signal *SSTP for stopping all selected (SWS1 to SWS4) spindles’ rotation is cleared, the speed command is restored. A spindle not selected by SWS1 to SWS4 and rotating at its previous speed, which is stopped using
  • Page 11529. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.11 RIGID TAPPING 9.11.1 In a tapping cycle (M series: G84/G74, T series: G84/G88), synchronous control is applied to the tapping operation of a tapping axis and the General operation of the spindle. This capability eliminates the need to use a tool such as
  • Page 1153B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION The descriptions given in this section (such as spindle gear switching and M–type/T–type) are based on the explanation given in Section 9.3. Refer to Section 9.3 as necessary. Specification of The differences in the specifications for rigid tapping for the M
  • Page 11549. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.11.2 As shown in the figure below a gear ratio can be inserted between the Connection Among spindle and spindle motor, and between the spindle and position coder. Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder Spindle control Error Spindle amplifier Spindle mot
  • Page 1155B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION The 1024 or 512 pulses/rev position coder is built into the spindle motor. For the 512 pulses/rev version, specify double the number of teeth on each gear for the position coder. (Double the number of teeth need not be specified for the serial spindle.) 1st s
  • Page 11569. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 S Gear ratio is 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, If the gear ratio is either 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8, it is set using parameters 1:8 (VGR=0) PG1 and PG2 (No. 3706 #0, #1). This applies if the position coder is mounted in a spindle or built into a spindle motor when only one sta
  • Page 1157B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Changing gears during rigid tapping requires a different process from that for gear changes during normal machining. As described above, changing gears conforms to the gear change specifications mentioned in section 9.3 when the M type gear selection method h
  • Page 11589. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE This table show an example of three gears. For the basic spindle motor speed, refer to the spindle motor description manual. “+ α” means that the spindle motor speed may slightly exceed the basic spindle motor speed. If the M type gear selection method i
  • Page 1159B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.11.3 Rigid Tapping Specification D Feed rate In rigid tapping mode, the tapping axis is fed at a rate specified by F. The spindle speed is specified by S 360(deg/min). Use of override is invalid for both of them. An override of 200% can be applied to withdr
  • Page 11609. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.11.4 For rigid tapping adjustment, the diagnosis screen displays information Display Data on the related to rigid tapping. Diagnosis Screen For part of the display data, the user can choose between two sets of data items relating to the synchronization of t
  • Page 1161B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Diagnosis No. 0452 is cleared to “0” when rigid tapping mode is set or canceled, and diagnosis No. 0453 is cleared to “0” in the positioning of the rigid tapping cycle. The following figure shows the tapping axis as the Z axis. Z–axis error Zc Ze Speed 1 1 Zc
  • Page 11629. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Diagnosis screen D Spindle position deviation 0450 SPINDLE MOTION ERROR Spindle position deviation during rigid tapping [Unit] Pulse D Number of pulses distributed to the spindle 0451 SPINDLE MOTION PULSE Number of pulses distributed to the spindle during rig
  • Page 1163B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Spindle–converted move command difference during rigid tapping (momentary value) 0455 SYNC. PULSE(SUM) Momentary spindle–converted move during command difference between the spindle and the tapping axis during rigid tapping [Unit] Pulse NOTE This data item
  • Page 11649. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.11.5 Command Format Command format for the The rigid tapping command format for the T series is described below. T series For an explanation of the command format used with the M series, refer to Section II.13.2.2 of the “Operator’s Manual for Machining Cen
  • Page 1165B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Specifying M29 and G84 (G88) in the same block (Note, however, that M29 and Mjj for C–axis clamping cannot be specified in the same block.) GjjX (Z) __Z (X) __R__P__F__K__M29****; X (Z) __C__; Rigid X (Z) __C__; tapping · mode · G80; D Converting G84 (G88)
  • Page 11669. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 G84⋅G85 ( Tapping cycle) G84 (G88) (G98 mode) G84 (G88) (G99 mode) Spindle Spindle stop stop Initial point Motion 1 Motion 2 Motion 6 Spindle CW R point Spindle CW R point Spindle Spindle stop stop Motion 3 Motion 5 Spindle CCW Spindle CCW Z (X) point Z(X)poi
  • Page 1167B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Rigid tapping in feed per Rigid tapping is classified into two types: rigid tapping in feed per rotation mode rotation mode (G99) and rigid tapping in feed per minute mode (G98). Example) The example below specifies rigid tapping in feed per rotation mode for
  • Page 11689. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.11.6 Signal 9.11.6.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function Rigid tapping signal RGTAP [Classification] Input signal [Function] When M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) is specified, the PMC enters rigid tapping mode, then
  • Page 1169B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Rigid tapping in–progress signal RTAP [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies the PMC that rigid tapping mode is active. RTAP 1 : Rigid tapping mode is currently active. 0 : Rigid tapping mode is not currently active. By latchin
  • Page 11709. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Before rigid tapping can be performed, however, parameter setting is required to output these signals, as described below. M series: SF output depends on the gear selection method, as described below. [1] M–type gear selection method SF output depends on bit
  • Page 1171B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Reference information: The table below indicates the relationship between the output signals and gear selection. GR3O GR2O GR1O 1st (low) speed gear × × f 2nd (medium) speed gear × f × 3rd (high) speed gear f × × Gear selection signals (input) GR2, GR1
  • Page 11729. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 When a serial spindle is used, the serial spindle clutch/gear selection signals (G070#3, #2 for the first spindle, G074#3, #2 for the second spindle, and G264#3, #2 for the third spindle) must be set in addition to the setting of the gear selection signal des
  • Page 1173B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (T series) When bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1, to select a spindle to be used for rigid tapping, set the signals as indicated below. Signal state Spindle used for rigid tapping RGTSP1 RGTSP2 RGTSP3 First spindle “1” “1” or “0” “1” or “0” Secon
  • Page 11749. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 However, the display of the actual speed is switched by this signal, even during rigid tapping (See Section 9.10 for details of this signals). 9.11.6.5 Signal addresses #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G026 PC3SLC G027 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS2 SWS1 G028 PC2SLC GR2 GR1 G029
  • Page 1175B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION For the same reason, the PMC’s control over second spindle/third spindle output must be disabled in rigid tapping mode by setting SIND2/SIND3 to “0”. T–type gear selection When T–type gear selection is used, the PMC must determine whether method gear switchin
  • Page 11769. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D When M–type gear When using a machine that features multiple gear stages for use with the selection is used spindle motor and spindle, and the newly programmed S**** is outside the previously selected gear range, the spindle–speed function strobe signal SF
  • Page 1177B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.11.7 The timing chart for rigid tapping specification depends on the method Timing Charts for Rigid used to specify rigid tapping mode, the gear selection method (M–type or T–type), and whether to perform gear switching. Tapping Specification From the table
  • Page 11789. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.11.7.1 When M29 is specified before G84 (G74) M type gear selection method M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position l
  • Page 1179B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle *Gear output change motion SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart show an example wher
  • Page 11809. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 T type gear selection method M29 RTAP First bllock Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position loop Fig. 9.11.7.1 (c) Gear change is not
  • Page 1181B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle *Gear output change motion SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an exam
  • Page 11829. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.11.7.2 M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block M type gear selection M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Positi
  • Page 1183B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has shif
  • Page 11849. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 T type gear selection method M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position loop Fig. 9.11.7.2 (c) When gear change is
  • Page 1185B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle outpout SF S code out- put GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an example where the gea
  • Page 11869. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.11.7.3 Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters M type gear selection M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally. ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FI
  • Page 1187B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally. ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an ex
  • Page 11889. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 T type gear selection method M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally. ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle outoput SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position loop Fig. 9.
  • Page 1189B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First blcok Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally ENB To be masked to the second blcok Spindle output SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows
  • Page 11909. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.11.7.4 When rigid tapping is completed, the mode is canceled if a G code (such Timing to cancel rigid as G80, canned cycle G code, or Group 01 G code) is issued. The S command used during rigid tapping is automatically cleared when tapping mode rigid mode i
  • Page 1191B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION WARNING 1 If rigid tapping mode is canceled by a Group 01 G code, such as G00 or G01, the block containing the G code is executed at the same time the ENB signal is turned to “0”. Therefore, if the block contains an M code for controlling the spindle, an erro
  • Page 11929. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.11.8 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3705 EVS ESF SFA NSF SGT ESF [Data type] Bit ESF When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) is used, and the consatant surface speed control function is used or bit 7 (GTT) of parameter No.
  • Page 1193B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3706 PG2 PG1 GTT PG2 PG1 [Data type] Bit PG2, PG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder Magnific PG2 PG1 ation 1 0 0 Magnification = 2 0 1 Number of spindle revolutions 4 1 0 Number of position coder revolutions 8 1 1 GTT Selection o
  • Page 11949. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Spindle motor speed Max. output (4095, 10V) Spindle motor max. clamp speed (Parameter No. 3736) Spindle motor min. clamp speed (Parameter No. 3735) Spindle speed command Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed (S command) at gear1 at gear2 at gear3 parameter paramet
  • Page 1195B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SRS FHD DOV SIG CRG VGR G84 5200 FHD PCP DOV SIG CRG VGR G84 [Data type] Bit G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping 0 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to the issue of the G84 (or G74) command. (See para
  • Page 11969. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 OV3 OVU TDR 5201 OV3 OVU TDR NIZ [Data type] Bit NIZ Smoothing in rigid tapping is: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping 0 : Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction (Parameter Nos. 52
  • Page 1197B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 0 : In G84 mode, the spindle rotates in a normal direction. In G74 mode, the spindle rotates in reverse. 1 : In G84 mode, the spindle rotates in reverse. In G74 mode, the spindle rotates in a normal direction. REF Feed forward during movement from the initial
  • Page 11989. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5204 SPR DGN NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit DGN On the diagnosis screen: 0 : A rigid tapping synchronization error is displayed. (Nos. 455 to 457) 1 : An err
  • Page 1199B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE When you want to perform rigid tapping, do not set this parameter. If rigid tapping is performed with this parameter set, a tapping tool, workpiece, or machine may be damaged. 5210 Rigid tapping mode specification M code [Data type] Byte [Valid data rang
  • Page 12009. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 5213 Return or clearance in peck tapping cycle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Input in incluse 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the return o
  • Page 1201B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles • When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the setting of parameter No.5214 is applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. • When t
  • Page 12029. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 5231 Number of position coder gear teeth (first–stage gear) 5232 Number of position coder gear teeth (second–stage gear) 5233 Number of position coder gear teeth (third–stage gear) Number of position coder gear teeth (fourth–stage gear) 5234 5235 Number of po
  • Page 1203B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (first–stage gear) 5242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (second–stage gear) 5243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (third–stage gear) Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (fourth–stage gear) 5244 5245
  • Page 12049. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis 5261 (first–stage gear) Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis 5262 (second–stage gear) Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for
  • Page 1205B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 5271 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation (first–stage gear) Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation 5272 (second–stage gear) 5273 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction op
  • Page 12069. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping 5280 (common to all gears) Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping 5281 (first–stage gear) Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping
  • Page 1207B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 5291 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 1) 5292 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 2) 5293 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 3) Spindle loop gain multioplier in the rig
  • Page 12089. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 5300 Tapping axis in–position width in rigid tapping 5301 Spindle in–position width in rigid tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 These parameters are used to set tapping axis and spindle in–position widths in r
  • Page 1209B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE These parameters are enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. 5308 In–position width at point R in rigid tapping (tapping axis) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter is
  • Page 12109. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 (Calculation example) S = 3600 Spindle G = 3000 Motor L = 360 degrees (One spindle rotation per spindle motor rotation) Position α = La/4096 Spindle coder = 720 degrees/4096 P.C = 0.17578 degrees La = 720 degrees (One position coder rotation requires two spin
  • Page 1211B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 5313 Positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped in rigid tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped
  • Page 12129. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (first–stage gear) 5321 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (second–stage gear) 5322 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (third–stage gear) 5323 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (fourth–stage ge
  • Page 1213B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in second spindle extraction 5335 operation (first–stage gear) Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in second spindle extraction 5336 operation (second–stage gear) Time constant for the spindle and tapp
  • Page 12149. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping using 5344 the third spindle (common to all the gears) Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping using 5345 the third spindle (first–stage gear) Po
  • Page 1215B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tap- 5352 ping using the second spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit impos
  • Page 12169. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Positional deviation limit imposed during spindle movement in rigid tapping using 5355 the third spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed during spi
  • Page 1217B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 5365 Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant for the first spindle in rigid tapping (first–stage gear) 5366 Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant for the first spindle in rigid tapping (second–stage gear) 5367 Bell–shaped acceleratio
  • Page 12189. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 5381 Override value during rigid tapping return [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 1% or 10% [Valid data range] 0 to 200 This parameter is used to set the override value during rigid tapping return. If the setting is 0, no override is applied. NOTE This paramete
  • Page 1219B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Number Message Description 204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERA- In rigid tapping, an axis movement is TION specified between the rigid M code (M29) block and G84 or G74 block for M series (G84 or G88 block for T se- ries). Modify the program. 205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL 1. A
  • Page 12209. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 9.11.10 Notes NOTES ON SPINDLES CAUTION 1 When using an analog spindle, set the spindle speed offset value parameter (No. 3731) accurately. For the standard system, a value within –8191 to 8191 must be specified in this parameter. To perform rigid tapping, a
  • Page 1221B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Notes on using functions such as the CAUTION spindle positioning 1 When the spindle orientation function is to be used at the function at the same same time time The spindle orientation function positions the spindle by using sensors and the PMC, without bein
  • Page 12229. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 CAUTION (continued) (3)Although the system can change to rigid tapping mode directly from Cs contouring control mode, positions designated in Cs contouring control mode are not preserved if rigid tapping mode is canceled by G80. When the system is changed to
  • Page 1223B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION For details of the serial spindle parameters, refer to the “FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR a series PARAMETER MANUAL (B–65160E)” or “FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR ai series PARAMETER MANUAL (B–65280EN)”. 4044 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 1, gea
  • Page 12249. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 The table below indicates the relationship between the spindle gear selection signals and selected gear numbers. CTH1 CTH2 Gear selected Parameter No. to be used 0 0 HIGH 4065 4044 4052 0 1 MEDIUM HIGH 4066 1 0 MEDIUM LOW 4067 4045 4053 1 1 LOW 4068 9.11.11 R
  • Page 1225B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION About bell–shaped The time required in bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for rigid acceleration/deceleration tapping is the sum of the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant (value set in the conventional parameter) for the spindle and tapping axi
  • Page 12269. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 5261 Time constant for the first spindle and tapping axis (first gear stage) 5262 Time constant for the first spindle and tapping axis (second gear stage) 5263 Time constant for the first spindle and tapping axis (third gear stage) 5265 Time constant for the
  • Page 1227B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE These parameters are valid if the TDR parameter (bit 2 of parameter No. 5201) is 1. 5365 First–spindle bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant for rigid tapping (first gear stage) 5366 First–spindle bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time
  • Page 12289. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Caution (1) The linear acceleration/deceleration time constant parameter for rigid tapping specifies the time required for the spindle to reach its maximum permissible rotation speed. The actual time constant is obtained by calculating the ratio of the maximu
  • Page 1229B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.12 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL General This function enables the synchronous control of two spindles. It also enables the control of the rotation phase of a spindle, allowing non–standard workpieces as well as rods to be held by either of the two spindles.
  • Page 12309. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D Constant surface speed control can be executed in synchronization control even while a workpiece is being held with the two spindles. However, if the speed is to change in excess of the specified time constant, the speed changes within the extent specified
  • Page 1231B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D In spindle synchronization control , the compensation value for spindle speed offset (parameter No. 3731) is disabled. D A spindle–phase synchronous control command is effective only in synchronous spindle control mode. The specified phase can be repeatedly
  • Page 12329. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 This parameter is used to output the inter–spindle phase error detection signal SYCAL in the serial spindle synchronization control mode. The SYCAL signal becomes “1” when a phase error exceeding the value set in this parameter is found. Alarm and me
  • Page 1233B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.13 SPINDLE ORIENTATION General This function stops the spindle at a specified position. The spindle can be stopped in either of the following two ways. · The spindle is stopped using mechanical stop. · The spindle is stopped by applying a function of the sp
  • Page 12349. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Spindle orientation signals with the stop position externally set SHA00 to SHA11 for the first spindle SHB00 to SHB11 for the second spindle SHC00 to SHC11 for the third spindle SHD00 to SHD11 for the fourth spind
  • Page 1235B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3702 OR2 OR1 OR3 [Data type] Bit OR1 Whether the stop–position external–setting type orientation function is used by the first spindle motor 0 : Not used 1 : Used OR2 Whether the stop–position external–setting type orientatio
  • Page 12369. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER a series 11.1 Position coder method spindle orientation DESCRIPTIONS (B–65162E) 11.2 Magnetic sensor method spindle orientation FANUC AC SPINDLE 2.1 Position coder method spindle orientation MOTOR a series 2.2 Magnetic sen
  • Page 1237B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.14 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING General Spindle output switching switches between the two motor windings, one for low speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the special spindle motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates stable outpu
  • Page 12389. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D When gear selection output signals, GR2O and GR1O , are used (for machining centers in which constant surface speed control is not provided and GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is set to 0) Set two gears, which are almost the same. (Example: V
  • Page 1239B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.15 THREE/FOUR– SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT General The three or four serial spindles can be connected using three/four–spindle serial output. The third serial spindle operates as an ordinary third analog spindle. For the third as well as the first and second seri
  • Page 12409. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 PC = Position coder 2 The multi–spindle function is required to enable the use of the position coder for the second spindle. 3 For an explanation of how to control the speed of the second and third spindles, see Sections 15.4 and 9.10. (Reference) The
  • Page 1241B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions. (This table relates to a table that appears in Section 9.2.) f = Available = Unavailable Spindle Serial spindle Analog spindle First Second Third Fourth First Third spindle spindle spi
  • Page 12429. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 The multi–spindle function can control the speed of the maximum four spindles and switch the feedback signal between four position coders. It can operate without the second, third, or four spindle (The fourth spindle can be used only when the third spi
  • Page 1243B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Signal D Spindle control unit These addresses are on the CNC. Actually, however, they are input/output signals for the third signals for the serial spindle control unit. serial spindle
  • Page 12449. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D Spindle control unit signals for the fourth serial spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G266 MRDYD ORCMD SFRD SRVD CTH1D CTH2D TLMHD TLMLD G267 RCHD RSLD INTGD SOCND MCFND SPSLD *ESPD ARSTD G268 RCHHGD MFNHGD INCMDD OVRIDD DEFMDD NRROD ROTAD INDXD G269 DSCND SOR
  • Page 1245B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Parameter D Connection of serial spindle control unit #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3701 SS3 SS2 ISI NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Bit type ISI Specifies whether to use the firs
  • Page 12469. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter setting SS4 SS3 SS2 Serial spindles to be used (No.3704#1) (No.3701#5) (No.3701#4) 0 0 0 First spindle only 0 0 1 First and second spindles 0 1 0 First and third spindles 0 1 1 First to third spindles 1 1 0 First, third, and fourth spindles 1 1 1 Fi
  • Page 1247B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Stop–position external–setting type spindle orientation #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3702 OR3 NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Bit type OR3 Specifies whether to use the stop–pos
  • Page 12489. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Contents 749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR It is serial communication error while system is executing after power supply on. Following reasons can be considered. 1) Optical cable connection is fault or cable is not connected or cable is
  • Page 1249B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Number Message Contents 782 SPINDLE–4 MODE CHANGE ER- Same as alarm number 752 (for the fourth spindle) ROR 784 SPINDLE–4 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as alarm number 754 (for the fourth spindle) ALM Diagnosis screen D Information relating to third/fourth serial spin
  • Page 12509. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 SSA 1 : System alarm in the spindle amplifier (The above are errors related to the third/fourth serial spindle. They are reflected in spindle alarm 749. They are usually caused by noise, disconnection, or instantaneous power interruption. When these statuses
  • Page 1251B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.16 SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL General In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the second spindle can be controlled as a slave axis of the first spindle. Therefore, the Cs contour axis control function, rigid tapping function, and spindle positio
  • Page 12529. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D Operation in each 1. Spindle mode (ordinary spindle control) control mode The second spindle rotates upon the issue of the same command as that used for the first spindle. The command does not specify the speed of the spindle, instead specifies the ratio of
  • Page 1253B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Parking function In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the parking function stops the motion of the first or second spindle, regardless of the mode (spindle mode, spindle positioning mode, Cs contour axis control mode, or rigid tapping mode) of the sp
  • Page 12549. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 When the parking function is activated for a spindle in a mode featuring a position loop, such as Cs contour axis control mode, spindle positioning mode, and rigid tapping mode, the spindle is stopped at the point where the parking function is activate
  • Page 1255B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D Simple spindle Simple spindle synchronous control does not guarantee synchronous synchronization and spindle operation. However, in a control mode featuring a position loop, phase error monitor such as Cs contour axis control mode, rigid tapping mode, and s
  • Page 12569. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D Relationship between When the spindle synchronous control option is selected, ensure that simple spindle simple spindle synchronous control signal ESRSYC is active when synchronous control and synchronous control is not exercised. spindle synchronous contro
  • Page 1257B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE 1 The second spindle is initialized to Cs contour axis control mode. At this time, the position of the second spindle will be undefined, so that reference position return must be performed for the first and second spindles. In this case, the reference po
  • Page 12589. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D Positional deviation During simple spindle synchronous control, indications such as the display positional deviation of the first spindle are output in the usual way. For the second spindle, however, only the positional deviation of the second spindle is in
  • Page 1259B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows: – Activates the parking function for the second spindle placed under simple spindle synchronous control. When the SPK bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 4800) is set to 1, #7 of G031 fun
  • Page 12609. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3701 SS2 NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Bit SS2 Under serial spindle control, the second serial spindle is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. NOTE 1
  • Page 1261B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 4811 Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the serial spindle synchronization control mode [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Pulse [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles
  • Page 12629. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Diagnosis screen D Positional deviation display while spindle synchronous control is applied 414 Master spindle motion error while spindle synchronous control or simple spindle synchronous control is active 415 Slave spindle motion error while spindle synchro
  • Page 1263B–63523EN–1/03 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.17 READY SIGNALS FOR SERIAL SPINDLE OPERATION General The signal indicating the operation ready status of each serial spindle is output. D ON conditions When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the relevant signal is set to 1: D The serial spindl
  • Page 12649. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Ready signal for the second serial spindle operation SRSP2R Indicates the ready status of the second serial spindle operation when the spindle is to be used according to the setting. 0 : The spindle is not ready. 1 : The spindle is ready. Ready signal for the
  • Page 1265B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS 10 TOOL FUNCTIONS 1239
  • Page 126610. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 10.1 TOOL FUNCTION General D M series Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up to an 8-digit numeral after address T. D T series Selection of tools and offset amounts can be done by commanding tool numbers and offset numbers with up to an 8-
  • Page 1267B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5002 LGN LD1 [Data type] Bit LD1 Offset number of tool offset (Wear offset number when option of tool geometry/wear compensation is selected) 0 : Specified using the lower two digits of a T code 1 : Specified using the lower one digit of a T
  • Page 126810. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE When a move command and a tool function are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the following two ways: (i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and tool function commands. (ii) Executing tool function commands upon compl
  • Page 1269B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS 10.2 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/ TOOL COMPENSATION NUMBER/ TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY 10.2.1 Tool Compensation Value/Tool Compensation Number/Tool Compensation Memory General (M series) Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values and tool wear comp
  • Page 127010. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 D Tool compensation One of the tool compensation memory A/B/C can be selected according memory to the configuration of offset amount. (1) Tool compensation memory A There is no difference between geometry compensation memory and wear compensation memory in tool comp
  • Page 1271B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS NOTE 1 Using the second figure tool offset requires the tool figure/wear compensation option. It also requires that the LD1 parameter (bit 0 of parameter No. 5002) and LGN parameter (bit 1 of parameter No. 5002) be, respectively, reset to 0 and set to 1. 2 When the
  • Page 127210. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 When parameter OIM (No. 5006#0)=1, the range in parenthesis is available. 2 The above table does not apply to the B–axis offset in B–axis control function. D Tool compensation The memory can hold 16, 32, 64, 99, 400, or 999 sets of tool number compensation va
  • Page 1273B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Second figure tool offset axis select signal G2Y , G2Z , G2X [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects an axis for which the sum of the first figure tool offset value and the second figure tool offset value is applied. [Operation] If
  • Page 127410. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3109 DWT [Data type] Bit DWT Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensation amount 0 : The characters are displayed at the left of each number. 1 : The characters are not displayed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3205
  • Page 1275B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Example: The following setting disables the modification of both the tool geometry compensation values and tool wear compensation values corresponding to offset numbers 100 to 110: Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (Disables tool geometry compensation value modi
  • Page 127610. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Metric input 0 to 99999 0
  • Page 1277B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Alarm and message Number Message Description 032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE In setting an offset amount by G10 or IN G10 in writing an offset amount by system variables, the offset amount was ex- cessive. 5300 SET ALL OFFSET DATAS After the inch/metric automatic con- AGAI
  • Page 127810. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Display Example The display of the offset screen is as follows. The above examples are cases where the geometry/wear compensation, the tool nose radius compensation, the tool offset value 7 digits, and the Y–axis offset are available. 1252
  • Page 1279B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS System Variables System variables can be used to read and write tool compensation values. (Custom Macro) System variables for 999 tool compensation values are as follows. Compensation Wear Geometry number X–axis 1 #10001 #15001 compensation : : : values 999 #10999 #
  • Page 128010. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 5052 Bias for tool offset numbers for measured tool offset value setting (For tool offset 400 and 999) [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to maximum tool offset count. When the tool setter function for 1–turret, 2–spindle lathes is used, this parameter allocates
  • Page 1281B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Tool Life Management D T code for registering T–code for registering tools consists of eight digits or less when the tool tools offset 400 pairs or 999 pairs is available. And the last three digits is used as the tool offset number. T jjjjjjjj Tool offset number Too
  • Page 128210. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 D Specifying a Tool Group The tool group is specified as follows when the tool offset 400 pairs or 999 is a Machining Program pairs is available. T∆∆999 . . End the tool used by now, and starts to use the tool of the ∆∆group. ”999” distinguishes this specification f
  • Page 1283B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Note NOTE 1 The tool offset 400 pairs and 999 pairs are optional functions. 2 The function codes, which have relation to the tool life management in PMC window functions, cannot be used 38 to 49, 160, 163 to 173, 200 to 202 227 to 231, 324 to 328 3 T
  • Page 128410. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.8 TOOL COMPENSATION VAL- 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) UES, NUMBER OF COM- 160is/180is (B–63534EN) PENSATION VALUES, AND EN- TERING VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.5 TOOL COMPENSATION VA
  • Page 1285B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS 10.3 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 10.3.1 Tool life management General When tools are classified into several groups, average tool life (No. of uses or time) is designated for each group. Whenever a tool is used, the usage time is subtracted from the tool life; when the tool
  • Page 128610. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Tool change reset signal TLRST [Classification] Input signal [Function] Clears all executable data, including the life count of the group, *, and @. To clear the data, specify a group number by tool group number selection signal after replacing the worn–out
  • Page 1287B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Tool skip signal TLSKP [Classification] Input signal [Function] A tool which has not reached its lifespan may be changed by one of two methods: (i) Designate the group number for the tool by tool group number selection signal then turn the tool skip signal
  • Page 128810. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 T code output Tool function strobe signal TF New tool selecting signal TLNW End signal FIN Tool group number select signal TL01 to TL256 (M series) TL01 to TL64 (T series) [Classification] Input signal [Function] When the TLRST or TL
  • Page 1289B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS ȍ {2 9 i Override value = Vi} i+0 *TLV0 0.1 *TLV1 0.2 *TLV2 0.4 *TLV3 0.8 *TLV4 1.6 *TLV5 3.2 *TLV6 6.4 *TLV7 12.8 *TLV8 25.6 *TLV9 51.2 (Example) When *TLV7, *TLV6, and *TLV3 are set to “0”, the override value is calculated as follows: 12.8 + 6.4 + 0.8 = 20.0 The l
  • Page 129010. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6800 SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1 M6T IGI SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1 [Data type] Bit GS1, GS2 This parameter sets the combination of the number of tool life groups which can be entered, and the number of tools which can be entered per group
  • Page 1291B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6801 EXG TSM M6E EXT EMD LFV [Data type] Bit TSM When a tool takes several tool numbers, life is counted in tool life management: 0 : For each of the same tool numbers. 1 : For each tool. LFV Specifies whether life count override is enabled o
  • Page 129210. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Example: When the LTM parameter (bit 2 of parameter No.6800) is set to 0 G10 L3 ; P1 L10 Q1 ; (Q1: The life of group 1 is specified as a count.) : P2 L20 Q2 ; (Q2: The life of group 2 is specified as a duration.) : P3 L20 ; (Omission of Q: The life of group 3 is spe
  • Page 1293B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Alarm and message Number Message Description 149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2 was spe- cified as the life count type in the extended tool life management. 150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allow- NUMBER able value. M
  • Page 129410. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 10.3.2 Tool Life Management B (M Series) General The maximum tool life that can be managed is conventionally 65,535 use counts or 4,300 minutes. Using the tool life management B option extends the maximum tool life that can be managed to 999,999 use counts or 100,00
  • Page 1295B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies that the life of the last tool in the group has expired. [Output condition] This signal is 1 in the following cases: S The actual remaining life ”LIFE – COUNT” is equal
  • Page 129610. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 10.4 CUTTER COMPENSATION 10.4.1 Cutter Compensation B, C (M Series) General When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the tool. To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, first create an offset vector with a length equal to the
  • Page 1297B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Cutter compensation cancel Start–up ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ Fig. 10.4.1 (b) Outline of cutter compensation C Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5001 OFH [Data type] Bit OFH Offset number of tool length compensation, cutter compensation and tool offset 0 : Specifies the tool leng
  • Page 129810. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5003 CCN SUV SUP [Data type] Bit SUP Start up or cancel in cutter compensation C 0 : Type A 1 : Type B SUV When G40, G41, and G42 are specified independently, 0 : The start up and cancel operation conforms to the standard specification. 1 : M
  • Page 1299B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS NOTE In the MDI mode, cutter compensation C (M series) or tool nose radius compensation (T series) is not performed, irrespective of the setting of this parameter. QCR The travel distance of circular interpolation in cutter compensation C (M series) or tool nose rad
  • Page 130010. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE The setting of this parameter determines the travel distance determination method for circular interpolation not during cutter compensation C (M series) or tool nose radius compensation (T series) as well. Accordingly, if this parameter is set, the setting of b
  • Page 1301B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Number Message Description 038 INTERFERENCE IN CIR- Overcutting will occur in cutter com- CULAR BLOCK pensation C because the arc start point or end point coincides with the arc cen- ter. Modify the program. 041 INTERFERENCE IN CRC Overcutting will occur in cutter c
  • Page 130210. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 10.4.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (T Series) General It is difficult to produce the compensation necessary to form accurate parts when using only the tool offset function due to tool nose roundness in taper cutting or circular cutting. The tool nose radius compen
  • Page 1303B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5003 CCN [Data type] Bit CCN When automatic reference position return (G28) is specified in the cutter compensation C mode (M series) or in tool nose radius compensation (T series): 0 : The cutter compensation vector or tool nose radius compe
  • Page 130410. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 [FS16 format] C B Start point D A End point Center If the end point viewed from the start point is in the A region, the movement is made along the shortcut. If the end point is in the B, C, or D region, almost a single turn is made. [FS15 format] B Start point A End
  • Page 1305B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Alarm and message Number Message Description 033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be deter- mined for tool nose radius compensa- tion. Modify the program. Modify the program. 034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to be ST–UP /EXT B
  • Page 130610. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 10.4.3 Tool Axis Direction Tool Length Compensation (M Series) 10.4.3.1 Tool axis direction tool length compensation General When a five–axis machine that has two axes for rotating the tool is used, tool length compensation can be performed in a specified tool axis
  • Page 1307B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Explanation D Command for tool axis The G43.1 Hn command enables tool axis direction tool length direction tool length compensation. compensation The tool compensation vector changes as the offset value changes or movement is made on a rotation axis. When the tool c
  • Page 130810. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 (2) B–axis and C–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axis B C Workpiece Z C B Y X Vx = Lc * sin(b) * cos(c) Vy = Lc * sin(b) * sin(c) Vz = Lc * cos(b) (3) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the X–axis A B Z A Workpiece X B Y Vx = Lc * cos(b) Vy = Lc * sin(b) * s
  • Page 1309B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS (4) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axis, and the B–axis used as the master B B Z Workpiece B X Y A Vx = Lc * cos(a) * sin(b) Vy = –Lc * sin(a) Vz = Lc * cos(a) * cos(b) (5) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axis, and the A–axis used as t
  • Page 131010. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 D Tool holder offset The machine–specific length from the rotation center of the tool rotation axes (A– and B–axes, A– and C–axes, and B– and C–axes) to the tool mounting position is referred to as the tool holder offset. Unlike a tool length offset value, a tool ho
  • Page 1311B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS D Rotation axis offset Set offsets relative to the rotation angles of the rotation axes in parameter No. 19659. The compensation vector calculation formula is the same as that used for rotation axis origin compensation, except that Bp and Cp are changed to rotation
  • Page 131210. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Description D Compensation of the Compensation is performed when the rotation centers of two rotation axes rotation centers of two do not match. rotation axes The length from the tool mounting position to the first rotation axis center is set as the tool holder offs
  • Page 1313B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS NOTE When using the spindle center compensation described below, set the length from the tool mounting position to the spindle center as the tool holder offset. D Spindle center Compensation of the spindle center is performed. compensation The amount of spindle cent
  • Page 131410. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Shifting the control point Conventionally, the center of a rotation axis was used as the control point. The control point can now be shifted as shown in the figure below. Then, when the rotation axis is at the 0–degree position also in tool length compensation along
  • Page 1315B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS D Expressions for Vx, Vy, Vz: Tool length compensation vectors individual machine types A, B, C: Absolute coordinate values for the A–, B–, and C–axes To: Tool offset value Ho: Tool holder offset value Jx, Jy, Jz: Rotation center compensation vectors Cx, Cy, Cz: Spi
  • Page 131610. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19650 RAP RAM [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis RAM Specifies whether to use the axis as the rotation axis for tool axis direction tool length compensation. 0 : Not used as the rotation axis. 1 : Used as the rotation
  • Page 1317B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS 19655 Axis number of the linear axis to which a rotation axis belongs [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 0 – Number of controlled axes When a rotation axis turns about a linear axis, the linear axis is referred to as an axis to whi
  • Page 131810. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 19657 Master rotation axis number [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 – Number of controlled axes When a machine does not have the rotation axis that turns about the tool axis, the axis number of a rotation axis used as the master axis
  • Page 1319B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Example for setting parameters that determine the machine configuration Tool axis direction: Z–axis Axis configuration: X, Y, Z, W, A, B Rotation axes: A–axis (axis rotating about the X–axis), B–axis (axis rotating about the Y–axis) Master axis: A–axis Data No. Data
  • Page 132010. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 19660 Origin offset value of a rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2 word axis [Unit of data] degree Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Minimun unit of type] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
  • Page 1321B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19665 ETH SVC SBP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit SBP In tool length compensation along the tool axis, shift of the control point is: 0 : Calculated automatically. 1 : Set in parameter No. 19667. SVC In tool length compensation a
  • Page 132210. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 [Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999 In the function for tool length compensation along the tool axis, set the control point shift vector. This parameter is valid when bit 5 (SVC) of parameter No. 19665 is 1 and bit 4 (SBP) of parameter No. 19665 is 1. Alarm an
  • Page 1323B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Tool side compensation Tool side compensation is a type of cutter compensation that performs three–dimensional compensation on a plane (compensation plane) perpendicular to a tool direction vector. Programmed tool path Tool vector (before compensation) Cutter compen
  • Page 132410. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter (1) Parameters setting the relationship between the rotation axis and rotation plane with which the tool is controlled (1) Relationship between the rotation axis and rotation plane Parameter (No.19610 to 19619) (2) Direction of the tool axis Parameter (No.
  • Page 1325B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS 19615 Rotation axis for three–dimensional cutter compensation and so forth (second group) 19616 Linear axis 1 for three–dimensional cutter compensation and so forth (second group) 19617 Linear axis 2 for three–dimensional cutter compensation and so forth (second gro
  • Page 132610. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 S When there is one rotation axis, set the rotation axis of the second group to 0. S In general, the direction vector of a rotation axis has three direction components. This function supports direction vectors with one direction component and two direction component
  • Page 1327B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS – When the rotation axis rotates from the positive direction of linear axis 1 to the positive direction of linear axis 2, the rotation axis is said to rotate in the positive direction. Z B q Y a: Angle of inclination X 19620 Reference angle for the rotation axis for
  • Page 132810. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 RB: Rotation is performed in the plane formed by linear axis 3 and linear axis 1. When rotation is performed from the positive direction of linear axis 3 to the positive direction of linear axis 1, the direction of the rotation is positive. Linear axes 1, 2, and 3 a
  • Page 1329B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19605 NIC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NIC Specifies whether to perform an interference check when compensation plane switching occurs during three–dimensional cutter compensation. 0 : Perform. 1 : Do not perform. 19635 Effect
  • Page 133010. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 19631 Angle determination fluctuation value for leading edge offset [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2 word [Unit of data] degree [Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999 This parameter sets a variation range used to determine whether the included angle bet
  • Page 1331B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Number Message Contents 5406 G41.3/G40 FORMAT (1) A move instruction was specified in ERROR a block in which the G41.3 or G40 code is specified. (2) A G or M code which suppresses buffering was specified in the block in which the G41.3 code was speci- fied. 5407 ILL
  • Page 133210. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 10.4.5 Tool Center Point Control (M series) General On a five–axis machine having two rotation axes that turn a tool, tool length compensation can be performed momentarily even in the middle of a block. This tool length compensation is classified into one of two typ
  • Page 1333B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS NOTE The length from the tool tip to tool pivot point must equal the sum of the tool length compensation amount and tool holder offset value. RISC processor is necessary, if this function is used. Refer to Subsection 7.1.19 “RISC Processor Operation,” in this manual
  • Page 133410. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 D Programmed point In programming, the position of the tool tip center is specified. Ball–end mill Tool tip center Programmed path Flat–end mill Tool tip center Programmed path Corner–radius–end mill Tool tip center Programmed path D Linear interpolation When linear
  • Page 1335B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS D Specification of rotation (1) Type 1 axes When only the rotation axes are specified in tool center point control (type 1) mode, the feedrate of the rotation axes is set to the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1422, No. 1430, or No. 1432). (2) Type 2 In tool
  • Page 133610. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 D Operation of tool center The following item is the same as for tool length compensation along the point control (type 2) tool axis: – Tool holder offset Positioning (G00) and linear interpolation (G01) move the tool to the position (x, y, z, b, c) obtained by the
  • Page 1337B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS D Example of machine (1) When the rotation axes are the A– and C–axes, and the tool axis is the configuration and Z–axis expression for rotation axis calculation when tool center point control (type 2) is used A C Z Workpiece C A Y X Ǹ I2 ) J2 a + tan –1 K c + tan –
  • Page 133810. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 (3) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is the X–axis A B Z A Workpiece X B Y a + tan –1 J –K Ǹ J2 ) K 2 b + tan –1 I (4) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is the Z–axis (master axis: B–axis) B B Z B X Workpi
  • Page 1339B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS (5) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is the Z–axis (master axis: A–axis) A B Z B Y Workpiece X A a + tan –1 –J K a + tan –1 –J Ǹ I2 ) K 2 D Tool life management When tool life management is used, the tool length compensation amount of
  • Page 134010. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19650 RAP RAM [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis RAM Specifies whether to use the axis as the rotation axis for tool axis direction tool length compensation. 0 : Not used as the rotation axis. 1 : Used as the rotation
  • Page 1341B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS (Example 2) The controlled axes include only the linear axes X, Y, and Z. By using the tool attachment, the tool axis is tilted in the same tool axis direction as when the A– and C–axes are rotated. RAM (No. 19650#0) RAP (No. 19650#1) Angle (No. 19658) X 1 1 45000 Y
  • Page 134210. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 19657 Master rotation axis number [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 – Number of controlled axes When a machine does not have the rotation axis that turns about the tool axis, the axis number of a rotation axis used as the master axis
  • Page 1343B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Example for setting parameters that determine the machine configuration Tool axis direction: Z–axis Axis configuration: X, Y, Z, W, A, B Rotation axes: A–axis (axis rotating about the X–axis), B–axis (axis rotating about the Y–axis) Master axis: A–axis Data No. Data
  • Page 134410. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 19660 Origin offset value of a rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2 word axis [Unit of data] degree Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Minimun unit of type] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
  • Page 1345B–63523EN–1/03 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19665 ETH SVC SBP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit SBP In tool length compensation along the tool axis, shift of the control point is: 0 : Calculated automatically. 1 : Set in parameter No. 19667. SVC In tool length compensation a
  • Page 134610. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Connection manual 7.1.19 RISC Processor Operation (This function) 1320
  • Page 1347B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11 PROGRAM COMMAND 1321
  • Page 134811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/ POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING General Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following a
  • Page 1349B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3455 AXD [Data type] Bit axis AXD If a decimal point is omitted for an address with which a decimal point can be used, the value is determined: 0 : In accordance with the least input increment. 1 : In millimeters, inches, or seconds. (calcul
  • Page 135011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.8.4 Decimal point programming 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.8.3 Decimal point programming (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.8.4 Decimal point progr
  • Page 1351B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.2 G CODE SYSTEM (T SERIES) General There are three G code systems : A,B, and C (Table 11.2). Select a G code system using parameter GSC (No. 3401#7) and parameter GSB (No. 3401#6). G code list for T series (1/3) G code Group Function A B C G00 G00 G00 Positionin
  • Page 135211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 G code list for T series (2/3) G code Group Function A B C G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting G34 G34 G34 Variable–lead thread cutting G35 G35 G35 01 Circular threading CW Circular threading CCW (When the bit 3 (G36) of parameter G36 G36 G36 No. 3405 is set to 1) Automatic
  • Page 1353B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND G code list for T series (3/3) G code Group Function A B C G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing G73 G73 G75 00 Pattern repeating G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal d
  • Page 135411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3401 GSC GSB [Data type] Bit GSB, GSC The G code system is set. GSC GSB G code 0 0 G code system A 0 1 G code system B 1 0 G code system C #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3402 CLR G91 G01 [Data type] Bit G01 Mode entered when the power is
  • Page 1355B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Note NOTE 1 If the CNC enters the clear state (see bit 6 (CLR) of parameter 3402) when the power is turned on or the CNC is reset, the modal G codes change as follows. (1) G codes marked with in Table 11.2 are enabled. (2) When the system is cleared due to power-on
  • Page 135611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.3 PREPARATORY 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) 160is/180is APPENDIX E STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.3 PREPARATORY 21i/210i/210is (For La
  • Page 1357B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION General A program consists of the following components: Table 11.3 Program components Components Descriptions Tape start Symbol indicating the start of a program file Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc. Program start
  • Page 135811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0100 CTV Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit CTV: Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program. 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3201 NPE N99 [Data type] Bit N99 With an M99 bl
  • Page 1359B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Alarm and message Number Message Description 001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). 002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will be gener- ated only when the TV check is effective (w
  • Page 136011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.4 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION General Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code. Signal Inch input signal INCH [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that inch input mode is active. [Output condition] “1”indicates that the
  • Page 1361B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ROSx ROTx NOTE When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before continuing operation. [Data type] Bit axis ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis ROSx ROTx Description 0 0 Linear axis @ Inch/metric conversion is done. @ All
  • Page 136211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm (Metric input) Linear axis 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
  • Page 1363B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3104 MCN [Data type] Bit MCN Machine position is: 0 : Not displayed according to the unit of input. (Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for inch
  • Page 136411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Warning WARNING When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) and vice versa, the tool compensation value must be re–set according to the least input increment. However, when bit 0 (OIM) of parameter 5006 is 1, tool compensation values are automatically con
  • Page 1365B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.5 HIGH SPEED CYCLE CUTTING General This function can convert the machining profile to a data group that can be distributed as pulses at high-speed by the macro compiler and macro executor. The function can also call and execute the data group as a machining cycl
  • Page 136611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Configuration of high– Data for the high speed cycle cutting is assigned to variables (#20000 to speed cycle cutting data #85535) for the high–speed cycle cutting by the macro compiler and macro executor. Configuration of the high speed cycle cutting data #20000
  • Page 1367B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Header The header for high-speed cycle cutting data has the following configuration: Header configuration #20001/20017/20033.. Cycle repetition count #20002/20018/20034.. Cycle connection data #20003/20019/20035.. Number of data items #20004/20020/20036.. Data ty
  • Page 136811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Data type 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 – – r6 r5 r4 r3 r2 r1 – – t6 t5 t4 t3 t2 t1 The bits from t1 to t6, corresponding to the 1st to 6th axes, have the fol- lowing meanings: 0: Distribution data is always constant. 1: Distribution data is variable or f
  • Page 1369B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7501 IPC IT2 IT1 IT0 CSP IPC IT2 IT1 IT0 [Data type] Bit CSP Cs contouring control function dedicated to a piston lathe is 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. IT0, IT1, IT2 IT2 IT1 IT0 0 0 0 Interpolates the G05 data in 8ms 0 0 1 Interpolates
  • Page 137011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 HUNx Specifies whether the unit of data to be distributed during cutting in a high-speed cycle is ten times the least input increment. 0 : The unit of data is the same as the least input increment. 1 : The unit of data is ten times the least input increment. NOTE T
  • Page 1371B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Number Message Description 178 G05 COMMANDED IN G05 was commanded in the G41/G42 G41/G42 MODE mode. Correct the program. 179 PARAM. (NO. 7510) The number of controlled axes set by the SETTING ERROR parameter 7510 exceeds the maximum number. Modify the parameter set
  • Page 137211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.6 CUSTOM MACRO 11.6.1 Custom Macro General Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general program
  • Page 1373B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND P : Macro number of bolt hole circle r : Radius α : Start angle β : Angle between circles k : Number of circles Signal Custom Macro Input Signal UI000 to UI015 UI000 to UI031 UI100 to UI131 UI200 to UI231 UI
  • Page 137411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Custom Macro Output Signal UI000 to UI015 UO100 to UO131 UO100 to UO131 UO000 to UO031 UO200 to UO231 UO300 to UO331 [Classification] Output signal [Function] No funct
  • Page 1375B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000 G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008 G056 UI023 UI022 UI021 UI020 UI019 UI018 UI017 UI016 G057 UI031 UI030 UI029 UI028 UI027 UI026 UI025 UI024 G276 UI107 UI1
  • Page 137611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F285 UO315 UO314 UO313 UO312 UO311 UO310 UO309 UO308 F286 UO323 UO322 UO321 UO320 UO319 UO318 UO317 UO316 F287 UO331 UO330 UO329 UO328 UO327 UO326 UO325 UO324 Parameter D Settings for executing single block stop and custom macros #7 #6 #5 #4
  • Page 1377B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND NOTE This bit is invalid when bit 0 (NOP) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1. (M series) SBV Custom macro statement 0 : Not stop the single block 1 : Stops the single block To control single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, use this par
  • Page 137811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 PV5 Custom macro common variables 0 : Outputs custom macro common variables #500 through #599. 1 : Outputs custom macro common variables #100 through #199 and #500 through #599. CRO ISO code output using a BPRNT command or a DPRNT command 0 : Outputs only LF after
  • Page 1379B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Setting an M code that calls a program entered in a file 6030 M code that calls the program entered in file [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0, and 1 to 255 When the subprogram call function is used, this parameter sets the M code for calling a program in a fi
  • Page 138011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Setting M codes that call subprograms of program Nos.9001 to 9009 6071 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9001 6072 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9002 6073 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9003 6074 M code th
  • Page 1381B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND NOTE Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called by M00. D ASCII codes that call subprogram of program No. 9004 6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004 6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005 [Data typ
  • Page 138211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Number Message Description 114 FORMAT ERROR IN There is an error in other formats than . Modify the program. 115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE A value not defined as a variable number is NUMBER designated in the custom macro, or the header contents are improper
  • Page 1383B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Number Message Description 129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT An address which is not allowed in is used. Modify the program. 199 MACRO WORD UNDE Undefined macro word was used. Modify FINED the custom macro. Caution CAUTION Machine tool builders
  • Page 138411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.6.2 Interruption Type Custom Macro General When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program an interrupt
  • Page 1385B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program operation can be interrupted by an interrupt signal (UINT) input to execute the program specified by Pxxxx. Any interrupt signal (UNIT, asterisked in Fig. 11.6.2) issued after M97 is ignored. Do not enter
  • Page 138611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code 0 : M96/M97 1 : M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034) MSB Interrupt program 0 : Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro–type interrupt) 1 : Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram– ty
  • Page 1387B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.11 Interruption type custom macro 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.11 Interruption type custom macro (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.15.11 Int
  • Page 138811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Example) When this parameter is set to 10, the custom macro variables are specified as follows: Custom macro variables 100 to 109: Used commonly between two paths Custom macro variables 110 to 149: Used independently for each path NOTE 1 This parameter is dedicated
  • Page 1389B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.6.4 Embedded Macro Outline In this function, the macro programs, which are made by the machine tool builder (MTB), are stored in flash ROM. The macro programs, which are stored in flash ROM, are loaded to the program memory area for the embedded macro (DRAM) whe
  • Page 139011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Parameter (parameter for Parameters for embedded macro exist both FROM and DRAM. If the embedded macro) keyword in the parameters of FROM is not matched that of SRAM (lock state), the embedded macro function executes by using the parameters on FROM. When the keyw
  • Page 1391B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Detail 1) Program number As for the embedded macro program number, the first program number is set to parameter No.12011 and the last program number is set to No.12012. The remainder program numbers become the user program numbers of the tape storage memory area. W
  • Page 139211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 It is not possible to move from the tape storage memory program to the embedded macro program or from the embedded macro program to the tape storage memory program by the program number change operation. P/S alarm 74 is generated when doing. At the editable state (
  • Page 1393B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 5. Embedded macro–calling G–code and program No. (Parameter No. 12020 – 12049) At meeting all the following requirements, the parameter number 12013 keyword cannot be changed. (1) There is a password. (Password 00) (2) The range of the embedded macro program number
  • Page 139411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 7) Input to FROM and output from FROM The ”INMC” file for the embedded macro stored in FROM can be input and output to the memory card by BOOT SYSTEM. Please refer to the maintenance manual for the details. 8) Common variables #200 – #499 Common variables #200 – #4
  • Page 1395B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND NOTE 1 When one program exists, the parameters for embedded macro program number can not be changed. 2 During 5) – 9) processes, if the CNC power supply is turned off and on without storing macro program in FROM, macro programs are deleted. D New making (2) 1) Deci
  • Page 139611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Massage Following messages are displayed in the place on present time. D ”PROG–SAV” –– Please stores the embedded macro programs. This display is blink when the embedded macro programs are edited. It informs that the contents of edited the embedded macro programs a
  • Page 1397B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND There is no problem even if a program in a usual tape storage memory area is edited or the parameter for embedded macro is changed and the CNC power supply is turned off/on. 2) At the editable embedded macro program state, when program all clear operation (”O–9999”
  • Page 139811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12001 IMREP [Data type] Bit IMREP Action in response to an attempt to register an embedded macro program whose number is the same as that of an existing program 0 : An alarm is generated. 1 : The existing program is deleted, then t
  • Page 1399B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 12011 First program number for embedded macro [Data type] 2–Word [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 12012 Last program number for embedded macro [Data type] 2–Word [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 The program numbers for embedded macro are set by these parameters. Th
  • Page 140011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 1. Valid / invalid of embedded macro program over registration (Parameter No. 12001#0) 2. Valid / invalid of embedded macro program edit and reference (Parameter No. 12010) 3. Embedded macro program No. (Parameter No. 12011,12012) 4. Embedded macro series/edition (
  • Page 1401B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 12020 G–code No. for embedded macro (the 1st set) 12023 G–code No. for embedded macro (the 2nd set) : : : : 12047 G–code No. for embedded macro (the 10th set) [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 999 12021 Macro programs No. for embedded macro (the 1st set) 120
  • Page 140211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.6.5 Embedded macro for milling (M series) Outline Embedded macro for milling is available for programming four canned cycles (Hole machining, Facing, Side cutting, Pocketing). The G codes from G200 to G233 are used to call the macro. In addition, of alarms 3000
  • Page 1403B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND A maximum of 8 points can be specified. The following table shows addresses, which are used in arguments for X and Y coordinate of the position of each hole. X coordinate Y coordinate Point – 1 X Y Point – 2 A B Point – 3 C D Point – 4 E F Point – 5 H I Point – 6 J
  • Page 140411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Y: Start point Y Y coordinate of the position of first hole. A: Line angle The angle between the X axis and the straight line. If there in no input, 0 is regarded. N: Holes number The total number of holes, including the number of the points to be omitted. T: Pitch
  • Page 1405B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Hole Machining Sequence B C D 1 2 3 4 LINE Q: Pattern continue Selection whether to continue entering another hole pattern. 1: End 2: Continue. D Grid (G202) This is a menu for specifying the holes positions of a grid. Create ISO code program in the following form.
  • Page 140611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 R: U – V angle The acute angle between the line defined by the points and the horizontal direction and vertical direction. It is considered to be a right angle if not input. Hole Machining Sequence 1 2 3 GRID Omit point : To designate the point to be omitted, input
  • Page 1407B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND V: V – length The length in the vertical direction I: U – number The number of the holes in the horizontal direction. J: V – number The number of the holes in the vertical direction K: X – U angle The angle between the line in the horizontal direction and the X axi
  • Page 140811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 X: Center point X X coordinate of the center of the circle. Y: Center point Y Y coordinate of the center of the circle. R: Radius The radius of the circle. A: Start angle The angle between the segment from the center of the circle to starting point and the X axis.
  • Page 1409B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Y Y X 2 X 3 4 1 C B R T R D N A A E (X, Y) (X, Y) Arc : same space arc Arc : different space arc D In the case of Same space arc : X: Center point X X coordinate of the center of the circle. Y: Center point Y Y coordinate of the center of the circle. R: Radius The
  • Page 141011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 A: Start angle The angle between the segment from the center of the circle to starting point and the X axis. If there in no input, 0 is regarded and the starting point is considered to be on the X axis. Pitch space : The angle between the segment from the center of
  • Page 1411B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Facing D Square surface (G210) This is a menu for facing the surface on a square shape plane. Create ISO code program in the following form. G210 P__ L__ Z__ B__ J__ H__ F__ C__ W__ X__ Y__ D D D D ; K V . (X, Y) J C B H Z Z Y M U N X X Facing : Z–X plane Square su
  • Page 141211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 C: Cutting width The machining allowance one of pass in the XY direction. It is specified a rate (%) of the tool. (less than 70%) X: Center point X X coordinate of the center of the square. Y: Center point Y Y coordinate of the center of the square. U: U–length The
  • Page 1413B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND E: Start point The starting position of the machining (1, 2, 3, 4). If there is no input, 1 is regarded. [4] [2] [3] [1] M: Approach gap The gap between the tool edge in the cutting feed start point and the work. If there is no input, 5mm is regarded. N: Escape gap
  • Page 141411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 a) In the case of rough cutting 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A). 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the point equal to (END POINT Z + REMOVAL DEPTH – REMOVAL PITCH) 3. Cutting feed to the opposite side (B) of the starting point. 4. Rise along t
  • Page 1415B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND a) In the case of rough cutting 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A). 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the point equal to (END POINT Z + REMOVAL DEPTH – REMOVAL PITCH) 3. Cutting feed to the other side (B) in the X axis (U direction). 4. Rapid tra
  • Page 141611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 a) In the case of rough cutting 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A). 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the point equal to (END POINT Z + REMOVAL DEPTH – REMOVAL PITCH) 3. Cut spirally and finally move in cutting feed by an amount equal to ESCAPE G
  • Page 1417B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND T: Machining process 1: Rough cutting 2: Finish cutting Z: End point Z Z coordinate of the final machined surface B: Removal depth The machining allowance in the Z direction of the cutting surface J: Removal pitch The machining allowance of one pass for rough cutti
  • Page 141811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 E: Start point The starting position of the machining (1, 2, 3, 4). If there is no input, 1 is regarded. [4] [2] [3] [1] M: Approach gap The gap between the tool edge in the cutting feed start point and the work. If there is no input, 5mm is regarded. N: Escape gap
  • Page 1419B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Side cutting D Square side (G220) This is a menu for cutting the square shape side. Create ISO code program in the following form. G220 P__ Z__ S__ I__ D__ B__ J__ H__ F__ E__ D D D D ; R I C J V . K (X, Y) H B Z Z Y I D X S X U Side cutting : Z–X plane Square side
  • Page 142011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D: Tool small diameter The small diameter of chamfer tool. I Tool Diameter Workpiece D J: Chamfer angle The tool nose angle of a chamfering tool. H: Tool out depth The thrust depth of a chamfering tool. Tool Tool J H Workpiece F: The feed rate of the tool. E: Z_cut
  • Page 1421B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND C: Clearance The amount of clearance for cutting feed in the Z axis at the approach or escape movement. The default data is 3mm. W: Cutting direction 1: Down–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the forward direction 2: Up–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the
  • Page 142211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 N: Start point The starting position of the machining (1, 2). If there is no input, 1 is regarded. [2] [1] [2] [1] Out–side In–side The following table shows addresses used in arguments in each machining process. G220 T Z S I D B J H I D J H M F E X Y U V Rough # #
  • Page 1423B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND a) In the case of rough cutting 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A). 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to point R (END POINT Z + BOTTOM REMOVAL + CLEARANCE) 3. Descent along the lower Z axis in cutting feed (Z–CUT FEED RATE) by the pitch (BOTTOM PITC
  • Page 142411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 d) In the case of chamfering 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (B). 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the cutting point. (Cutting point : It is calculated by END POINT Z, BOTTOM REMOVAL, CHAMFER REMOVAL, TOOL SMALL DIA. CHAMFER ANGLE, TOOL OUT DEPTH
  • Page 1425B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND T: Machining process 1: Roughing 2: Bottom finishing 3: Side finishing 4: Chamfering Z: End point Z Z coordinate of the final machined surface S: Side removal The side machining allowance. I: Side pitch The side machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting. Ro
  • Page 142611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 X: Center point X X coordinate of the center of the circle. Y: Center point Y Y coordinate of the center of the circle. R: Radius The radius of a circle. C: Clearance The amount of clearance for cutting feed in the Z axis at the approach or escape movement. The def
  • Page 1427B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Movements : Except for the shape of the circle, the basic movements are similar to those of Square side. D Track side (G222) This is a menu for cutting the track shape side. Create ISO code program in the following form. G222 P__ Z__ S__ I__ D__ B__ J__ H__ F__ E
  • Page 142811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 J: Chamfer angle The tool nose angle of a chamfering tool. H: Tool out depth The thrust depth of a chamfering tool. F: The feed rate of the tool. E: Z_cut feed rate The cutting feed rate in Zaxis direction from point R. (Point R = End point Z + Bottom removal + Cle
  • Page 1429B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND The following table shows addresses used in arguments in each machining process.. G222 T Z S I D B J H I D J H M F E X Y U R Rough # # # # # # # # _ _ _ _ # # # # # # # Bottom finish # # # # # # _ # _ _ _ _ # # # # # # # Side finish # # _ _ _ # # # _ _ _ _ # # # #
  • Page 143011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 I: Side pitch The side machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting. Rough cutting is done in one pass if not input. D: Side finish The side machining allowance of the side finish cutting. This is cut in one pass. Side finish cutting is not done if not input.
  • Page 1431B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND W: Cutting direction 1, 4: Down–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the forward direction 2, 3: Up–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the reverse direction If there is no input, 1 is regarded. [4: Down–cut] [2: Up–cut] (X, Y) Approach / Escape gap (X, Y) [3: U
  • Page 143211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Movements : Rapid Traverse (G00) Feed Traverse (G01) Bottom Pitch Point R Clearance Z Bottom Removal X Bottom Finish Y Side Removal X Side Finish A Side Pitch Clearance Approach/Escape Gap a) In the case of rough cutting 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point
  • Page 1433B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND c) In the case of side finish cutting 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (A). 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to point R (END POINT Z + BOTTOM REMOVAL + CLEARANCE). 3. Rapid traverse toward one side by the allowance (SIDE FINISH). 4. Descent along the
  • Page 143411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Pocketing D Square pocket (G230) This is a menu for pocketing the square shape. Create ISO code program in the following form. G230 P__ Z__ B__ J__ H__ F__ C__ W__ X__ Y__ D D D D ; M R C J V K . (X, Y) H B Z Z Y D X X U Pocketing : Z–X plane Square pocket T: Machi
  • Page 1435B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND J: Chamfer angle The tool nose angle of a chamfering tool. H: Tool out depth The thrust depth of a chamfering tool. Tool Tool J H Workpiece F: The feed rate of the tool. E: Z_cut feed rate The cutting feed rate in Zaxis direction from point R. (Point R = End point
  • Page 143611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 K: Approach / escape The radius of approach or escape. The movement is performed as a quarter arc. It is calculated automatically if not input. A: Incline angle The angle between the U side and X axis, when the work is inclined with respect to the X axis. It is con
  • Page 1437B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Movements : Rapid Traverse (G00) Feed Traverse (G01) Removal Pitch Point R Clearance Z Removal Depth X Bottom Finish Y Side Finish X Cutting Width a) In the case of rough cutting 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point. 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to
  • Page 143811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the cutting point. (Cutting point : It is calculated by END POINT Z, REMOVAL DEPTH, REMOVAL PITCH, CLEARANCE) 3. Cut into the workpiece following a circular path. 4. Cutting of the side finish allowance (SIDE FINISH). 5. Mov
  • Page 1439B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND T: Machining process 1: Roughing 2: Bottom finishing 3: Side finishing 4: Chamfering 5: Drilling Z: End point Z Z coordinate of the final machined surface B: Removal depth The depth of the pocket. J: Removal pitch The machining allowance of one pass for rough cutti
  • Page 144011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 M: Clearance The amount of clearance for cutting feed in the Z axis at the approach or escape movement. The default data is 3mm. W: Cutting direction 1: Down–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the forward direction 2: Up–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the
  • Page 1441B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Z: End point Z Z coordinate of the final machined surface B: Removal depth The depth of the pocket. J: Removal pitch The machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting in the Z direction. Rough cutting is done in one pass if not input. H: Bottom finish The botto
  • Page 144211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 W: Cutting direction 1: Down–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the forward direction 2: Up–cut : Rotation of the cutting tool in the reverse direction If there is no input, 1 is regarded. K: Approach / escape The radius of approach or escape. The movement is pe
  • Page 1443B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND T: Machining process 1: Roughing 2: Bottom finishing 3: Side finishing 4: Chamfering Z: End point Z Z coordinate of the final machined surface B: Removal depth The depth of the groove. J: Removal pitch The machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting in the Z
  • Page 144411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 K: Approach gap The gap between the tool edge in the cutting feed start point and the workpiece . If there is no input, 5mm is regarded. Q: Escape gap The gap between the tool edge and the workpiece when the tool moves away from the work. If there is no input, 5mm
  • Page 1445B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Movements : Rapid Traverse (G00) Feed Traverse (G01) Removal Pitch Point R Clearance Z Removal Depth X Bottom Finish Side Finish Y A (X, Y) B X Groove Width Approach / Escape Gap Cutting Width a) In the case of rough cutting 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting p
  • Page 144611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 c) In the case of side finish cutting 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (B). 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to point R (END POINT Z + REMOVAL DEPTH + CLEARANCE) 3. Move down along Z axis in cutting feed (Z–CUT FEED RATE) by the pitch (REMOVAL PITCH)
  • Page 1447B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Note NOTE 1 This function requires the following optional functions. S Embedded Macro S Canned cycle S Custom macro B This function consists of 83 programs. So consider the number of programs which an operator requires and specify one of the following optional func
  • Page 144811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Number Message Contents 3004 TOOL IS TOO BIG. Machining is impossible because the cutter diameter is too large. 3005 APPROACH AMOUNT The tool interferes with the opposite ISBIG. edge because the length of approach is too long. 3006 CORNER RADIUS[R] IS Corner R inte
  • Page 1449B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Measurement macro Data used in common to every measurement cycle must previously be set variables in macro variables (common variables). 1. Calibration macro variables The following macro variables are used to calibrate the probe. Executing a calibration cycle sets
  • Page 145011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 S #215: Return distance (e) after the second contact This macro variable specifies the distance (measured in mm) through which the prove is to return after it touches the measurement face the second time. NOTE An alarm is issued if the setting of any of the above m
  • Page 1451B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Z: Movement distance Specifies the distance from the measurement start point to the ring gage. D: Gage line–to–table distance Specifies the distance from the gage line to the table. H: Ring gage height Specifies the height of the ring gage. F: Movement speed Specif
  • Page 145211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 2) The probe moves at the speed fa through the distance ”R – a” in the positive X–axis direction. 3) The probe moves at the speed fa in the range ”R + g” until it touches the ring gage. 4) The probe moves at the rapid traverse rate to the center X–axis coordinate w
  • Page 1453B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Measurement sequence: What is done during measurement is described below. 1) The probe moves at the speed fa in the negative Z–axis direction to a point the distance Z away from the measurement start point. 2) The probe moves at the speed fa in the positive X–axis
  • Page 145411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 3) The probe moves at the speed f in the range ”R + g – stylus ball radius” until it touches the ring gage. 4) The probe moves at the rapid traverse rate to the center X–axis coordinate where it was before the start of measurement, and makes the same measurement as
  • Page 1455B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND F: Movement speed Specify the speed at which the probe is to move for measurement. W: Workpiece coordinate system Select a workpiece coordinate system to be set up, and enter the corresponding number listed below: G54 to G59: 1 = G54, 2 = G55, 3 = G56, 4 = G57, 5 =
  • Page 145611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Executing G180 obtains a reference point from the input and measured values, and outputs the obtained values to the W–specified workpiece zero point offset value and the following macro variables. #250: End face measurement value (machine coordinate system) #251: E
  • Page 1457B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 2) The probe moves at the speed fa in the negative Z–axis direction to a point the distance Z away from the measurement start point. 3) The probe moves at the speed f in the range ”V/2 – g + stylus ball radius” until it touches the measurement face (the first measu
  • Page 145811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 W: Workpiece coordinate system Select a workpiece coordinate system to be set up, and enter the corresponding number listed below: G54 to G59: 1 = G54, 2 = G55, 3 = G56, 4 = G57, 5 = G58, and 6 = G59 If 48 coordinate systems are valid, the following numbers are spe
  • Page 1459B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Measuring a cylinder The center position and outside radius of a cylinder are measured by outside radius (G183) creating a G code program in the following format: G183Z__R__F__W__ ; ÄÄÄ Stylus ball radius Measurement start point ÄÄÄ g a R ÄÄÄÄ Z ÄÄ ÄÄÄÄ First mea
  • Page 146011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 6) The probe moves at the rapid traverse rate to the center X coordinate where it was before the start of measurement, and makes the same measurement as stated above in the negative X–axis direction and the Y–axis direction (the first measurement session). 7) The p
  • Page 1461B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND F: Movement speed Specifies the speed at which the probe is to move for measurement. W: Workpiece coordinate system Select a workpiece coordinate system to be set up, and enter the corresponding number listed below: G54 to G59: 1 = G54, 2 = G55, 3 = G56, 4 = G57, 5
  • Page 146211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Measuring the outside The center of a rectangle and the size of its outside sides in the X–axis and sides of a rectangle Y–axis directions are measured by creating a G code program in the (G185) following format: G185Z__U__V__F__W__ ; Measurement ÄÄ ÄÄ Stylus bal
  • Page 1463B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 3) The probe moves at the speed f in the range ”U/2 – g + stylus ball radius” until it touches the measurement face (the first measurement session). 4) The probe returns through the distance b at the rapid traverse rate. 5) The probe moves at the specified speed F
  • Page 146411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 U: Length in the X–axis direction Specifies the nominal length of the rectangle in the X–axis direction. V: Length in the Y–axis direction Specifies the nominal length of the rectangle in the Y–axis direction. F: Movement speed Specifies the speed at which the prob
  • Page 1465B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Measuring an outside The position of an outside corner is measured by creating a G code corner (G187) program in the following format: G187A__B__C__D__U__V__I__J__F__W__ ; V [4] J [3] (C, D) [1] (A, B) [2] I U Measurement start point A: X coordinate of measuremen
  • Page 146611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE Before issuing a command for this cycle, be sure to set the probe to an approximate measurement start point. Measurement sequence: 1) The probe moves at the speed fa to a point the distance ”U – a – stylus ball radius” away from the measurement start point. 2)
  • Page 1467B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND V: Distance in the Y–axis direction Specifies the distance from the measurement start point to the measurement end face in the Y–axis direction. I: Increment in the X–axis direction Specifies an increment (distance from measurement point [1] to measurement point [2
  • Page 146811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Measuring a bolt hole The center position and radius of a bolt hole circle (for three holes) are circle (G189) measured by creating a G code program in the following format: G189Z__R__D__A__B__C__F__W__ ; Measurement First hole start point Second B A Z hole D C R
  • Page 1469B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Measurement sequence: 1) The probe moves to the center of the first bolt hole at the speed fa. 2) The probe moves at the speed fa in the negative Z–axis direction to a point the distance Z away from the measurement start point. 3) The probe moves at the speed fa in
  • Page 147011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Measuring four holes The center position of each of four holes is measured by creating a G code (G190) program in the following format: G190Z__D__A__B__C__E__H__I__J__K__F__W__ ; Measurement Fourth hole Third hole start point Z (J, K) (H, I) First hole Second hol
  • Page 1471B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND NOTE Before issuing a command for this cycle, be sure to set the probe above the approximate center of the first hole. Measurement sequence: 1) The probe moves to the center of the first hole at the speed fa. 2) The probe moves at the speed fa in the negative Z–axi
  • Page 147211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Measuring a workpiece The angle formed by one side of a workpiece and the X–axis is measured angle (G191) by creating a G–code program in the following format: G191A__B__C__I__D__J__F__ ; Y (C, I) [2] J (A, B) [1] 3 D 2 1 4 X Measurement start point A: X coordina
  • Page 1473B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 4) The probe moves at the specified speed F in the range ”b + g” until it touches the measurement face (the second measurement session). 5) The probe returns through the distance e at the rapid traverse rate. 6) The probe makes the same measurement as stated above
  • Page 147411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 3) The probe moves at the speed fa in the positive X–axis direction to a point the distance ”D/2 – a – stylus ball radius” away from the measurement start point. 4) The probe moves at the speed f in the range ”D/2 + g – stylus ball radius” until it touches the meas
  • Page 1475B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Caution NOTE 1 Using this function requires the following options: S Embedded macro S Custom macro B 2 This function consists of 30 programs. 3 This function uses common variables #200 to #290. 4 This function uses program Nos. 9170 to 9199. 5 This function uses G
  • Page 147611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 3101 SETTING DATA ERROR. Address A or the data that should follow ADD. A it has not been entered. Alternatively, the entered data is incorrect. 3102 SETTING DATA ERROR. Address B or the data that should follow ADD. B it
  • Page 1477B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Number Message Description 3121 SETTING DATA ERROR. Address U or the data that should follow ADD. U it has not been entered. Alternatively, the entered data is incorrect. 3122 SETTING DATA ERROR. Address V or the data that should follow ADD. V it has not been enter
  • Page 147811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Number Message Description 3140 ERROR: ESCAPE The return value to be used after the OFFSET probe touches the measurement face in the second measurement session (#215) has not been entered. 3141 CHECK SENSOR Check the sensor signal. SIGNAL 3142 NO TOUCH The probe is
  • Page 1479B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.7 CANNED CYCLE (M SERIES)/CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING (T SERIES) General Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs. With a canned cycle, a frequently–used machining operation can be specified in a single block with a G function; without ca
  • Page 148011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 SPINDLE CONTROL In some canned cycles, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse direction may be output. The following canned cycles require spindle control: M series T series Reverse tapping cycle G74 Face tapping cycle (G84) Fine boring cycle G76 Side t
  • Page 1481B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D G74 (Counter tapping cycle) X, Y Z Z Z Dwell Dwell (Note) (Note) Note) It is possible to not output M05 M03 M05 M04 M05 code by using parame- ter M5T (No. 5101#6). MF MF MF MF Next block (G98 mode) FIN FIN FIN FIN Next block (G99 mode) D G76 (Fine boring cycle) X
  • Page 148211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D G86 (Boring cycle) X, Y Return to initial level in G98 mode Z Z M05 M03 M03 MF MF MF FIN FIN FIN Next block (G98 mode) D G87 (Back boring cycle) Next block (G99 mode) X or Y X or Y X, Y X or Y Z Z Z Dwell (Note 2) (Note 2) M05 M19 M03 M05 M19 M03 MF MF MF MF MF M
  • Page 1483B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D G84 (Face tapping cycle) G88 (Side tapping cycle) X, C (Z, C) Z (X) Z (X) Z Z (X) Dwell Dwell (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 2) M05 M04 M05 M03 MF MF MF MF Next block (G98 mode) (Note 1) When parameter M5T FIN FIN FIN FIN (No. 5101#6)=0, M05 is not output. Next
  • Page 148411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Tapping signal TAP [Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode. [Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when: – The system is in tapping cycle mode. G74, G84: M series G84, G88: T series – The system is in
  • Page 1485B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND RD2, RD1 Set the axis and direction in which the tool in drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is got free. RD2 and RD1 are set as shown below by plane selection. RD2 RD1 G17 G18 G19 0 0 +X +Z +Y 0 1 –X –Z –Y 1 0 +Y +X +Z 1 1 –Y –X –Z M5T When a spindle rotates from the
  • Page 148611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 5110 C–axis clamp M code in drilling canned cycle [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 99 This parameter sets the C–axis clamp M code in a drilling canned cycle. 5111 Dwell time when C–axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle [Data type] Word [Unit
  • Page 1487B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 5114 Return or clearance value of drilling canned cycle G83 Return value of high–speed peck drilling cycle G73 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid data rang
  • Page 148811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 5115 Clearance canned cycle G83 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 G83 for M series q : Depth of cut d : Clearance value R point q d
  • Page 1489B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.1 Canned cycle 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.3 Canned cycle for hole machining (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.1 Canned cycle 21i/210i/2
  • Page 149011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.8 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION (M SERIES) General Upon completion of positioning in each block in the program, an external operation function signal can be output to allow the machine to perform specific operation. G81 IP_ ; (The IP_ is axis move command ) Every tim
  • Page 1491B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Signal External Operation Signal EF [Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports that the positioning of G81 has been completed in the external motion function, and that a special external operation is required. [Output condition] For details of the ou
  • Page 149211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.9 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) General The option canned cycles makes CNC programming easy. For instance, the data of the finish work shape describes the tool path for rough machining. And also, a canned cycles for the thre
  • Page 1493B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Signal Chamfering signal CDZ [Classification] Input signal [Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle. Specify the chamfering distance in parameter No. 5130. [Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed in the threading cycle
  • Page 149411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) is started, a check to see if the program contains a block that has the sequence number specified in address Q is: 0 : Not made. 1 : Made. (If the sequence number specified in address Q cannot be found, an
  • Page 1495B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G73 5135 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in X–axis direction 5136 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in Z–axis direction [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Met
  • Page 149611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 5140 Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Metric input 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid dat
  • Page 1497B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Alarm and message Number Message Description 061 ADDRESS P/Q NOT Address P or Q is not specified in G70, FOUND IN G70–G73 G71, G72, or G73 command. Modify the program. 062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1 The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is zero or G71–G76 negative value. 2 The
  • Page 149811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Cautions for multiple 1 Necessary parameters (such as P, Q, X, Z, U, W, and R) must be set repetitive canned cycle correctly for an individual block that specifies a multiple repetitive (G70 to G76) canned cycle. 2 In G71, G72, and G73 blocks having a sequence numb
  • Page 1499B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.1 Canned cycle 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) II.13.2 Multiple repetitive canned cycle 160is/180is Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.1 Canned cycle 21i/210i/210is (For Lathe) (B–63604EN) II.13.2 Multiple repeti
  • Page 150011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.10 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRETS (T SERIES) General Mirror image can be applied to the X–axis with G code. G68 : Start double turret mirror image G69 : Mirror image cancel When G68 is active, the coordinate system is shifted to the other turret, and the X–axis
  • Page 1501B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Parameter D Distance between two turrets 1290 Distance between two turrets for mirror image [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to
  • Page 150211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.11 INDEX TABLE INDEXING FUNCTION (M SERIES) General Indexing the table on a machining center is a complished by specifying a positioning angle. Before and after indexing, the table is automatically unclamped or clamped . Basic Procedure The control axis that ind
  • Page 1503B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND (9) On the PMC side, when BCLP changes to “0”, *BECLP is set to “1”. This completes the sequence. The time charts for these operations are shown in the figures below. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) B command (independent) Bbbbb B axis servo on for position con
  • Page 150411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 The figure below shows the timing chart for type–A manual reference position return of the B axis. B axis manual feed selection signal +Jb*1 B axis position control servo ON B axis unclamp signal BUCLP B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP B
  • Page 1505B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Signal B axis clamp signal BCLP [Classification] Output signal [Function] Instructs the PMC side to clamp the B axis mechanically with a clutch or shot pin. [Output condition] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic p
  • Page 150611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G038 *BECLP *BEUCP #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F061 BCLP BUCLP Parameter D Setting linear or rotation axis #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ROSx ROTx [Data type] Bit axis ROTx, ROSx Define linear or rotation axis ROSx ROTx Description
  • Page 1507B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Setting for positioning the index table #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5500 IDX SIM G90 INC ABS REL DDP [Data type] Bit DDP Definition of index values 0 : Conventional method (Example IS–B: B1; = 0.001 deg) 1 : Calculator method (Example IS–B: B1; = 1.000 deg) REL Relat
  • Page 150811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Negative direction rotation command M code 5511 Negative direction rotation command M code [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 255 0 : No M code is defined to set the index table rotation to the negative direction. The rotation direction is specified using a
  • Page 1509B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Caution CAUTION 1 The secondary auxiliary function can be used, but its address must be different from that of the indexing axis. 2 If the incremental command is used for indexing of the index table, the workpiece zero point offset value on the index table axis mus
  • Page 151011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Reference Item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.11 Index table indexing function 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.13.5 Index table indexing function 21i/210i/210is (For Machining Center) (B–63614EN) 1484
  • Page 1511B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.12 SCALING (M SERIES) General A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling). The dimensions specified with X_, Y_, and Z_ can each be magnified or reduced with the same or different rates of magnification. The magnification rate can be specified in t
  • Page 151211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Scaling of each axis, Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negative programmable mirror magnification is specified, a mirror image is applied. First of all, set a image (negative parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) which validates each axis sca
  • Page 1513B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Parameter D Setting valid/invalid and magnification of scaling #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5400 SCR XSC [Data type] Bit XSC Axis scaling and programmable mirror image 0 : Not active (The scaling magnification is specified by P.) 1 : Active SCR Scaling magnification uni
  • Page 151411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 D Scaling magnification for every axis 5421 Scaling magnification for every axis [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No. 5400) [Valid data range] *999999X*1, 1X999999 This parameter sets the scaling m
  • Page 1515B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.13 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION General A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it is possible to modify a program using a rotation command. This is useful when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from the programmed position on t
  • Page 151611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Rotation plane G17 Y Center of Angle of rotation rotation R (α,β) X 0 Fig. 11.13 (b) Coordinate system rotation Parameter D Angle specification method of coordinate system rotation #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5400 RIN [Data type] Bit RIN Coordinate rotation angle comma
  • Page 1517B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Alarm and message Number Message Description 144 ILLEGAL PLANE SE- The coordinate rotation plane and arc LECTED or cutter compensation C plane must be the same. Modify the program. 5302 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN A command to set the coordinate sys- G68 MODE tem is specifi
  • Page 151811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.14 THREE–DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION General The coordinate system can be rotated about an axis by specifying the center of rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular displacement. This coordinate conversion function is quite useful for three
  • Page 1519B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Parameter D Setting relative position and absolute position #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3104 DAC DAL DRC DRL [Data type] Bit DRL Relative position 0 : The actual position displayed includes tool length offset value (M series)/tool offset value (T series). 1 : The progr
  • Page 152011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 047 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT For startup of three–dimensional tool compensation or three–dimensional coordinate conversion, two or more axes were specified in the same direc- tion (basic and parallel axes.) 048 BASIC 3 AXIS N
  • Page 1521B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.15 RETRACE (M SERIES) General A tool can retrace the tool path along which the tool has moved. In addition, a tool can move forward again along the path that the tool has retraced. The tool can then resume machining according to the program when it returns to th
  • Page 152211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Retrace signal RVS [Classification] Input signal [Function] Directs the control unit to retrace the tool along the path which the tool was moved in automatic operation (memory command, tape command, manual data input). [Operation] When RVS turns to
  • Page 1523B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Position to which auxiliary function is output during retracing Retrace start (Retrace signal RVS is “1”) Block in which the move command and auxiliary function are included Retrace end Position to which auxiliary function Re–forwarding start is output during forwa
  • Page 152411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Warning WARNING Positioning (G00) If non–linear–interpolation positioning is executed (the LRP bit (bit 1 of parameter No. 1401) is set to 0), the retrace tool path will not agree with the forward tool path. The re–forward tool path agrees with the forward tool pat
  • Page 1525B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.16 MACRO COMPILER/ EXECUTER General The macro executor function converts custom macros created by machine tool builders to executable programs, registers them in the flash ROM module, and executes them to solve problems as described below. NC programs are divide
  • Page 152611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.17 SMALL HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (M SERIES) General In peck drilling, the tool enters and retracts from hole based on an overload torque detection signal (skip signal) until the designed hole depth is reached. The spindle speed and cutting feedrate are changed
  • Page 1527B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Changing of cutting The cutting feedrate programmed with the F word is changed during the feedrate second and subsequent cutting operations. Parameter Nos. 5166 and 5167 specify the ratio of change for the case in which a skip signal was received during the previ
  • Page 152811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE This signal is used also as a skip signal. (See Section 14.3.) Small–diameter peck drilling in progress signal PECK2 [Classification] Output signal [Function] Indicates whether small–diameter peck drilling is in progress. [Output condition] This signal
  • Page 1529B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 5164 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted after an overload torque signal is received [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed change caused by the over
  • Page 153011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 5167 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted without an overload torque signal received [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate change during a peck
  • Page 1531B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 5172 Speed of retraction to point R when no I address is defined [Data type] Word [Unit of data] mm/min [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 This parameter sets the speed of retraction to point R when no I address is defined. 5173 Speed advancing to the bottom of a hole wh
  • Page 153211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Warning WARNING Forwarding or retracting is not performed by rapid traverse positioning. Instead, it is performed with the same interpolation as for cutting feed. This means exponential acceleration/deceleration is performed. However, the tool life management funct
  • Page 1533B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.18 HIGH–SPEED CYCLE MACHINING RETRACTING General Retract can occur during high–speed machining by setting the high–speed cycle machining retract signal HSRT to 1. Additionally, a retract path and speed must be defined for each axis. Retracting To use retracting
  • Page 153411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 [Example] (1) Parameter No. 7515 setting < remaining distance for the current cycle A number of pulses for retracting based on the parameter–specified distance are superimposed on a usual operation. When the operation ends, the CNC shifts to an automatic operation
  • Page 1535B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND (2) Parameter No. 7515 setting y remaining distribution count for the current cycle A number of pulses for retracting until the end of the current cycle are superimposed on a usual operation. When retracting ends, the CNC shifts to an automatic operation pause or r
  • Page 153611. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 A retract cycle is created using the same methods (including the cycle connection, cycle repetition count, and data specification methods) as for ordinary cycles. The retracting signal HSRA remains 1 during retracting. (Example) Machining cycle data First
  • Page 1537B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND NOTE When the high–speed cycle machining retract function is used, up to five axes can be controlled for high–speed cycle machining. Header configuration when retracting is enabled #20001/20017/20033.. Cycle repetition count (#200001/200017/200033..) #20002/20018/2
  • Page 153811. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Signal High–speed cycle machining retract signal HSRT [Classification] Input signal [Function] Starts high–speed cycle machining retracting. [Operation] When this signal becomes 1, the control unit behaves as follows: D If high–speed cycle machining is unde
  • Page 1539B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 7515 Retracting distribution count for high–speed cycle machining retracting [Data type] Two–word This parameter specifies a retracting distance for high–speed cycle machining. If the machining cycle ends before the specified is reached, retracting ends immediately
  • Page 154011. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 11.19 HIGH–SPEED CYCLE MACHINING SKIP FUNCTION General This function cancels a repetition cycle operation in high–speed cycle machining and causes a skip to the header information connected next. Skip signals (HCSKP1 to HCSKP4) sent from a size measuring device (se
  • Page 1541B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND A repetition cycle is canceled, and a skip to the header operation cycle connected next is made. A skip is not performed at a midway point of a cycle operation. Example G05P10001L3; Cycle 1 Connection information 2 Number of repetitions 1 Cycle 2 Connection informa
  • Page 154211. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Relationships between the header configuration and P code vari- able numbers when skip operation is enabled #20001/20017/20033.. Cycle repetition count (#200001/200017/200033..) #20002/20018/20034.. Cycle connection information (#200002/200018/200034..) #20003/2001
  • Page 1543B–63523EN–1/03 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Support of learning This function supports learning control. Up to five learning data areas are control provided. When the cycle operation is changed by a skip signal, the learning data area is also changed. Skip operation Normal high– speed cycle Skip 1 machining
  • Page 154411. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G065 HCSKP4 HCSKP3 HCSKP2 HCSKP1 Caution CAUTION 1 Skip operation cannot be performed during emergent return operation of a high–speed cycle. 2 For skip operation, the maximum number of axes for high–speed cycle machining is f
  • Page 1545B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 1519
  • Page 154612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1 DISPLAY/SET 12.1.1 Clock Function General Time is displayed in the hour/minute/second format on each display screen. Some screens allows display of the year, month, and day. The custom macro system variable can be used to read the time. Time information can b
  • Page 1547B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.2 Displaying Operation History General This function displays a history of the key stroke and signal operations, performed by the CNC operator, when a failure or CNC alarm occurs. The following history data is recorded: (1) MDI key operation sequences Example
  • Page 154812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 The following table lists parameter values for respective signal types. Table 12.1.2(b) Signal types and corresponding parameter values Signal type Parameter value Not selected 0 G0000 to G0255 1 G1000 to G1255 2 F0000 to F0255 3 F1000 to F1255 4 Y0000 to Y0127 5
  • Page 1549B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Example:To select the automatic operation start signal (G7.2) as operation history target No. 2, set up the related parameters as listed below: No.12802=1 No.12842=7 No.12882=00000100 If parameter No. 12802 is 1, parameter Nos. 12842 and 12882 are initialized to 0
  • Page 155012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 3122 Time interval used to record data in the operation history [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Minutes [Valid data range] 0 to 1439 Time data is recorded in the operation history at set intervals. When 0 is specified in this parameter, 10 minutes is assumed as th
  • Page 1551B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Signal type Parameter value X0000 to X0127 6 Y1000 to Y1063 7 X1000 to X1063 8 G2000 to G2255 9 F2000 to F2255 10 To deselect a signal type, reset the related parameter to 0 (the address and bit combined with the parameter that is reset are reset simultaneously wi
  • Page 155212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE 1 While the operation history screen is displayed, history data is not recorded. 2 When the duration of the on/off state of an input signal is 16 msec or shorter, that state is not recorded in the history. In addition, some signals are not recorded. 3 Ap
  • Page 1553B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.13 HELP FUNCTION 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.13 HELP FUNCTION (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.13 HELP FUNCTION 21i/210i/210is (For Machinin
  • Page 155412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.5 Servo Tuning Screen General On the servo tuning screen, parameters for each axis are listed for the basic adjustment of the servo motor. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 SVS [Data type] Bit SVS Servo tuning screen 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed Refer
  • Page 1555B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.7 Waveform Diagnosis Display General Waveform diagnosis is classified into two main types. (1) One–shot type One–shot waveform diagnosis provides graphs of waveforms. In one–shot waveform diagnosis, the start of data collection can be triggered by the rising
  • Page 155612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 3120 Time from the output of an alarm to the termination of sampling [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 1 to 32760 When the waveform diagnosis function is used, this parameter sets the time form the output of a servo alarm until data collection.
  • Page 1557B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.8 Self–diagnosis General To determine the cause of an alarm, check the following. First, it has to be determined if the breakdown is in the CNC, the PMC or the machine. The CNC checks the following. 1) Abnormality of detection system 2) Abnormality of positio
  • Page 155812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.9 Display of Hardware and Software Configuration General The required hardware/software configuration for the CNC can be displayed on the screen. The system configuration screen displays the following information: (1) Printed circuit board configuration a. Th
  • Page 1559B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.10 Position Display Neglect General Disabling the current position display is accomplished by setting bit 0 (NDPx) of parameter No. 3115. Bit 1 (NDAx) of parameter No. 3115 enables the display of positions in the machine coordinate system. Signal Position Dis
  • Page 156012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3115 NDAx NDPx [Data type] Bit axis NDPx Display of the current position for each axis 0 : The current position is displayed. 1 : The current position is not displayed. NDAx Position display using absolute coordinates and relative
  • Page 1561B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Signal Target part count reached signal PRTSF [Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports to the PMC that the specified number of parts have been machined. [Output condition] The PRTSF signal is set to 1 when: @ Machining of the specified number of p
  • Page 156212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6700 PCM [Data type] Bit PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of completed parts 0 : M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 1 : Use only the M code specified by parameter No.
  • Page 1563B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT NOTE When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1, the number of parts is not counted with M02 and M30. 6713 Number of required parts This parameter can be entered on the setting screen. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] One piece [Valid data range] 0 to 9999
  • Page 156412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 6753 Accumulated cutting time This parameter can be entered on the setting screen. [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] One ms [Valid data range] 0 to 60000 6754 Accumulated cutting time This parameter can be entered on the setting screen. [Data type] Two–word [Uni
  • Page 1565B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 6757 Operation time (accumulated automatic operation time) This parameter can be entered on the setting screen. [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] One ms [Valid data range] 0 to 60000 6758 Operation time (accumulated automatic operation time) This parameter can b
  • Page 156612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.12 Graphic Display/ Dynamic Graphic Display/Background Graphic General Graphic Display It is possible to draw the programmed tool path on the screen, and check the progress of machining. In addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the drawing. The draw
  • Page 1567B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT HEAD1 O0001 N00021 HEAD2 O0020 N00020 X1 X1 200.000 X2 X2 220.000 Z1 200.000 Z2 160.000 Z1 Z2 62.5 62.5 MEM STRT *** FIN 08 : 24 : 56 HEAD1 G.PRM GRAPH ZOOM (OPRT) T series (Two–path control) Dynamic graphic display There are two functions of Dynamic Graphics. (M
  • Page 156812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 SOLID GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) O1126 N01126 ÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÄÄ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÄÄ Z ÄÄ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÄÄ Y X A.ST F.ST STOP REWIND Part Machined Background graphic The background graphic function allows a programmed tool path to be (M series) drawn on the screen while machi
  • Page 1569B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3003 MVG [Data type] Bit MVG While drawing using the dynamic graphics function (with no machine movement), the axis–in–movement signal is: 0 : Output 1 : Not output #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3109 BGO BGO Response to pressing the
  • Page 157012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 DPO Current position on the workpiece drawing or tool path drawing screen 0 : Is not displayed 1 : Displayed When the background graphic function is used, modal information items F, S, T, and current position are displayed. When the [POS] soft key is selected in d
  • Page 1571B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 6509 Coordinate system for drawing a single spindle (2–path control) Z X1 X2 Z Z X2 X1 X2 X1 GRPAX=0, 10 GRPAX=1, 11 GRPAX=2, 12 Z X1 X2 X2 X1 Z Z X2 X1 GRPAX=3, 13 GRPAX=4, 14 GRPAX=5, 15 Z X1 Z X2 X1 X2 GRPAX=6, 16 GRPAX=7, 17 [Data type] Byte [Valid data range]
  • Page 157212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 6510 Drawing coordinate system [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 7 This parameter specifies the drawing coordinate system for the graphic function. The following show the relationship between the parameter values and the drawing coordinate systems. Set valu
  • Page 1573B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 6511 Right margin in solid drawing 6512 Left margin in solid drawing 6513 Upper margin in solid drawing 6514 Lower margin in solid drawing [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Dot These parameters set the drawing margins in pixels on the screen. The unit is a dot. Stan
  • Page 157412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8100 NWP RST [Data type] Bit type RST When the reset key on the MDI panel is pressed: 0 : The reset effects both paths. The reset is effective for both the machining and the background graphics (M series). 1 : The reset key is effective onl
  • Page 1575B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.13 Displaying Operating Monitor General The load meter can be displayed for each servo axis and the serial spindle. D Display of the servo axes The load meter can be displayed for up to three servo axes by setting parameters 3151 to 3153. D Display of the spi
  • Page 157612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 2086 Rated current parameter (RTCURR) [Data type] Word axis 4127 Load meter displayed value for maximum output [Data type] Word axis Note NOTE The load meter display depends on servo parameter 2086 and spindle parameter 4127. These parameters are set automatically
  • Page 1577B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.14 Stamping the Machining Time General The execution time of a program is displayed on the program machine time display screen. The machine time can be displayed, in hours, minutes, and seconds format, for up to 10 main programs. The time between the first st
  • Page 157812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Note NOTE When M02 does not reset the control unit, and completion signal FIN is sent to rewind and execute the program from the beginning (when bit 5 (M02) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 0), machine time is terminated by the completion signal FIN. Reference item
  • Page 1579B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Signal Group Function Output signal Related input signal 1 Mode selection MD1O MD1 MD2O MD2 MD4O MD4 ZRNO ZRN 2 Jog feed axis select +J10 – +J40 +J1 – +J4 –J10 – –J40 –J1 – –J4 Manual rapid tra- RTO RT verse 3 Ha
  • Page 158012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0 F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O F074 F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO F076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O F07
  • Page 1581B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT OP7 Feed hold on software operator’s panel 0 : Not operational 1 : Operational 7210 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel “↑” 7211 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel “↓” 7212 Jog–movement axis and its direct
  • Page 158212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Example Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes in the direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given below. [8°] to the positive direction of the Z axis, [2±] to the negative direction of the Z axis, [6³] t
  • Page 1583B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Parameter No. 7223: Sets the character code (078) corresponding to N of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No. 7224: Sets the character code (065) corresponding to A of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No. 7225: Sets the character code (076) corresponding to L of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No. 7226
  • Page 158412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Character to Code Correspondence Table Char Com- Char Char Com- Char Code Code Comment Code Code Comment acter ment acter acter ment acter A 065 6 054 177 209 B 066 7 055 178 210 C 067 8 056 179 211 D 068 9 057 180 212 E 069 032 Space 181 213 F 070 ! 033 Exclamati
  • Page 1585B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Note NOTE 1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft switches. When the mode for DNC operation is to be required, then, all control switches for mode selection should be on the machine operator’s panel or a general–purpose soft switch should be used to s
  • Page 158612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 4 The following table lists the jog feedrate override values which can be selected by soft switches. *JV00 – *JV150 (*JV0 – *JV150) 15 12 8 4 0 Override ± ± ± ± ± values (%) bit 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.1 2 1 1 1
  • Page 1587B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT NOTE 5 The following table lists the feedrate override values which can be selected by soft switches. *FV0O – *FV7O (*FV0 – *FV7) Override 7 4 0 values (%) ± ± ± 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 10 2 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 20 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 30 4 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 4
  • Page 158812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.10 Displaying and Setting the 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) Software Operator’s Panel 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.4.13 Displaying and Setting the (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Software Ope
  • Page 1589B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.16 Multi–language Display General The language displayed on the screen is set by a parameter. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SPN HNG ITA CHI FRN GRM JPN 3102 DTH SPN HNG ITA CHI FRAN GRM JPN #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3119 POR NOTE When this parameter has bee
  • Page 159012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.17 Remote Diagnosis General With the remote diagnosis function, a commercial PC can be connected, as a service terminal, to the CNC via an RS–232–C interface or a telephone line and used to monitor the status of the CNC and to change data in it by means of me
  • Page 1591B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT c. CNC ³ computer (1) Alarm information (2) Machine position (3) Absolute position (4) Skip position (5) Servo delay (6) Acceleration/deceleration delay (7) Diagnosis (8) Parameter (9) Tool life management data (10) Display screen status (11) Modal information (12
  • Page 159212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.18 External Operator Message Logging and Display General Parameter setting enables one external operator message (consisting of up 255 characters) or, simultaneously, up to 4 external operator message (consisting of up to 63 characters) to be displayed. Exter
  • Page 1593B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3207 OM4 [Data type] Bit OM4 A message displayed on the external operator message screen can have: 0 : Up to 256 characters, and just a single message can be displayed. 1 : Up to 64 characters, and up to four messages can be displayed. Refe
  • Page 159412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.19 Erase Screen Display/Automatic Erase Screen Display General Displaying the same characters in the same positions on the screen causes a LCD to degrade relatively quickly. To help prevent this, the screen can be cleared by pressing specific keys. It is also
  • Page 1595B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT D Automatic erase screen Automatic erase screen display cancel signal *CRTOF (G062#1) is valid display cancel signal only for path 1. This signal is invalid for the signals of path 2 (G1062#1) and those of the loader (G062#1). D Clearing the screen If parameter No
  • Page 159612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter 3123 Screen display timeout [Data type] Bytes [Unit of data] Minutes [Valid data range] 1 to 255 This parameter specifies the period that must elapse before erase screen display is applied. If 0 is set, the screen is not cleared. Limitation For the Serie
  • Page 1597B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.20 Touch Panel General A touch panel can be used on the LCD display, as follows: (1) The soft keys (F0 to F9, FR, and FL) in the lower section on the 10.4–inch color LCD/MDI panel are changed to those for the touch panel. (2) Touch panel operation substitutes
  • Page 159812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 (3) Positional precision A positional precision of "2.5 mm can be maintained by performing 9–point compensation as described later. Software key control When a rectangular soft key button on the screen is pressed, the soft key button display is indented. This type
  • Page 1599B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 4 Press the [TP CAL] soft key. The following touch panel calibration screen appears. CALIBRATION OF TOUCH PANEL PLEASE PUSH CALIBRATED POINTS (+ OF 9 POINTS). IF CALIBRATION IS ENDED, PLEASE PUSH KEY. IF CALIBRATION IS CANCELED, PLEASE PUSH KEY. IF O
  • Page 160012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled. As described in “Hardware connection,” the touch panel is connected to the RS–232–C serial port 2 (JD36B) on the CNC motherboard. When the touch panel is used, serial port 2 (JD36B) is set up for touch panel operation, regardless of an I
  • Page 1601B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.21 External Touch Panel Interface General Support of the external touch panel interface allows an SNP–X protocol compliant external touch panel to be connected to the FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i (referred to just as the CNC hereinafter). External touch panels ar
  • Page 160212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 ETP CNC SIO (25–pin) JD36B (20–pin) Shield 03 11 RD SD 02 01 SD RD 04 15 RS RS 05 05 CS CS !07 08 SG SG 03 DR 07 CD 13 ER Shield processing must be done with the cable attachment. D Power–on sequence Turn the power to the external touch panel on before the CNC pow
  • Page 1603B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT D Protocol The CNC uses SNP–X protocol direct commands only. So, as the protocol on the external touch panel (ETP) side, also use SNP–X protocol direct commands only. The processing in response to a request for writing 3–byte or longer data is the same as the proc
  • Page 160412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.22 Periodic Maintenance Screen General The periodic maintenance screen shows the current statuses of those items that require periodic replacement (backup battery, LCD backlight, touch panel, etc.). An item whose service life has expired is indicated by the m
  • Page 1605B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT (1) Maintenance item names The names of maintenance items are set up here. They can be registered using either the corresponding menu or MDI keys. 1) Menu–based setup 1 To display the setting menu, place the cursor on the desired item, and press the [ENTRY] soft k
  • Page 160612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE For the CNC edit function, specific strings of two or more characters are registered as reserved words of custom macro commands. (Example: GO for GOTO, WH for WHILE, and SI for SIN) Therefore, when a program to register item names is created in the above form
  • Page 1607B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT NOTE 1 The asterisk (*) is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in the item name. Likewise, square brackets “[” and “]” and parentheses “(” and “)” must be excluded from the item name. EOB “;” must be executed from the item name. 2 If a null item is select
  • Page 160812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 [CNC maintenance screen] PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE O0001 N12345 (NC) ITEM NAME 01 BATTERY FOR CONTROLLER 02 BATTERY FOR PULSECODER 03 FAN MOTOR 04 LCD BACK LIGHT 05 06 07 08 09 10 >_ EDIT *** ***** *** **** 19:27:05 [ ][ STATUS ][ MACHIN ][ NC ][ (OPRT) ] [ SELECT ][
  • Page 1609B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT (2) Remaining lifetime The remaining lifetime of an item is the time allowed before it must be replaced. It is displayed in a count–down format. When the remaining lifetime becomes less than the percentage specified in parameter No. 8911 of the corresponding servi
  • Page 161012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 (1) Service life To specify the service life, key in the corresponding data and press [INPUT] soft key or INPUT MDI key. The same data is set up as both the service life and remaining lifetime. In addition, the count type is indicated as: “––––––” Pressing the [+I
  • Page 1611B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT (3) Count type Pressing the [TYPE] causes the following count types to be displayed as soft keys. Select the desired one and press the [EXEC] soft key to set it up. Software Meaning Display [EFFECT] No counting takes place (the counter is halted). ––– [ALL–AX] Cou
  • Page 161212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 f Menu screen (machine maintenance only) Format G10 L61 P01 [n] ; G10 L61 P02 [n] ; G10 L61 P03 [n] ; : a : Service life r : Remaining lifetime n : Item name [Alphanumeric character] q : Count type 0 = No counting. 1 = Nonstop counting. 2 = Counting continues as l
  • Page 1613B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Parameter 8911 Lifetime versas service life parcentage [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 1% [Valid data range] 0 to 100 On the periodic maintenance screen, the remaining lifetime display turns red for warning purposes, if the remaining lifetime goes below a specifie
  • Page 161412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.23 Fine Torque Sensing General This function is a monitor function for providing detailed disturbance load torque data. The CNC stores disturbance load torque data detected by servo and spindle motors in internal memory. The following operations are possible
  • Page 1615B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT NOTE 1 When the sample data store function is enabled (bit 2 of parameter No. 6350 is set to 1), the period during which data can be stored is halved. 2 When the above period is exceeded, no more data is stored even if the torque sensing command signal is 1. 3 Onc
  • Page 161612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Displayed items (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (l) (m) (k) (i) (j) All–axes display Single–axis display (a) Whether the displayed data is the current data or sample data is indicated (only in all–axes display mode). (b) The axis number and name of the target axis are
  • Page 1617B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT (m) When the current torque data is indicated, the total time from the start of store operation until the end of store operation is indicated. (When store operation is currently continued, the total time until the current time is indicated). When the sample data s
  • Page 161812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 D Saving data to the You can save data to the memory card and load data from the memory memory card and card. Press the [(OPRT)] then [TRNSFR] soft keys. To save data, press loading data from the [SAVE] then [EXEC]. Data is saved under the file name memory card ”F
  • Page 1619B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT (8) Confirmation [] [ EXEC ] [ STOP ] [ ] [ ][ CANCEL ] [] ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ (1), (6) (1), (6) (9) Confirmation [] [ EXEC ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ CANCEL ] [] ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ (1), (6) (1), (6) D Fine torque sensing Parameters related to the fine torque sensing function can be set on the
  • Page 162012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Torque sensing command signal FTCMD [Classification] Input signal [Function] Stores disturbance load torque data in CNC memory. [Operation] While the torque sensing command signal is 1, the CNC stores disturbance load torque data in memory. Changin
  • Page 1621B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6350 FTA FTM TQ2 TQ1 [Data type] Bit TQ1, TQ2 The store interval for the fine torque sensing function is set. TQ1 TQ2 Store interval 0 0 8ms 0 1 16ms 1 0 32ms 1 1 Invalid (P/S5199) FTM The function of saving stored disturbance loa
  • Page 162212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE If the number of target axes is N, use target axes 1 to N. If 0 is set for target axis M, the target axis (M + 1) and subsequent target axes are ignored. [Example] Parameter Setting Target axis 1 1 Target axis 2 2 Target axis 3 0 Target axis 4 3 When the para
  • Page 1623B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Window function With the window function, stored torque data and statistical calculation results can be referenced from the PMC. Referencing the store The number of stored torque data items is referenced. counter D Input data +0 (Function code) 232 2 (Completion c
  • Page 162412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Referencing stored Among stored torque data, the most recently stored data is referenced. torque data (reading D Input data most recent data) +0 (Function code) 232 2 (Completion code) – 4 (Data length) – 6 (Data number) N: Target axis number of an axis of N which
  • Page 1625B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT D Output data +0 (Function code) 232 2 (Completion code) C = 0: Read terminates normally. C = 3: Illegal data number = 4: Illegal data attribute 4 (Data length) L = 0 or 2 L 6 (Data number) N 8 (Data attribute) M 10 (Data area) Most recently stored data NOTE 1 If
  • Page 162612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Referencing stored Among stored torque data, arbitrary data is referenced. torque data (reading D Input data arbitrary data) +0 (Function code) 232 2 (Completion code) – 4 (Data length) 6 6 (Data number) N: Target axis number of an axis of N which data is to be re
  • Page 1627B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT D Output data +0 (Function code) 232 2 (Completion code) C = 0: Read terminates normally. C = 2: Illegal data length = 3: Illegal data number = 4: Illegal data attribute = 5: Illegal data area 4 (Data length) L = 6 + (data length l)*2 L 6 (Data number) N 8 (Data a
  • Page 162812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 If data number n is within the valid range, but it is beyond the number of data items actually stored, no data is output, and read operation terminates with the number of data items l set to 0. Example: When the data number n is within the number of actuall
  • Page 1629B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Referencing statistical D Input data calculation results +0 (Function code) 226 2 (Completion code) – 4 (Data length) – 6 (Data number) N = –1 : Read for all axes N = 1 to 4 : Read for an axis (specified with a target axis number) 8 (Data attribute) – 10 (Data are
  • Page 163012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 (Read for an axis) +0 (Function code) 226 2 (Completion code) C = 0: Read operation terminates normally. C = 3: Illegal data number 4 (Data length) 4 6 (Data number) N 8 (Data attribute) – 10 Average for specified axis 12 Maximum for specified value 14 Distributio
  • Page 1631B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.24 Actual Speed Display General The actual speed is displayed on the current position display screen, program check screen, and program screen (MDI mode). PMC controlled axis movement data can be added to the actual speed display. Reflection of movement along
  • Page 163212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.25 Parameter Set Supporting Screen General The parameter set supporting screen is a parameter setting and tuning screen intended to help: D Readily start up the machine by collecting and displaying the minimum required parameters for machine launching. D Smoo
  • Page 1633B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Display item overview The items displayed on the parameter set supporting screen are outlined below. [START UP] [START UP] lets you specify the minimum required parameters for machine launching. AXIS SETTING: The axis, coordinate, feedrate, and acceleration/ decel
  • Page 163412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 A brief help message corresponding to a parameter selected with the cursor is displayed. If a standard value (recommended by FANUC) is available for the parameter, it is also displayed. Entering parameters Make sure that the setting screen is ”parameter write enab
  • Page 1635B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Setting initial values Standard values can be specified for parameters, using soft keys. There are two methods. The first method is to specify a standard value only for the parameter selected with the cursor. The second method is to specify standard values for all
  • Page 163612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 TUNING TUNING lets you display the servo, spindle, and machining parameter tuning screens readily, so you can make adjustments easily. On the parameter tuning screen menu, place the cursor on the desired tuning screen item and press the [SELECT] soft key to displa
  • Page 1637B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Appendix Parameters required for machine launching Menu Parameter Group Brief description item No. AXIS BASIC 1001#0 Linear–axis least command increment SETTING 0: Millimeter machines 1: Inch machines 1002#1 Reference position return without dogs 0: Disable 1: Ena
  • Page 163812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Menu Parameter Group Brief description item No. AXIS BASIC 1815#1 Whether to use a separate pulse coder: SETTING 0: Not to use 1: To use 1815#4 Whether the machine position has been associated with the position of the absolute position detector: 0: Associated 1: N
  • Page 1639B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Menu Parameter Group Brief description item No. AXIS ACCEL- 1610#0 The cutting feed acceleration/decel- SETTING ERATION/ eration used is: DECEL- 0: Exponential type acceleration/de- ERATION celeration 1: Post–interpolation linear–type ac- celeration/deceleration 1
  • Page 164012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.26 Machining Condition Selecting General This function automatically specifies machining conditions when you simply select a precision level that matches your machining purposes when machining. The machining conditions are obtained based on the selected preci
  • Page 1641B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Machining parameter On this screen, the velocity–first parameter set (precision level 1) and tuning screen precision–first parameter set (precision level 10) can be set up. The screen is displayed by pressing: function key → [>] soft key (several times) →
  • Page 164212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Pressing the [INIT] soft key and then the [EXEC] soft key initializes a cursor–selected item with a standard parameter. Pressing the [G_INIT] soft key and then the [EXEC] soft key initializes all items of a cursor–selected parameter set (velocity–first or precisio
  • Page 1643B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT This screen is displayed by pressing: function key → [>] soft key (several times) → [PR_LEV]. The specified precision level value is not cleared by turning off the power (instead, it is saved to parameter No. 13634). The precision level is initial
  • Page 164412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 The machine condition select function requires any of the APC, AI–APC, and AI contour control functions. 2 Using the bell–shaped acceleration change time for AI contour control requires the ”pre–read pre–interpolation bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration”
  • Page 1645B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Setting item D Pre–interpolation This item is used to set up a linear–portion acceleration for acceleration/deceleration pre–interpolation acceleration/deceleration (in mm/s2). rate Setting range: 50.000 to 99999.999 (mm/s2) Size: 2–word type The parameter value s
  • Page 164612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 This item is disabled for APC and AI APC. 2 The time constant mentioned above is common to all axes. Changing this item results in the settings of all axes being changed. Velocity Linearacceleration/deceleration Bell–shapedacceleration/deceleration ta: Depe
  • Page 1647B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT S AI contour control and AI APC (for rotation axes and millimeter machine linear axes) No.1432 100 (No.1730)2 10 Effective = = (IS–B) value No.1785 6 No.1731 36 (No.1730)2 100 = (IS–C) No.1731 36 Note: Parameter Nos. 1730 and 1731 are set/re–set automatically only
  • Page 164812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 The parameter value specified on the machine parameter tuning screen is reflected on the following parameters (common to all modes): No. 13622: Velocity–first parameter No. 13623: Precision–first parameter In addition, the following parameter is set up according t
  • Page 1649B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT D Maximum allowable This item is used to specify an axis–specific maximum allowable machining feedrate machining feedrate. [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0 to 240000 0 to 10000
  • Page 165012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13600 MCR [Data type] Bit MCR When the permissible acceleration is adjusted with the machining condition selection function (machining parameter adjustment screen or precision level selection screen), parameter Nos. No.1730 and 17
  • Page 1651B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 13612 Acceleration change time when AI contour control is used (bell–shaped) (precision level 1) 13613 Acceleration change time when AI contour control is used (bell–shaped) (precision level 10) [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 1 to 100 Thes
  • Page 165212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter No. 1602 Acceleration/deceleration LS2(#6) BS2(#3) Selects linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting 1 0 feed interpolation. Selects bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after 0 1 cutting feed interpolation. NOTE 1 For bell–shaped acceleration/dece
  • Page 1653B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 13628 Parameter number for arbitrary item 1 when advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, or AI contour control is used 13629 Parameter number for arbitrary item 2 when advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, or AI contour control is u
  • Page 165412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.1.27 Other Functions Displaying the main When a subprogram is being executed, the program number of the main program number during program can be displayed beside the number of the currently running subprogram execution program on a 14–inch screen. Parameter #7
  • Page 1655B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.28 FANUC Two–Byte The following table lists FANUC two–byte character codes used on the Character Code Table periodic maintenance screen. 1629
  • Page 165612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 1630
  • Page 1657B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 1631
  • Page 165812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 1632
  • Page 1659B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 1633
  • Page 166012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 1634
  • Page 1661B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.2 EDIT 12.2.1 Part Program Storage Length General One of the following part program size can be selected. CNC model Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i Part Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i program size Series 160is Series 180is Series 210is 10m (4Kbyte) — — f
  • Page 166212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.3.1 Displaying Memory Used and a 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) List of Programs 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.3.1 Displaying Memory Used and a (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) List of Programs Se
  • Page 1663B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.3.1 Displaying Memory Used and a 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) List of Programs 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11.3.1 Displaying Memory Used and a (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) List of Programs Se
  • Page 166412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 @ KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter data tables) When KEY = 1 @ KEY1: Enables program loading and editing, as well as the input of PMC parameters. @ KEY2 to KEY4: Not used [Operation] When a signal is set to 0, the associated operations are disabled. When a signal i
  • Page 1665B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT IWZ Setting a workpiece zero point offset value or wokpiece shift value (T–series) by MDI key input in the automatic operation activation or halt state is: 0 : Not disabled 1 : Disabled MCM The setting of custom macros by MDI key operation is: 0 : Enabled regardle
  • Page 166612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11 SETTING AND DISPLAYING 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) DATA 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11 SETTING AND DISPLAYING (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) DATA Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.11 SETTING AND DI
  • Page 1667B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT (3) Program number search (4) Program editing after registration (5) Program registration (6) Program collation (7) Displaying programs 3210 Password(PASSWD) [Data type] Two–word Set a password to this parameter. Its value is not displayed. CAUTION This parameter
  • Page 166812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 231 FORMAT ERROR IN G10 Any of the following errors occurred in L50 the specified format at the program- mable–parameter input. 1) Address N or R was not entered. 2) A number not specified for a pa- rameter was entered.
  • Page 1669B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.2.5 Background Editing General Editing a program while executing another program is called background editing. The method of editing is the same as for ordinary editing (foreground editing). A program edited in the background should be registered in foreground
  • Page 167012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.2.6 Playback General When the playback option is selected, the TEACH IN JOG mode (TJOG) and TEACH IN HANDLE mode (THND) are added. In these modes, a machine position along the X, Y, and Z axes obtained by manual operation is stored in memory as a program positi
  • Page 1671B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.2.7 Conversational Programming with Graphic Function General Programs can be created block after block on the conversational screen while displaying the G code menu. Blocks in a program can be modified, inserted, or deleted using the G code menu and converstion
  • Page 167212. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 D Copy with range specification Copy source number: 0001–0100 Copy destination number: No setting Copy source Copy source O0001 O0001 O0010 O0010 O0100 O0100 O1000 O2000 Copy source number: 0001–0100 Copy destination number: 1000 Copy source Copy source O0001 O100
  • Page 1673B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Caution CAUTION 1 The CNC does not perform copy operation in the following conditions: S The data protection key of the copy destination is off. S The O number of a program to be copied is the number being protected. S The same O number is found in the copy destin
  • Page 167412. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 12.3 ENCRYPTING PROGRAMS General This function can protect programs by setting an encryption key specific to the machine tool builder for a system parameter. This function is an option. Protecting the security After the encryption key parameter is set, for the pro
  • Page 1675B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Setting an encryption Set encryption key 0 to 99999999 in parameter No. 3220. When a value key of 0 is set, the value (0) is displayed to indicate the unlocked state. Setting a value other than 0 locks the programs. The encryption key setting is not displayed for
  • Page 167612. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 These values can be set in the unlocked state ([encryption key] = 0 or [encryption key] = [decryption key]). 2 The programs within the specified protection range are protected regardless of the settings of bits 0 (NE8) and 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202, whi
  • Page 1677B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT NOTE 1 To punch out programs in encrypted text, set bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 to 1 (ISO code). An attempt to punch out programs in encrypted text with setting 0 (EIA code) causes an alarm (P/S 247). 2 The encryption key set in the parameter is also punched
  • Page 167812. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Displaying programs In the locked state, the contents of the programs within the protection range are not displayed. In the unlocked state, the contents of the programs within the protection range are also displayed in the same way as for normal programs. Editing
  • Page 1679B–63523EN–1/03 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Parameter 3220 Encryption key [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] None [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets an encryption key (password). When a value other than 0 is set, it is regarded as being an encryption key. Once an encryption key has been set
  • Page 168012. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a pro- gram having a protected number. PS0231 FORMAT ERROR IN G10 The following error was detected in the L50 specification format of programmable parameter input: (7) An a
  • Page 1681B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 1655
  • Page 168213. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 13.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE General The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncher interface. 1. Program 2. Offset data 3. Parameter 4. Pitch error compensation data 5. Custom macro common variables. The above data can be output to a memory
  • Page 1683B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Parameter The parameters described below must be set up to use an I/O unit interface (RS–232–C serial port), remote buffer interface, or memory card interface for inputting and outputting data (such as programs and parameters) between external input/output uni
  • Page 168413. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 ISO TVC This parameter can be entered on the setting screen [Data type] Bit TVC TV check 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed ISO Code used for data output 0 : EIA code 1 : ISO code I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device or se
  • Page 1685B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Setting Description 20 Group 0 21 Group 1 22 Group 2 Data is transferred between the CNC and a Power | | Mate CNC in group n (n: 0 to 15) via the FANUC I/O 34 Group 14 Link. 35 Group 15 Supplemental remark 1 If the DNC operation is performed with FOCAS1/HSSB,
  • Page 168613. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 [Valid data range] 0 to 3, 5, 10 These parameters are valid only when bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 110 is set to control the I/O channels separately. The parameters set individual input/output devices if the I/O channels are divided into these four types: inpu
  • Page 1687B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (1) Parameters Common to all Channels 0024 Port for communication with the PMC ladder development tool (FANUC LADDER–III) This parameter can be entered on the setting screen [Data type] Byte This parameter sets the port to be used for communication with the PM
  • Page 168813. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 IOP Specifies how to stop program input/output operations. 0 : An NC reset can stop program input/output operations. 1 : Only the [STOP] soft key can stop program input/output operations. (An reset cannot stop program input/output operations.) ENS Action taken
  • Page 1689B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0) [Data type] Byte Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table 13.1 (a). Table 13.1 (a
  • Page 169013. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 (3) Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0111 NFD ASI SB2 [Data type] Bit These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101. 0112 Number specified for the input/output
  • Page 1691B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (5) Parameters of Channel 3 (I/O CHANNEL=3) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0131 NFD ASI SB2 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3. The meanin
  • Page 169213. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 Table 13.1 (c) Baud Rate Settings Set value Baud rate (bps) Set value Baud rate (bps) 1 50 9 2400 2 100 10 4800 3 110 11 9600 4 150 12 19200 5 200 13 38400 6 300 14 76800 7 600 14 86400 8 1200 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0134 CLK NCD PRY NOTE When this parameter i
  • Page 1693B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (6) Parameters of Memory Card Interface #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0138 MDN MDP [Data type] Bit MDP In data output by a memory card, the series information is: 0: Not added to the output file name. 1: Added to the output file name. MDN The DNC operation function
  • Page 169413. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape. 002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will be generated only when the TV
  • Page 1695B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Number Message Description 5235 COMMUNICATION In communication with the built–in ERROR handy file unit, a communication error has occurred. 5236 COMMAND ERROR In communication with the built–in handy file unit, an incorrect command was issued. 5237 READ ERROR
  • Page 169613. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 13.2 Refer to Remote Buffer DESCRIPTIONS (B–61802E–1) for detailed informetion of remote buffer. REMOTE BUFFER 1670
  • Page 1697B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13.3 DNC1 INTERFACE General Refer to FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS(B–61782E) for detailed information of DNC1 interface. Parameter 0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Byte Set value. :10 0133 Baud rate [Data
  • Page 169813. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 0142 Station address of the CNC (DNC1 interface) [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 2 to 52 This parameter specifies the station address of the CNC when the CNC is connected via the DNC1 interface using multipoint connection. NOTE When this parameter is set,
  • Page 1699B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA COMMUNICATION OPERATION O0001 N00000 DNC FILE SELECTION > MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53 [C–OPER][C–SERV][ ][ ][ ( OPRT ) ] 1673
  • Page 170013. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 (b) Service Screen Press soft key [C–SERV] and the following screen is displayed. Three pages are available and one of the pages is selected by page key. COMMUNICATION PARAMETER O0001 N00000 NC APPLICATION NAME HOST APPLICATION NAME > MDI *** STOP *** *** ***
  • Page 1701B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA COMMUNICATION PARAMETER O0001 N00000 PASCAL STACK ADDRESS UPPER LIMIT 01ABC000 LOWER LIMIT 01ABC0FF SERVICE MODE 1 01010100 00000010 SERVICE MODE 2 01000000 00000001 FILE REQUEST TIME OUT 12345678 REMOTE REQUEST TIME OUT 12345678 > MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12
  • Page 170213. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 [Setting procedure] 1 Put the system in the MDI mode. 2 Switch to the setting screen or service screen to appear, and press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 3 Move the cursor to the item you want to specify, using the page and cursor keys. 4 Enter the setting value from
  • Page 1703B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 5) Press the [INPUT] soft key to input the values. DNC FILE SELECTION O1000.PRGJ > MDI *** STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53 [ STRING ] [ INPUT ] [ CLEAR ] [ INS. CH ] [ DEL. CH ] 6) Deleting the DNC file name D If you want to delete the entire name, press the [CL
  • Page 170413. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 2. PARAMETER (1) Setting screen DESCRIPTION D DNC file selection To start DNC operation, specify a file name in the host computer. Format: Oxxxx. PRG (where xxxx is a four–digit decimal number.) (2) Service screen D CNC and host application names Specify these
  • Page 1705B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA * For the T series (two–path control), bits 08 to 11 correspond to M00 to M30 at HEAD2 respectively, and bits 12 to 15, at HEAD1. D Status post mask Not used D Alarm post This parameter specifies whether the bit position of a CNC alarm is posted to the host wh
  • Page 170613. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 13.4 Refer to an item of FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS ( B–61992E ) for detailed information of DNC2 interface. DNC2 INTERFACE 1680
  • Page 1707B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13.5 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL General It is possible to request from an external source that a program be registered, collated, or output. D Registeration/Collation As triggered by the external read start signal EXRD, the background edit function saves prog
  • Page 170813. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 D There are some other conditions to determine whether a program can be registered or collated. For example, a program cannot be registered or collated, if a program with the same program number is being executed in the foreground processing. External Punch St
  • Page 1709B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Background editing signal BGEACT [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the background edit function is operating. [Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1 when: D The [BG EDIT] soft key is pressed to put the CNC
  • Page 171013. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 Read/punch alarm signal RPALM [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred during program registeration, collation, or output triggered by the external read or punch start signal. [Output conditi
  • Page 1711B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Parameter Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020) ↓ 0020 I/O CHANNEL 0101 Stop bit and other data I/O CHANNEL=0 Number specified for the in- Specify a channel for an 0102 (channel 1) put/output device input/output device. 0103 Baud rate I/ O CHANNEL 0
  • Page 171213. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 = 0, program registration is assumed to be: 0 : Completed 1 : Not completed NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be: 0 : Completed 1 : Not completed #7 #6 #5 #4 #3
  • Page 1713B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Alarm and message Number Message Description 079 PROGRAM VERIFY In memory or program collation,a pro- ERROR gram in memory does not agree with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs in memory and those from the external device. 085 COMM
  • Page 171413. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT
  • Page 1715B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13.6 SIMULTANEOUS INPUT AND OUTPUT OPERATIONS (M SERIES) General While an automation operation is being performed, a program input from an I/O device connected to the reader/punch interface can be executed and stored in memory. Similarly, a program stored in m
  • Page 171613. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 Output and run simultaneous mode select signal STWD [Classification] Input signal [Function] When this signal becomes logical 1, the control unit: D Selects the output and run simultaneous mode. To select the output and run simultaneous mode, it is ne
  • Page 1717B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA NOTE 1 If a value beyond the valid data range is specified, the number of the input program is registered. 2 When the eight–digit program number function is not provided, the program number should not be set in this parameter but in parameter 3218. Alarm and m
  • Page 171813. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 13.7 EXTERNAL PROGRAM INPUT General By using the external program input start signal, a program can be loaded from an input unit into CNC memory. When an input unit such as the FANUC Handy File or FANUC Floppy Cassette is being used, a file can be searched for
  • Page 1719B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Workpiece no. search signal File no. PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 0 0 0 1 1 03 0 0 1 0 0 04 0 0 1 0 1 05 0 0 1 1 0 06 0 0 1 1 1 07 0 1 0 0 0 08 0 1 0 0 1 09 0 1 0 1 0 10 0 1 0 1 1 11 0 1 1 0 0 12 0 1 1 0 1 13 0 1 1 1 0 14 0 1 1 1 1 15 1 0 0 0 0 16 1 0 0 0 1 17 1 0 0 1
  • Page 172013. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 In this case, the general operation flow is as shown below. Press the cycle start button. Issuing the external program input start signal (MINP) starts program input. The automatic operation mode signal (STL) is set to 1, then program input starts. When input
  • Page 1721B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA The timing chart for data reading is shown below. Execution of a machining program M code command for the Mxxx next program input Code signal M00~M31 Strobe signal MF Single–block signal SBK Completion signal FIN Cycle start lamp signal STL External program in
  • Page 172213. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3201 MIP [Data type] Bit type MIP Specifies whether to load a program into memory according to the external program input start signal (MINP). 0 : Does not load a program into memory. 1 : Loads a program into memory. Note NOTE
  • Page 1723B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13.8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS BASED ON THE I/O Link General Power Mate programs, parameters, macro variables, and diagnostic (PMC) data are input/output through the FANUC I/O Link. With the FANUC I/O Link, slaves from group 0 to group 15 can be connected, t
  • Page 172413. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 For details of the FANUC I/O Link, refer to the ”FANUC PMC Programming Manual.” For details of the external I/O device control function, see Section 13.5. D Basic data input/output (1) Program input/output procedure (a) Program input · When the data input/outp
  • Page 1725B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 4) Select address O. 5) Key in a program number. 6) Using soft keys [(OPRT)], continuous–menu key , [PUNCH], and [EXEC], output the program corresponding to the keyed–in program number. · When data input/output function B based on the I/O Link is used 1) Using
  • Page 172613. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 (a) Macro variable input · When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used With Power Mate DI signals EDG00 to EDG15, specify a start number for the macro variables to be read. With EDN00 to EDN15, specify the number of macro variables to be
  • Page 1727B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (a) Diagnostic (PMC) data input · When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used With Power Mate DI signals EDG00 to EDG15, specify a start number for the diagnostic data items to be read. With EDN00 to EDN15, specify the number of diagnosti
  • Page 172813. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 D Stopping input/output There are two methods of forcibly terminating input/output. (1) Termination by a reset Input/output can be terminated by a reset. In this case, however, slave read/write stop signal ESTPIO is not output. Therefore, the operation of the
  • Page 1729B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA D Power Mate state signals When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, the (input) state signals for a specified Power Mate must be reported to the CNC. These signals must be posted to the Series 16i/18i/21i via the following path: 1) Po
  • Page 173013. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 D DI/DO signal timing The DI/DO signal timing charts applicable when data input/output charts function B based on the I/O Link is used are shown below. When the ordinary data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, 1) through 4) in the figures are
  • Page 1731B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (6) (9) (10) (12) (3) (15) (1) I/O Link specification signal IOLS (4) (15) (2) External read/punch signal EXRD/EXWT (5) (3) I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACK (13) (4) Power Mate read/write in– progress signal BGION (5) Power Mate read/write alarm signal BGIA
  • Page 173213. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 (2) When an alarm is issued by the CNC (including the case where processing is stopped by external read/punch signal EXSTP) Steps 1) to 10) are the same as those for ordinary input/output. 11) When the CNC issues an alarm, or when external read/punch stop sign
  • Page 1733B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (6) (9) (10) (12) (3) (15) (1) I/O Link specification signal IOLS (4) (2) External read/punch signal EXRD/EXWT (7) (15) (3) I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACK (13) (4) Power Mate read/write in– progress signal BGION (13) (5) Power Mate read/write alarm signal
  • Page 173413. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 (3) When an alarm is issued by the Power Mate Steps 1) to 10) are the same as those for ordinary input/output. 11) When the Power Mate issues an alarm, Power Mate read/write alarm signal BGIALM is set to 1, and Power Mate read/write in–progress signal BGION is
  • Page 1735B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (6) (9) (10) (3) (13) (1) I/O Link specification signal IOLS (4) (2) External read/punch signal EXRD/EXWT (7) (13) (3) I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACK (11) (4) Power Mate read/write in– progress signal BGION (11) (5) Power Mate read/write alarm signal BGIA
  • Page 173613. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 D Troubleshooting The data input/output function based on the FANUC I/O Link is implemented by various elements such as ladder programs, I/O Link assignment, CNC parameters, and Power Mate parameters. So, problems may occur when the function is started. The ta
  • Page 1737B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Symptom Cause and corrective action When an attempt is made to output I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACK data to a Power Mate: is not set to 1. CNC: OUTPUT blinks con- A ladder program error, I/O Link as- tinuously. signment error may prevent. Power Mate : No
  • Page 173813. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 CAUTION If these symptoms are detected, the CNC waits for a condition to be satisfied in its internal processing. While such a state exists, the screen is not updated. So, the states of signals cannot be checked on a real–time basis on a screen such as the PMC
  • Page 1739B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACK [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal indicates that the Power Mate state signals are valid. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows: – All Power Mate state sign
  • Page 174013. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 Slave I/O Link selection signal IOLNK [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal instructs the Power Mate to perform data input/output based on the I/O Link. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: – When data inpu
  • Page 1741B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Slave external write start signal EWTIO [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the CNC has started data input. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: – When data input is started This signal is
  • Page 174213. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 This signal is set to 0 in the following case: – When data input/output is terminated This signal is a Power Mate control signal. The corresponding Power Mate side signal is EVAR . (The former address is for Power Mate A/B/C/E and the latter add
  • Page 1743B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Group number output signals SRLNO0 to SRLNO3 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate the group number of the Power Mate that is acting as a slave. [Operation] The group number of the Power Mate that is acting as a slave
  • Page 174413. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G091 SRLNI3 SRLNI2 SRLNI1 SRLNI0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G092 BGEN BGIALM BGION IOLS IOLACK #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F177 EDGN EP
  • Page 1745B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Setting Description 0, 1 RS–232–C serial port (connector JD36A on motherboard) 2 RS–232–C serial port (connector JD36B on motherboard) 3 Remote buffer interface (connector JD28A (RS–232–C interface) or connector JD6A (RS–422 interface) on serial communication
  • Page 174613. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE When 0 is set, the input/output of parameters, macro variables, and diagnostic data cannot be performed, but program input/output processing is performed. Alarm and message Number Message Description 085 COMMUNICATION When entering data in the memory by u
  • Page 1747B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13.9 SCREEN HARD COPY FUNCTION General When the display control card has a graphic function, screen information displayed on the CNC can be converted to 640–by–480–dot bit–mapped data and output to a memory card. Then, the created bit map data can be displayed
  • Page 174813. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 After HDCPY099.BMP is output, executing another screen hard copy operation outputs HDCPY000.BMP. Note that, however, when a file having the same name as that of the BMP data to be output by screen hard copy operation is already present on the memory card, the
  • Page 1749B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Restriction S This function cannot be used in the following case: – 160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is – Construction of connecting with PC via HSSB and not attaching MDI to the CNC side S Hard copies of system alarm screens cannot be taken. S When RS–232C is be
  • Page 175013. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 Hard copy stop request signal HCABT [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal requests the CNC to stop hard copy operation. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC operates as follows: S Stops hard copy operation. Hard copy in–pro
  • Page 1751B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA G067#7 (HCREQ) F061#3 (HCEXE) G067#6 (HCABT) F061#2 (HCAB2) Fig. 13.9 (b) Time chart when screen hard copy is interrupted CAUTION 1 Even when hard copy operation is performed for screens on the second path side or loader control board side, the input signals r
  • Page 175213. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3301 HDCPY HCNEG HCALM HDCL1 [Data type] Bit HDCL1 When the screen display is in VGA compatible mode on a color LCD: 0 : Hard copy is performed with 256–color BMP. (The same colors as those on the screen display can always be
  • Page 1753B–63523EN–1/03 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Diagnostic screen The hard copy status is output. When the hard copy start signal (HDCPY, G67#7) is not set to 1, pressing the reset button resets all bits of diagnostic number 35 to 0. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0035 HCER3 HCER2 HCER1 HCAB3 HCEND HCEND Normal te
  • Page 175414. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 14 MEASUREMENT 1728
  • Page 1755B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT 14.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) General The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory as an offset value by a soft key. Switch to the offset value display screen on the CRT. Relative positions are also displayed on this screen. Then
  • Page 175614. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 14.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/ AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) General When a tool is moved to the measurement position by execution of a command given to the CNC, the CNC automatically measures the difference between the current coordinate value a
  • Page 1757B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT The tool decelerates and temporarily stops at the distance γ before the measuring position. The tool then moves to the measuring position at the speed preset by a parameter No. 6241. If the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the G code is turned “1” aft
  • Page 175814. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 The measuring position reached signal requires at least 10 msec. 2 The CNC directly inputs the measuring position reached signals from the machine tool; the PMC does not process them. 3 If automatic tool offset or automatic tool length measurement is not used, t
  • Page 1759B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT CAUTION Set a radius value irrespective of whether the diameter programming or the radius programming is specified. 6254 e value on X axis during automatic tool offset e value during tool length automatic measurement 6255 e value on Z axis during tool automatic offset
  • Page 176014. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 080 G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL In the automatic tool length measure- NOT ASSERTED ment function (G37), the measurement position reached signal (XAE, YAE, or ZAE) is not turned on within an area specified in parameter 6254 (value ε).
  • Page 1761B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Note NOTE 1 Measurement speed, γ, and ε are set as parameters.ε must be positive numbers and satisfy the condition of γ>ε. 2 The compensation value is updated by the following formula: New compensation value =(Current compensation value)+[(Current position of the tool
  • Page 176214. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) MEASUREMENT (G37) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.6 AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) (G36, G37) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.14.2
  • Page 1763B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT 14.3 SKIP FUNCTION 14.3.1 Skip Function General Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is interrupted and the
  • Page 176414. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec. 2 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP from the machine tool; the PMC is no longer requires to process the signal. 3 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use the signal terminal SKIP
  • Page 1765B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Warning WARNING Disable feedrate override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration (enabled with parameter No. 6200#7 SKF=1) when the feedrate per minute is specified, allowing for reducing an error in the position of the tool when a skip signal is input. Thes
  • Page 176614. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Reference item Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.16 SKIP FUNCTION(G31) 16i/18i/160i/180i/ (For Machining Center) 160is/180is (B–63534EN) OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.14 SKIP FUNCTION(G31) (For Lathe) (B–63524EN) Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.8 SKIP FUNCTION(G31) 21i/210i/210is (
  • Page 1767B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT (1) Type A: The deviation is calculated from the cutting time constant and the servo time constant (loop gain). (2) Type B: The deviation is assumed to be a sum of the number of remaining pulses due to acceleration/deceleration caused when the skip signal is turned on,
  • Page 176814. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE For type A (parameter SEA (No. 6201 #0)=1), the skip signal must be turned on when the tool moves at constant feedrate. Signal High Speed Skip Staus Signal HDO0 to HDO7 [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status
  • Page 1769B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 IGX SEB SEA [Data type] Bit type SEA When a high speed skip signal goes on while the skip function is used, acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are: 0 : Ignored. 1 : Considered and compensated (type A). SEB When a high speed skip sign
  • Page 177014. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 14.3.3 Multi–step Skip General In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multi-step skip function stores coordinates in a custom macro variable and cancels the remaining distance that the block was supposed to be moved when a skip signal (8 points) or high-speed sk
  • Page 1771B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT · The skip signal is not monitored for a rising edge, but for its state. So, if a skip signal continues to be “1”, a skip condition is assumed to be satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting or dwell operation is specified. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
  • Page 177214. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1 6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1 6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1 6206 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1 [Data type] Bit type 1S1–1S8, 2S1–2S8, 3S1–3S8, 4S1–4S8, DS1
  • Page 1773B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Note NOTE The skip cutting commands G31 P1, G31 P2, G31 P3, and G31 P4 are all identical, except that they correspond to different skip signals. The tool moves along the specified axis performing linear interpolation until the SKIP signal is set to “1” or the end point
  • Page 177414. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 14.3.4 Torque Limit Skip General Specifying a move command after G31 P99 (or G31 P98) with a motor torque limit set (for example, specifying a torque limit on the PMC window) allows the same cutting feed as that specified with G01 to be performed. While the tool is mov
  • Page 1775B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F114 TRQL8 TRQL7 TRQL6 TRQL5 TRQL4 TRQL3 TRQL2 TRQL1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 TSA TSE [Data type] Bit type TSE When a skip operation is performed by the G31 P99 or P98 command used to specify torque limit skip: 0 : C
  • Page 177614. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Alarm and message Number Message Description 015 TOO MANY AXES COM- In the block including the command for MANDED the skip function (G31 P99/P98), to be executed under the control of the torque limit reach signal, no axis move command is specified, or two or more axes
  • Page 1777B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT 14.3.5 Continuous High–speed Skip Function (M series) General The continuous high–speed skip function enables reading of absolute coordinates by using the high–speed skip signals (HDI0 to HDI7). Once a high–speed skip signal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolute c
  • Page 177814. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6200 SRE HSS [Data type] Bit HSS 0 : The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals. 1 : The skip function uses high-speed skip signals. SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used: 0 : The signal is considered to be input at the
  • Page 1779B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6208 9S8 9S7 9S6 9S5 9S4 9S3 9S2 9S1 [Data type] Bit 9S1 to 9S8 Specify valid high–speed skip signals for high–speed skip command G31P90. The bits correspond to signals as follows: 9S1 HDI0 9S2 HDI1 9S3 HDI2 9S4 HDI3 9S5 HDI4 9S6 HDI5 9S7 HDI6 9
  • Page 178014. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Time interval during which signals are ignored (parameter No. 6220) High–speed skip signal These portions are ignored. Alarm and message Number Message Contents 5068 G31 P90 FORMAT No axis is specified for movement. ERROR Two or more axes were specified for move- ment.
  • Page 1781B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Format G81 T_ L_ ; (EGB mode on) G31.8 G91 a 0 P_ Q_ R_ ; (EGB skip command) P: The top number of the consecutive custom macro variables in which the machine coordinate positions of the EGB axis (work- piece axis) at the skip signal inputs are stored. a: EGB axis (Work
  • Page 178214. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6208 9S8 9S7 9S6 9S5 9S4 9S3 9S2 9S1 [Data type] Bit 9S1 to 9S8 Specify which high–speed skip signal is enabled when the G31.8 EGB skip command is issued. 9S1 HDI0 9S2 HDI1 9S3 HDI2 9S4 HDI3 9S5 HDI4 9S6 HDI5 9S7 HDI6 9S8 HDI7 The bits correspon
  • Page 1783B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Note NOTE 1 In the G31.8 block, only the EGB axis (work axis) should be commanded. When another axis is commanded, the P/S alarm (No.5068) will occur. 2 If P is not specified in the G31.8 block, the P/S alarm (No.5068) will occur. 3 If R is not specified in the G31.8 b
  • Page 178414. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 14.4 ENTERING COMPENSATION VALUES 14.4.1 Input of Offset Value Measured A (T series) General This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece diameter manually cut and measured from the MDI keyboard. First the workpiece is cut in the longitudi
  • Page 1785B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT NOTE To use this signal, set parameter PRC (No.5005#2) to 1. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G040 PRC Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5005 PRC [Data type] Bit type PRC Direct input of tool offset value and workpiece coordinate-system shift value 0 : Not use a
  • Page 178614. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 14.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T series) General When the touch sensor is provided, the tool offset value can be automatically settable in the tool offset memory, by moving the tool to make contact with the touch sensor during manual operation. The workp
  • Page 1787B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT D Setting tool offset value Determine a specific point on the machine tool as the measuring reference position. In advance, set the distance from this point to the measuring position (contact face of the touch sensor) as a reference value, using parameter No. 5015 to 5
  • Page 178814. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 Pulse storage for automatic decision is carried out in the manual mode while the GOSQM (tool compensation amount write mode select) signal is 1. Stored pulses are lost if: a. The manual mode is exited, b. The GOSQM (tool compensation amount wri
  • Page 1789B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Select, manually or automatically, the tool compensation number to be set up, using the QNI parameter (bit 5 of No. 5005). S QNI = 0 (manual selection) Set the cursor to the desired tool compensation number by operating the MDI (such as page and cursor keys). S QNI = 1
  • Page 179014. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Example 1 The difference between the reference tool nose tip position and the measuring tool nose tip position can be set as the tool offset value. Define the reference tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position (machine zero position) as the measuring
  • Page 1791B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Example 2 The measuring reference point may be an imaginary point (imaginary zero point), as shown in the figure below. The difference between the imaginary zero point and the measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference point can be set as the tool off
  • Page 179214. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 If the tool setter function For the tool set function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe, the workpiece for a one–turret/ coordinate shift amount for the Z–axis is automatically set in any of two–spindle lathe is workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 for workpiece co
  • Page 1793B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Machine +X zero point Zt +Z OFSZ –EXOFSZ (0,0) Measuring tool nose position at the mechani- OFSX cal machine position Workpiece coordinate system zero point (programmed zero point) EXOFSz : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set OFSz : Tool geometry offset
  • Page 179414. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Basic Procedure to Set To use the tool setter function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe, first Tool Offset Value specify the spindle to be measured, using the S2TLS (G040.5) (spindle measurement select) signal. (1) Execute manual reference position return. By executi
  • Page 1795B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT (9) Set the tool compensation value writing mode signal GOQSM to “0”. The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “OFST” indicator light goes off. When the tool setter function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe is in use, the S1MES or S2MES (spindle under measuremen
  • Page 179614. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “WSFT” indicator light goes off. When the tool setter function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe is in use, the S1MES or S2MES (spindle under measurement) signal, whichever is applicable, becomes 0. Signal Tool offset writ
  • Page 1797B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT D Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation. If the TS1 parameter (bit 3 of 5004) is 0 +MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along the X-axis. –MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually f
  • Page 179814. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 +MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along the Z-axis. –MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along the Z-axis. If the TS1 parameter (bit 3 of 5004) is 1 +MIT1 : Automatic decision causes the r
  • Page 1799B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode select signal WOQSM [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system. [Operation] When this signal is turned to “1” in a manual operati
  • Page 180014. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 Spindle 1 under measurement signal S1MES Spindle 2 under measurement signal S2MES [Classification] Output signal [Function] For the tool setter function of the one–turret/two–spindle lathe, it is indicated which spindle, 1 or 2, is under measurement.
  • Page 1801B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3003 DIT [Data type] Bit DIT Interlock for each axis direction 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5004 TS1 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit TS1 W
  • Page 180214. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 5015 Distance (X1P) between reference position and X axis + contact surface (touch sensor 1 side) 5016 Distance (X1M) between reference position and X axis – contact surface (touch sensor 1 side) 5017 Distance (Z1P) between reference position and Z axis + contact surfa
  • Page 1803B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Measuring reference position X1m X axis – contact face X1p Z axis – contact Z axis + contact face face +X Z1m X axis + contact face Z1p +Z Measuring reference position X2m X axis–contact face ↓ X2 p Z axis–contact face → ← Z axis+contact face +X Z2m ↑ X axis+contact fa
  • Page 180414. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 5021 Number of pulse interpolation cycles memorized prior to contacting the touch sensor [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Interpolation cycle [Valid data range] 0 to 8 This parameter sets the number of pulse interpolation cycles to be memorized until the operator manual
  • Page 1805B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT If 0 is set for this parameter, or if the maximum tool offset count is exceeded, the following is assumed: Tool offset number 16 pairs 32 pairs 64 pairs 99 pairs Spindle 1 1 to 8 1 to 16 1 to 32 1 to 49 Spindle 2 9 to 16 17 to 32 33 to 64 50 to 98 5054 Workpiece coordi
  • Page 180614. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 14.4.3 Input of Measured Workpiece Origin Offsets General By directly entering the measured deviation of the actual coordinate system from a programmed work coordinate system, the workpiece zero point offset at the cursor is automatically set so that a commanded value
  • Page 1807B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT 14.5 TOOL LENGTH/ WORKPIECE ORIGIN MEASUREMENT B (M SERIES) General Two functions have been provided to measure the tool length: The automatic tool length measurement function (Section 14.2) automatically measures the tool length at a programmed command (G37); The tool
  • Page 180814. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 The ten code signals (binary code) select a tool offset number. Code signals 0 to 998 correspond to tool offset numbers 1 to 999. NOTE This signal is valid only when the QNI bit (bit of 5 parameter No. 5005) is set to 1. Workpiece origin offset measurement mode selecti
  • Page 1809B–63523EN–1/03 14. MEASUREMENT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5005 QNI [Data type] Bit QNI When the tool length measurement B function is executed, a tool offset number is selected: 0 : According to the selection the operator makes on an MDI unit (by moving the cursor). 1 : According to the signa
  • Page 181014. MEASUREMENT B–63523EN–1/03 5022 Distance from the reference tool tip position to the base measurement surface [Data type] 2–word axis Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch The distance L from the reference t
  • Page 1811B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 15 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 1785
  • Page 181215. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 15.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL 15.1.1 PMC Axis Control General The PMC can directly control any given axis, independent of the CNC. In other words, moving the tool along axes that are not controlled by the CNC is possible by entering commands, such as those specifying
  • Page 1813B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION PMC CNC DI/ DO Commands from path 1 Group A α axis control Commands from path 2 Group B β axis control Commands from path 3 Group C γ axis control Commands from path 4 Group D ε axis control In the following description, input/output signals from the four path
  • Page 181415. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 These signals, together with block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg (described later), determine one complete operation, which is tantamount to one block executed during CNC–controlled automatic operation. These signals may be collectively called the axis contro
  • Page 1815B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION When the execution of command [1] is completed: ⋅ command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executing buffer; ⋅ command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer; and ⋅ command [4] is transferred to the input buffer as the
  • Page 181615. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 (5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the blocks have been issued. When the final block has been issued, set control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 to “0”. Before setting these signals to “0”, however, check that the blocks stored in the CNC’s input, wai
  • Page 1817B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION No. Symbol Signal name 17 EMBUFg Buffering disable signal 18 *EAXSL Control axis selection status signal 19 EINPg In–position signal 20 ECKZg Following zero checking signal 21 EIALg Alarm signal 22 EGENg Axis moving signal 23 EDENg Auxiliary function executing
  • Page 181815. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Signal Detail 1 Control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] When the signal is set to “1”, the corresponding axis becomes subject to PMC control. When the signal is set to “0”, PMC control becomes invalid. Changing the
  • Page 1819B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Axis control command Operation (hexadecimal code) Cutting feed – feed per revolution (exponential acceleration/ deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after inter- polation) 02h Performs the same operation as G95 G01, used by the CNC. Skip – feed per
  • Page 182015. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Axis control command Operation (hexadecimal code) External pulse synchronization – 2nd manual handle 0Eh Synchronizes with the second manual handle. External pulse synchronization – 3rd manual handle 0Fh Synchronizes with the 3rd manual handle. Speed command (
  • Page 1821B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Reference without dogs The reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) enables the position return following operation: When DLZ, bit 1 of parameter No. 1002, specifying reference position return without dogs for all axes, or DLZx, bit 1 of parameter
  • Page 182215. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Speed command When using the speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h), specify the axis to be controlled as a rotation axis in ROTX, bit 0 of parameter No. 1006. While position control is being executed for the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h), the speed c
  • Page 1823B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION When follow–up is not performed, an integrated travel value (error count) exceeding the value of parameter No. 1885 causes servo alarm 423 to be issued. When torque control is switched to position control, follow–up is always performed, even if follow–up suppr
  • Page 182415. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 CAUTION 1 If the torque control axis may be moved in torque control mode, the follow–up parameter TQF (bit 4 of parameter No. 1803) must be set to “1”. 2 If torque control mode is canceled while the torque control axis is moving, the return to position control
  • Page 1825B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Axis control code Operation Command data signal EC0g to EC6g 1st reference position 07h Rapid traverse rate return EIF0g to EIF15g 2nd reference position 08h The rapid traverse rate return is valid when PRD, bit 0 of parameter No. 8002, 3rd reference position
  • Page 182615. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 (4) 3rd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 09h) (5) 4th reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 0Ah) (6) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g: 20h) For these commands, signals EIF0g to EIF15g are used to specify the rapid traverse rate, in
  • Page 1827B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION [Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (Actual values must fall within the ranges given in the following table.) Data range Unit IS–B IS–C Linear Metric machine 1 to 100000 0.1 to 12000.0 mm/min axis Inch machine 0.01 to 4000.00 0.001 to 480.000 inch/min Rotation axis
  • Page 182815. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 [Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (Actual values must fall within the ranges given in the following table.) Data range Unit IS–B IS–C Linear Metric input 0.01 to 500.00 mm/rev axis Inch input 0.0001 to 9.9999 inch/rev Rotation axis 0.01 to 500.00 deg/rev WARNING 1
  • Page 1829B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE When diameter programming is specified with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005 can be used to specify whether a radius or diameter is to be used in a command. (14) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) Set the feedrate as
  • Page 183015. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 CAUTION The maximum feedrate depends on whether override is applied or canceled. The following table lists the maximum feedrate when override is canceled. IS–B IS–C Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input Magnified 65535 655.35 6553 65.53 by 1 mm/min i
  • Page 1831B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION (a) The speed command for PMC axis control requires the specification of the servo motor speed, not the feedrate along an axis. To specify a feedrate along the axis when gears are used to link the servo motor and axis, the feedrate must be converted to a rotat
  • Page 183215. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 4 Axis control data signals EID0g to EID31g [Classification] Input signal [Function] [Unit of data] IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.001 0.0001 mm Degree input deg Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] (1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) (2) Cuttin
  • Page 1833B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Signals EID0g to EID30g are undefined. (7) Auxiliary functions (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) Auxiliary functions 2 (EC0g to EC6g: 14h) Auxiliary functions 3 (EC0g to EC6g: 15h) For this command, the signals are used to specify, in binary format, an auxiliary function co
  • Page 183415. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 6 Axis control command read completion signal EBSYg [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the system that the CNC has read a block of command data for PMC axis control and has stored the block in the input buffer. See “Basic procedure” for details
  • Page 1835B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION (2) When the tool is in dwell: Stops the operation. (3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation when auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is input. The stopped operation can be restarted by setting this signal to “0”. 9 Block st
  • Page 183615. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 13 Miscellaneous function 2 strobe signal EMF2g [Classification] Output signal 14 Miscellaneous function 3 strobe signal EMF3g [Classification] Output signal 15 Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg [Classification] Input signal [Function] When an auxilia
  • Page 1837B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION [Function] When this signal is set to “1”, commands from the PMC are not read while the executing, waiting, or input buffer contains a block. If this signal is set to “1” when any of these buffers contain a block, that block is executed but subsequent commands
  • Page 183815. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 (5) External pulse synchronization – third manual handle (EC0g to EC6g: 0Fh) (6) Speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) 18 Control axis selection status signal *EAXSL [Classification] Output signal [Function] When this signal is set to “0”, control axis selection s
  • Page 1839B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 20 Following zero checking signal ECKZg [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is set to “1” when following zero check or in–position check is being performed for the corresponding PMC–controlled axis. 21 Alarm signal EIALg [Classification] Outp
  • Page 184015. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE This signal is set to “0” when distribution for the axis is completed (the signal is set to “0” during deceleration). 23 Auxiliary function executing signal EDENg [Classification] Output signal [Function] When an auxiliary function (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is
  • Page 1841B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION These signals are set to “0” when the overtravel alarm is released and reset signal ECLRg is set to “1”. See “Alarm signal EIALg” for details of how to release an overtravel alarm. 26 Feedrate override signals *FV0E to *FV7E [Classification] Input signal [Func
  • Page 184215. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 28 Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate, independently of the CNC, by setting bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001. Rapid traverse ove
  • Page 1843B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 31 Override 0% signal EOV0 [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is set to “1” when the feedrate override is 0%. 32 Skip signal ESKIP [Classification] Input signal [Function] When this signal is set to “1” during execution of the skip cutting c
  • Page 184415. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 36 External deceleration signals *+ED1 to *+ED8, *–ED1 to *–ED8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals are also used by the CNC. The signals are provided for each direction of the individual controlled axes. The plus or minus sign in the signal
  • Page 1845B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 37 Accumulated zero check signal ELCKZg [Classification] Input signal [Function] Setting this signal to 1 causes an accumulated zero check between blocks to be made at a subsequent cutting feed command. (1) Cutting feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) (2) Cutti
  • Page 184615. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA ELCKZA EFINA G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A For group A G146 EID7A
  • Page 1847B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G166 EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EMBUFC ELCKZC EFINC G167 EMSBKC EC6C EC5C EC4C EC3C EC2C EC1C EC0C G168 EIF7C EIF6C EIF5C EIF4C EIF3C EIF2C EIF1C EIF0C G169 EIF15C EIF14C EIF13C EIF12C EIF11C EIF10C EIF9C EIF8C For group C G170 EID7C
  • Page 184815. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 CNC→PMC ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F112 EADEN8 EADEN7 EADEN6 EADEN5 EADEN4 EADEN3 EADEN2 EADEN1 F129 *EAXSL EOV0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA For F131 EMF3A EMF2A EABUFA EMFA group A F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A E
  • Page 1849B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F182 EACNT8 EACNT7 EACNT6 EACNT5 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1 F190 TRQM8 TRQM7 TRQM6 TRQM5 TRQM4 TRQM3 TRQM2 TRQM1 Parameter 1427 External deceleration speed of each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment sy
  • Page 185015. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE This parameter is valid when TQF (bit 4 of parameter 1803) is held 0. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2000 DGPRx [Data type] Bit axis DGPRx At power–ON, the torque constant (parameter No. 2105): 0 : Is automatically set to the standard value specific to the motor
  • Page 1851B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE This parameter is valid when the same axis is controlled alternately by the CNC and PMC. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3709 THB [Data type] Bit THB The start type for threading is: 0 : A type 1 : B type CAUTION When PMC axis control is used, set this parameter
  • Page 185215. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NCC When a travel command is issued for a PMC–controlled axis (selected by a controlled–axis selection signal) according to the program: 0 : P/S alarm 139 is issued while the PMC controls the axis with an axis control command. While the PMC does not control th
  • Page 1853B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION PF1, PF2 Set the the feedrate unit of feed per minute in PMC axis control PF2 PF1 Feedrate unit 0 0 1/1 0 1 1/10 1 0 1/100 1 1 1/1000 FR1, FR2 Set the feedrate unit for feed per rotation for an axis controlled by the PMC. FR2 FR1 Metric input Inch input 0 0 0.
  • Page 185415. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NMT If the CNC issues a command that does not result in any movement along a PMC–controlled axis while another command, specified for the axis, is being processed, 0 : P/S alarm No. 130 occurs. 1 : No alarm occurs. JFM Specifies the units used to specify the f
  • Page 1855B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE While the CDI bit (bit 1 of parameter No. 8005) is held to 0, the NDI bit is valid for an axis of diameter programming (the DIAx bit (bit 3 of parameter No. 1006) is set to 1). #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8005 MFD CDI EDC [Data type] Bit EDC Under PMC axis co
  • Page 185615. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 8022 Maximum feedrate for feed per rotation along a PMC–controlled axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 in
  • Page 1857B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION (1) P/S Alarm Number Message Description 130 ILLEGAL AXIS An axis control command was given by OPERATION PMC to an axis controlled by CNC. Or an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis controlled by PMC. Modify the program. 139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC A cu
  • Page 185815. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Caution CAUTION 1 Emergency stop or machine lock is enabled. Machine lock can be disabled if the MLE bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 8001) is set to “1”. However, machine lock for an individual axis is always enabled. 2 In consecutive cutting feed blocks, a new bl
  • Page 1859B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 15.1.2 PMC Axis Control Expansion Overview This function makes it possible to use the following functions. (1) Cutting fees (sec/block) The time period until the end of the block can be specified. (2) Simultaneous start mode on/off If the simultaneous start mo
  • Page 186015. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 (2) Simultaneous start mode on/off D Specification If the simultaneous start mode is set on, the commands for multiple paths can be simultaneously started. By using this function together with sec/block described in Item (1), ”Cutting feed,” linear interpolati
  • Page 1861B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION The simultaneous start mode can be set on or off in any command group of any path. If a block for setting on the simultaneous start mode is specified while the simultaneous start mode is set on, the block becomes invalid. For the other paths, normal commands c
  • Page 186215. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE 1 Specify a cutting feed command by the automatic operation on the CNC side in the incremental mode. 2 If a signal is switched from 1 to 0 during superimposed operation, alarm 130 will be raised. When setting a signal to 0, do so after checking that the a
  • Page 1863B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8006 ESI [Data type] Bit ESI Superimposed control of the PMC axis control extension function is: 0 : Extended. 1 : Not extended. To use the superimposed command, set this parameter to 1. Alarm and message Number Message Descri
  • Page 186415. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Specifications Bit 4 of parameter No. 8005 specifies either position loop control or velocity loop control is used to execute a constant velocity command for PMC–axis control. For a constant velocity command, acceleration or deceleration is performed only by i
  • Page 1865B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 15.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT General The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC. Signal name Signal code Data signal for external data input (input) ED0 to ED15 Address signal for external data input (input) EA0 to EA6 Read signal for exte
  • Page 186615. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Data types accessed by external data input E ED15 to ED0 SEEE EEEE No. Item TAAA AAAA 15141312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 B65 4 321 0 External program number Program number(BCD4 digits) 1 1 0 0 0 ×××× search 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 External tool compensa- Of
  • Page 1867B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 1) External Program A program number (1 to 9999) is specified from an extended source and Number Search is selected in the CNC memory. For machines that can load several kinds of workpieces, this function can automatically select the program to be executed cor
  • Page 186815. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Read signal for external data input (ESTB) Read completion signal for external data input (EREND) If RST becomes 1 even momentarily in this period Reset signal (RST) Search completion signal for external ESEND does not become high. data input (ESEND) Search ca
  • Page 1869B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 2nd command Read signal for external data input (ESTB) Search command is kept. Read completion signal for external data input (EREND) Search completion signal for external data input (ESEND) Cycle start lamp signal (ST) Cycle start signal (STL) Automatic opera
  • Page 187015. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Data specification for external tool compensation (For M series) Address Data E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E A A A A A A A D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 1 ABS 0 0 0 s MSB LSB / i INC g Of
  • Page 1871B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 3) External workpiece The external workpiece coordinate system shift adjusts the workpiece coordinate system coordinate system depending on the shift amount set via the PMC. Each shift axis (parameter No. 1220) has this shift amount, and it is added to all the
  • Page 187215. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE Two characters are sent at a time (see ISO code given in the table below). ED15 to ED8 . . . . . . Character code in 1st character. ED7 to ED0 . . . . . . . Character code in 2nd character. When sending only one character, fill the second slot with a code
  • Page 1873B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 6) Substituting No. of Substitution is possible for the No. of parts required and the No. of parts parts required and No. machined. of parts, machined Data specification for No. of parts required and No. of parts machined. Address Data E E E E E E E E E A A A
  • Page 187415. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Read completion signal for external data input EREND [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal reports that the control unit has finished reading the entered data. [Operation] The output condition and procedure are described in the “basic
  • Page 1875B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F060 ESCAN ESEND EREND Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3202 PSR [Data type] B
  • Page 187615. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Number Message Description 132 ALARM NUMBER NOT No alarm No. concerned exists in exter- FOUND nal alarm message clear. Check the PMC ladder diagram. 133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. Small section data is erroneous in ex- ALARM MSG ternal alarm message or external oper
  • Page 1877B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 15.3 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH 15.3.1 External Workpiece Number Search General When several part programs are stored in program storage memory, a program can be searched with the workpiece number search signals PN1 to PN16 from the machine side. When th
  • Page 187815. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Workpiece number search signal Workpiece PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 number 0 1 1 0 0 12 0 1 1 0 1 13 0 1 1 1 0 14 0 1 1 1 1 15 1 0 0 0 0 16 1 0 0 0 1 17 1 0 0 1 0 18 1 0 0 1 1 19 1 0 1 0 0 20 1 0 1 0 1 21 1 0 1 1 0 22 1 0 1 1 1 23 1 1 0 0 0 24 1 1 0 0 1 25 1 1 0 1 0
  • Page 1879B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Alarm and Message Number Message Description 059 PROGRAM NUMBER During an external program number NOT FOUND search or external workpiece number search, a specified program number was not found. Otherwise, a program specified for searching is being edited in ba
  • Page 188015. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 15.3.2 Expanded External Workpiece Number Search General Using the EPN0 to EPN13 (expanded external workpiece number search) signals enables a search for program numbers O0001 to O9999. Unlike the workpiece number search signal, which triggers an automatic ope
  • Page 1881B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G024 EPN7 EPN6 EPN5 EPN4 EPN3 EPN2 EPN1 EPN0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G025 EPNS EPN13 EPN12 EPN11 EPN10 EPN9 EPN8 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3006 EPS EPN EPN Workpiece number search signals are assigned to: 0 : PN1,
  • Page 188215. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 15.4 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC General The PMC can control the speed and polarity of each spindle motor, connected by the optional spindle serial output/spindle analog output function. The first to fourth spindles each have their own individual interfa
  • Page 1883B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Spindle speed Spindle motor speed data = 4095 Maximum spindle speed By using this expression, the spindle motor speed data can easily be obtained. Specifying the output The PMC can specify the spindle motor output polarity when the polarity for the spindle fol
  • Page 188415. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 To specify a rotation command for the second spindle, enter the gears to be used for the second spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the data of the twelve code signals corresponding to the S value. Specify the data as the speed output command for the second spin
  • Page 1885B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION D Details of the signals D Signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SINDx → The above signal is used to select whether the spindle motor speed is controlled by the CNC or PMC. 1: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands (R01Ix t
  • Page 188615. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Twelve code signals corresponding to the S value R01O to R12O [Classification] Output signal [Function] The S value, specified in the CNC part program, is converted to the speed output of the spindle motor that is required to control the con
  • Page 1887B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE For the T series, this parameter is enabled when bit 4 (EVS) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1. For the M series, SF is not output: (1) For an S command used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping (G92S–––;) in constant surface speed control mode (2) W
  • Page 188815. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 [Setting method] (1) Set 0 (standard value) (2) Specify a spindle speed at which the spindle speed analog output becomes 0. (3) Measure output voltage. (4) Set the following value to parameter No. 3731. –8191 offset voltage (V) Set value = 12.5 (5) After the p
  • Page 1889B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Reference Item CONNECTION MANUAL 9.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/SPINDLE (This manual) ANALOG OUTPUT 9.3 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL 9.10 MULTI–SPINDLE CONTROL 9.15 THREE/FOUR–SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT 1863
  • Page 189015. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 15.5 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT General MDI key codes can be sent from the PMC to CNC by means of interface signals. This allows the CNC to be controlled in the same way as when the operator performs MDI key operation. Control is realized by exchanging the following i
  • Page 1891B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE Read processing is controlled by exclusive–ORing (XOR) the key code read signal (EKSET) with the read completion signal (EKENB). When the EKSET and EKENB signals differ in their logic, the CNC reads the input key code. Once reading has been completed, the
  • Page 189215. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Program screen display mode signal PRGDPL [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is on “1” while the CNC is displaying a program screen. Key code read completion signal EKENB [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signa
  • Page 1893B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE GRAPH 1 For the small keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to CUSTOM . For the standard keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to GRAPH . 0EEH is assigned to CUSTOM . 2 Handling of the soft keys [F0] to [F9], [FR], and [FL] in the key code table are the key codes for the soft
  • Page 189415. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 MDI Key Code Table(00H–7FH) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 Space 0 @ P 1 1 A Q 2 2 B R 3 # 3 C S 4 4 D T 5 5 E U 6 & 6 F V 7 7 G W 8 ( 8 H X 9 ) 9 I Y A ; * J Z (EOB) B + K [ C , L D – = M ] E . N F / ? O 1868
  • Page 1895B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION MDI Key Code Table(80H–0FFH) 8 9 A B C D E F 0 RESET [F0] (Note2) 1 [F1] (Note2) 2 [F2] (Note2) 3 [F3] (Note2) 4 INSERT [F4] (Note2) 5 DELETE [F5] (Note2) [F6] 6 CAN ALTER (Note2) 7 [F7] (Note2) 8 Cursor INPUT POS [F8] → (Note2) 9 Cursor PROG [F9] ← (Note2) OF
  • Page 189615. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 15.6 DIRECT OPERATION BY PMC OR OPEN CNC 15.6.1 DNC Operation by the PMC or OPEN CNC (PC with HSSB Connection) General Activating memory operation in memory operation mode (MEM) with the direct operation select signal set to 1 enables machining (direct operati
  • Page 1897B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 15.6.2 DNC Operation by a PC Connected to the HSSB PORT2 General You can connect two PCs to the CNC by connecting two HSSB boards to the CNC. This subsection describes machining (direct operation = DNC operation) performed while reading a program from the PC c
  • Page 189815. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 15.7 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL Outline This function enables the following three operations in pushing the switch installed in the machine only by the change in a minimum LADDER program. (1) Changes to MEM mode. (2) Execution of macro program registered in memory.
  • Page 1899B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION D Return of mode (7) Please change the mode on the PMC side based on the signal output in the step of above (6). (8) Please set ”1” in Mode change completion signal (MCFIN) on the PMC side when the mode change is completed. The P/S5306 alarm is not checked at
  • Page 190015. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 D Feed hold or single The abnormal end signal (MCSP) is not output when stopping in feed block hold or single block. Under such a condition, when the cycle start signal (ST) is turned on and off, the continuity of the macro program is executed. Under such a co
  • Page 1901B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Notes NOTE 1 Even if the macro call is being executed, mode selection signal (MD1,MD2,MD4) is effective. Therefore, please change the LADDER program to disable the mode change when the macro call executing signal (MCEXE) is ”1” when the inconvenience is caused
  • Page 190215. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Macro call start signal MCSTx [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal starts the macro call sequence. [Operation] When the standing fall of this signal is detected, CNC starts the corresponding macro program. O number of the prog
  • Page 1903B–63523EN–1/03 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Mode notification signal MD1R, MD2R, MD4R, DNCIR, and ZRNR [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies the mode which should be changed. [Output condition] This signal is output in the following case: S When CNC detects the standing
  • Page 190415. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Parameter 6095 The number of programs used by the macro call function [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 0 to 16 Specify the number of programs used by the macro call function. For instance, when three is set, macro call start signal MCS
  • Page 1905B–63523EN–1/03 16. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC 16 INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC 1879
  • Page 190616. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC B–63523EN–1/03 16.1 FANUC SERVO MOTOR b SERIES I/O LINK OPTION MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE (PERIPHERAL DEVICE CONTROL) General This function enables manual handle feed of the Servo Motor b series I/O Link Option (called I/O Link b below) with the manual pulse genera
  • Page 1907B–63523EN–1/03 16. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC Signal (on the FS16i/18i/21i side) Manual handle feed generator selection signals IOLBH2, IOLBH3 [Classification] Input signal [Function] The signals select a manual pulse generator for feeding the I/O Link b. [Operation] A manual pul
  • Page 190816. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12330 G17 G16 G15 G14 G13 G12 G11 G10 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 G10 When PMC group 0 (channel 1) is a Power
  • Page 1909B–63523EN–1/03 16. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12331 G1F G1E G1D G1C G1B G1A G19 G18 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 G18 When PMC group 8 (channel 1) is a Power
  • Page 191016. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC B–63523EN–1/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12332 G27 G26 G25 G24 G23 G22 G21 G20 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 G20 When PMC group 0 (channel 2) is a Power
  • Page 1911B–63523EN–1/03 16. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12333 G2F G2E G2D G2C G2B G2A G29 G28 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 G28 When PMC group 8 (channel 2) is a Power
  • Page 191216. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC B–63523EN–1/03 Signal (on the I/O Link b side) Mode selection signals MD1, MD2, MD4 [Classification] CNC (host) → I/O Link b [Function] The signals select an operation mode of the I/O Link b. [Operation] The manual handle feed mode of the I/O Li
  • Page 1913B–63523EN–1/03 16. INTERFACE WITH THE POWER MATE CNC NOTE 1 The signals are valid when bit 5 (MP) of parameter No. 5 for the I/O Link b is set to 1. 2 The signals are valid only in the manual handle mode. 3 The signals are used also as rapid traverse override signals. In the manual handle mode, the
  • Page 191417. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernet function for Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B. 1888
  • Page 1915B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET AND PCMCIA ETHERNET The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two types of devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot to t
  • Page 191617. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.2 With the embedded Ethernet function, the following functions can be operated: LIST OF FUNCTIONS S FACTOLINK function S FOCAS1/Ethernet function S DNC1/Ethernet function S FTP file transfer function NOTE With the series 20i–B, the ”FACTOLINK function
  • Page 1917B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.2.2 The FOCAS1/Ethernet function allows a personal computer to remotely FOCAS1/Ethernet control and monitor the CNC. The FOCAS1/Ethernet function can transfer a wider range of NC data than the DNC1/Ethernet function. For Function details, refer to ”FA
  • Page 191817. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE With the FOCAS1/Ethernet function of the embedded Ethernet function, DNC operation cannot be performed. 17.2.3 The DNC1/Ethernet function allows a personal computer to remotely control and monitor the CNC. The DNC1/Ethernet function provides DNC1/Et
  • Page 1919B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Differences between the FOCAS1/Ethernet function and DNC1/Ethernet function Compared with the FOCAS1/Ethernet function, the DNC1/Ethernet function provides software libraries in a simpler function call format for frequently used functions. 1893
  • Page 192017. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.2.4 The FTP file transfer function transfers files with FTP. The function can FTP File Transfer read and punch NC programs and various types of NC data. Function NOTE The FTP file transfer function is usable with the control software for the embedded
  • Page 1921B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION NOTE 1 The embedded Ethernet function includes the FTP file transfer function. This function is almost equivalent to the NC data transfer function in the FTP mode of the Data Server function of the option board. 2 Compared with the option board, the embe
  • Page 192217. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.3 This section describes the setting of the parameters for the embedded Ethernet function. SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.3.1 This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FACTOLINK function when the embedded Ethernet funct
  • Page 1923B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.3.1.2 On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating FACTOLINK parameter the FACTOLINK function. setting screen Display Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous men
  • Page 192417. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 PAGE 7 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE . If data is already registered, the data is displayed. 1898
  • Page 1925B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Display item and setting items Display item related to The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed. the embedded Ethernet Item Description function MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address Embedded Ethernet Set the TCP/IP–related ite
  • Page 192617. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.3.1.3 Parameters Parameter The NC parameters related to the FACTOLINK function are described below. 0802 Communicationchannel [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 21: Select the embedded Ethernet. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0810 MONO TIME BGS [Data type]
  • Page 1927B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 0814 Trigger PMC address for logging [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 Set a PMC address that serves as a trigger for specifying logging data. 0815 Logging data transmission interval [Data type] Double–word [Unit of data] Seconds [Valid data
  • Page 192817. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.3.1.4 An example of minimum setting required to operate the FACTOLINK Using the FACTOLINK function on a small network is provided below. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs function on a small through FACTOLINK. network D O
  • Page 1929B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.3.1.5 When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network, Configuring a large consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, and router IP address. network 17.3.2 This subsection describes the settings required to
  • Page 193017. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.3.2.2 On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating FOCAS1/Ethernet the FOCAS1/Ethernet function. parameter setting screen Display Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the co
  • Page 1931B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION PAGE 7 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE . If data is already registered, the data is displayed. 1905
  • Page 193217. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Display item and setting items Display item related to The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed. the embedded Ethernet Item Description function MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address Embedded Ethernet Set the TCP/IP–related ite
  • Page 1933B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION NOTE 1 When a small value is set for the item of time interval, communication load increases, and the performance of the network can be adversely affected. 2 The parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are set to the following default values before shipm
  • Page 193417. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.3.2.3 An example of minimum setting required to operate the Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network is provided below. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs FOCAS1/Ethernet through FOCAS1/Ethernet. function on a
  • Page 1935B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.3.2.4 An example of minimum setting required to operate the DNC1/Ethernet Using the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network is provided below. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs function on a small through DNC1/Ethernet.
  • Page 193617. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.3.2.5 When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network, Configuring a large consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, and router IP address. network 17.3.3 This subsection describes the settings required to
  • Page 1937B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.3.3.2 On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating FTP file transfer the FTP file transfer function. parameter setting screen Display Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press th
  • Page 193817. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 PAGE 7 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE . If data is already registered, the data is displayed. 1912
  • Page 1939B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Display item and setting items Display item related to The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed. the embedded Ethernet Item Description function MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address Embedded Ethernet Set the TCP/IP–related ite
  • Page 194017. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.3.3.3 The NC parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are described Parameters below. Parameters 0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 9: Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device
  • Page 1941B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.3.3.4 An example of minimum setting required to operate the FTP file transfer Using the FTP file function on a small network is provided below. (Windows NT 4.0 Workstation is used as the OS for the personal computer.) transfer function on a In this ex
  • Page 194217. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.3.3.5 When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network, Configuring a large consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, and router IP address. network 17.3.4 This subsection describes the method of parameter i
  • Page 1943B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION (b) Type 192.168.1.1 with the MDI keys. (c) Press the [INPUT] soft key or the function key INPUT to enter the data. This stores the parameter in the nonvolatile memory of the CNC. NOTE Turn on the power again so that you should make a changed parameter e
  • Page 194417. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Method of lowercase character input The method of entering lowercase characters when specifying a user name, password, and login DIR is described below. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Display the Ethernet parameter screen. 3 Move the cursor
  • Page 1945B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 3 Move the cursor to LOGIN DIR with cursor keys. 4 Press the [STRING] soft key. The cursor position and soft key display change as shown below. 1919
  • Page 194617. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 5 Type ”/NCDATA/NCPROGRAM/LINE001/GROUP0” with the MDI keys, then press the [INPUT] soft key. 6 Next, type the remaining character string ”02” with the MDI keys, then press the [INPUT] soft key. [Tip] For example, even if the character string is divided
  • Page 1947B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 7 To insert ”/FACTORY0010” between ”NCPROGRAM” and ”/LINE001”, move the cursor to ”/” prefixed to ”LINE001” then type ”/FACTORY0010” with the MDI keys. Finally, press the [INSERT] soft key. 8 To delete a character, move the cursor to the character to be
  • Page 194817. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Method of entering special characters The method of entering special characters such as ”\” unavailable with the MDI keys is described below. As an example, the procedure for setting the character string ”PROG$” is described. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in
  • Page 1949B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 5 Press the [$] soft key. 6 Press the [INPUT] soft key. 1923
  • Page 195017. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.4 There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. SWITCHING Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of devices. BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES Procedure 1 Place the C
  • Page 1951B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 5 Press the [SWITCH] soft key. The screen for switching between the embedded Ethernet port and the PCMCIA Ethernet card appears. 6 Press the [PCMCIA] soft key. A confirmation message appears. Press the [EXEC] soft key to switch the device. NOTE Informati
  • Page 195217. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.5 This section describes the operation required of each embedded Ethernet function. EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS 17.5.1 The operation of the FACTOLINK function is described below. FACTOLINK Function Display Procedure 1 Press the function key MESSAGE .
  • Page 1953B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.5.2 The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below. FTP File Transfer Function 17.5.2.1 A list of the files held on the hard disk embedded to the host computer is Host file list display displayed. Procedure 1 Press the function key
  • Page 195417. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 NOTE Depending on the FTP server software, the number of displayed programs may differ between the host file list screen above and the host file list (detail) screen described below. 5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can
  • Page 1955B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION NOTE The host file list (detail) screen shown above is an example of screen display, and information displayed may vary according to the specification of the FTP server used with the host computer. Display items D Number of registered The number of files
  • Page 195617. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.5.2.2 When a list of the files held on the hard disk embedded to the host Host file search computer is displayed, a file can be placed at the start of the list by specifying its file number. Procedure 1 Display the host file list screen. 2 Press the [
  • Page 1957B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.5.2.4 A file (NC program) on the host computer can be read to the CNC NC program input memory. For the host file list screen Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Display the host file list screen. 3 Press the [READ] soft key. 4 Type the file
  • Page 195817. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 For the program screen Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key PROG . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [PRGRM] soft key. The program screen appears. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] so
  • Page 1959B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 5 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 6 During output, ”OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. [Example of use] When an NC program (O0001) in the CNC memory is to be output to the hard disk embedded to the host computer, enter O0001. NOTE An outp
  • Page 196017. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.5.2.6 With the FTP file transfer function, the types of data listed below can be Input/output of various input/output. This subsection describes the input/output method. types of data A) NC parameter B) Tool offset value C) Custom macro variable D) Wo
  • Page 1961B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 9 During output, ”OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. File name The fixed file name PRAMETER is used. File format, restrictions Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. Tool offset value input The file
  • Page 196217. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 File name The fixed file name TOOLOFS is used. File format, restrictions Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. Workpiece origin offset value input The file (workpiece origin offset value) on the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. Procedu
  • Page 1963B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Pitch error compensation input The file (pitch error compensation) on the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the
  • Page 196417. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 M code group input The file (M code group) on the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Pres
  • Page 1965B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Operation history data input The file (operation history data) on the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft
  • Page 196617. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.5.2.7 The host computer to which the FTP file transfer function attempts to Checking and changing make a connection as the current communication destination can be checked. of the connection host Procedure 1 Press the function key PROG . 2 Press the c
  • Page 1967B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION NOTE The title of the host computer that is the current communication destination of the embedded Ethernet is displayed in reverse video. 5 The connected host can be changed by pressing the [CON–1], [CON–2], or [CON–3] soft key. Display items D Port numb
  • Page 196817. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.6 If an error occurs with each function of the embedded Ethernet function, the error message screen for the embedded Ethernet function displays an EMBEDDED error message. ETHERNET ERROR MESSAGE SCREEN Display Procedure 1 Press the function key MESSAGE
  • Page 1969B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION PAGE 5 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE . [Tip] The latest error message is displayed at the top of the screen. To the right of an error message, the date and time data of the occurrence of the error is displayed. The format of date and
  • Page 197017. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.7 With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen is available. EMBEDDED The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when the ETHERNET embedded Ethernet function operates abnormally. MAINTENANCE SCREEN Display Procedure
  • Page 1971B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 6 The screen below is used to check the state of the communication cable and whether a communication destination exists. Enter the IP address of a communication destination through MDI keys, then press the [PING] soft key. Communication is performed thre
  • Page 197217. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 7 The screen below is used to check the communication state of the embedded Ethernet function and the error detection count of the Ethernet controller. The screen consists of two pages: one page for an error detection count for transmission, and the othe
  • Page 1973B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8 The screen below is used to check the state of each task of the embedded Ethernet function. Symbol Meaning MASTER CTRL E Ethernet controller being initialized D Data being processed(NOTE) W Waiting for data processing(NOTE) P Waiting for parameter sett
  • Page 197417. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Symbol Meaning PMC X Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization D Data being processed(NOTE) W Waiting for data processing(NOTE) FTP X Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization D Data being processed(NOTE) W Waiting f
  • Page 1975B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Item Description EMPTY Indicates a buffer empty count during NC program transfer COUNTER from the FTP file transfer function to the CNC. This counter is initialized to 0 at power–on, then is increm- ented each time a certain condition is satisfied. TOTAL
  • Page 197617. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.8 DHCP/DNS FUNCTIONS 17.8.1 This additional manual explains DHCP and DNS functions of Embedded Overview Ethernet . By using DHCP function, CNC can get TCP/IP parameters from the DHCP server software of a PC . (If DHCP function is not available, TCP/IP
  • Page 1977B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION By using DNS function, CNC can utilize a domain name (FQDN : fully qualified domain name, for example, www.fanuc.co.jp) in order to specify the remote communication partner, instead of an IP address. 1951
  • Page 197817. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.8.2 Settings 17.8.2.1 Parameters For Standard Ethernet I/F #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 14880 DHCP DNS D1ET [Data type] Bits D1ET TCP, UDP and Time interval parameters, when DHCP is available. 0 : The following parameters are configured automatically for F
  • Page 1979B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.8.2.2 Ethernet parameter screen (1) Setting screen in the When DHCP function works in normal, the following parameters are case that DHCP is configured to CNC by the DHCP server of PC. available D IP address D Sub–net mask D IP address for router D IP
  • Page 198017. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 In the case that the parameters can not be configured by DHCP server (2) Setting screen in the When DNS function is available, please set the ”DNS IP address” for a case that DNS is remote DNS server. available 1954
  • Page 1981B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.8.3 Application functions which can use DHCP/DNS 17.8.3.1 D FOCAS1/Ethernet (DNC1/Ethernet) function (Note) Applications which can D Machine remote diagnosis function utilize DHCP function D FACTOLINK function 17.8.3.2 D FOCAS1/Ethernet (DNC1/Ethernet
  • Page 198217. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.8.4 On the condition of the following, this chapter explains the settings of Example of settings DHCP/DNS server. 1) DHCP server and DNS server run on the same PC. 2) The IP address of DHCP/DNS server is ”192.168.0.254”. 3) The range of IP addresses l
  • Page 1983B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.8.4.1 This section explains the procedure of DHCP server settings. Example of DHCP server settings on Windows2000 server (1) Start of Microsoft Click [Programs]–[Administrative Tools]–[DHCP]. management console (DHCP) (2) Adding of scope Click [Action
  • Page 198417. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Input ”factory” to [Name], and do ”FACTORY” to [Description]. Click [Next]. Input ”192.168.0.10” to [Start IP address], ”192.168.0.29” to [End IP address], ”24” to [Length], and ”255.255.255.0” to [Subnet mask] respectively. Click [Next]. 1958
  • Page 1985B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Click [Next] without modification. Confirm that Lease Duration is ”8 days”. Then click [Next]. 1959
  • Page 198617. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Confirm that [Yes, I want to...] is checked. Then click [Next]. Click [Next] without modification. 1960
  • Page 1987B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Input ”192.168.0.254”, and then click [Add]. Click [Next]. Click [Next] without modification. 1961
  • Page 198817. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Confirm that [Yes, I want to ...] is checked. Then click [Next]. Click [Finish]. 1962
  • Page 1989B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION (3) Adding of scope Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory]–[Scope Options]–[Action]–[Config option ure Options]. Check [DNS Domain Name], and then input ”factory”. Click [OK]. The configured parameters are displayed as follows. 1963
  • Page 199017. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 (4) Setting for referring Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory]–[Scope]–[Properties]. to Dynamic DNS Check the items like the following figure. Click [OK] Then the setting of DHCP server is finished. 1964
  • Page 1991B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.8.4.2 This section explains the procedure of DNS server settings. Example of DNS server settings on Windows2000 Server (1) Start of Microsoft Click [Programs]–[Administrative Tools]–[DNS]. management console (DNS) (2) Configuring of DNS Click [Action]
  • Page 199217. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Confirm that [This is the first DNS...] is checked. Then click [Next]. Confirm that [Yes, create a forward...] is checked. Then click [Next]. 1966
  • Page 1993B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Confirm that [Standard primary] is checked. Then click [Next]. Input ”factory.”. (Don’t forget the last period”.”) Click [Next]. 1967
  • Page 199417. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Confirm that [Create a new file...] is ”factory.dns”. Then click [Next]. Confirm that [Yes, create...] is checked. Then click [Next]. 1968
  • Page 1995B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Confirm that [Standard primary] is checked. Then click [Next]. Input ”192.168.0”. Click [Next]. 1969
  • Page 199617. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 Confirm that [Create a new file...] is ”0.168.192.in–addr.arpa.dns”. Then click [Next]. Click [Finish]. 1970
  • Page 1997B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION (3) Allowing of Dynamic Click [Forward Lookup Zones]–[factory] with using the right side button. DNS And then click [Properties]. Choose ”Yes” from [Allow dynamic updates?]. Click [OK]. Then the setting of DNS server is finished. 1971
  • Page 199817. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.8.5 The Ethernet parameters of CNC can be configured by utilizing a Application of DHCP DHCP/DNS server, without CNC setting operation. DHCP is the network function which can assign a unique IP address to and DNS to the devices on a network automatica
  • Page 1999B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.8.5.2 Setting of a PC (1) Operating system Windows2000 Server or later is recommended. (DHCP/DNS server needs to support Dynamic DNS.) (2) Setting of DHCP The following items need to be configured in DHCP server. server 1) Range of IP addresses which
  • Page 200017. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.9 This section describes troubleshooting and check items associated with the embedded Ethernet function. TROUBLESHOOTING 17.9.1 1) Is an STP cable used for connection between the hub and embedded Check Items Related to Ethernet? Connection with the 2)
  • Page 2001B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 4) Is the length of the backbone cable 500 m or less? 5) Does the cable (transceiver cable) connecting a hub to a transceiver satisfy the specified length? S Usually, the maximum allowable length of a transceiver cable is 50 m. However, the maximum allow
  • Page 200217. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.9.4 This subsection describes how to check the state of communication Checking between the CNC and personal computer. Communication Checking the connection status and settings If communication with the CNC is not satisfactory or fails from time to tim
  • Page 2003B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 2) When no response is received (error) If no response is received from the CNC, the cause is considered to be a hardware connection error and/or software setting error. Check the hardware connection and software settings. Checking the influence of noise
  • Page 200417. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 3) Count the number of lost packets (to which no response is returned). If lost packets occur in this state, there is probably an influence of noise from peripheral equipment. Action: Locate the noise source and recheck the cabling to eliminate the influ
  • Page 2005B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.10 If an error occurs with the embedded Ethernet function, the log screen of the embedded Ethernet function displays an error message. ERROR MESSAGES This section describes error messages displayed on the log screen. The major error messages are descr
  • Page 200617. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 17.10.2 TCP PORT NUMBER(???) IS INVALID EMB_ETH The setting (???) of the TCP port number is incorrect. Correct the TCP port number. FOCAS1/ETHER LOG Illegal Broadcast IP ADDRESS Screen The broadcast address for UDP transmission is incorrect. Correct the
  • Page 2007B–63523EN–1/03 17. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 17.11 This section briefly describes Ethernet–related terms. The descriptions below provide minimum information only. For further GLOSSARY FOR information, refer to relevant publications available on the market. ETHERNET TCP/IP For Ethernet–based communi
  • Page 200817. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–63523EN–1/03 IP addresses are internationally managed systematically. This means that before an IP address can be used, the IP address must be obtained formally from the international organization. If the network used by a user is a local network closed within the us
  • Page 2009B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 18 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1983
  • Page 201018. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 18.1 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 18.1.1 Investigating the cause of Servo/Spindle/CNC alarms becomes easier by Outline diagnosis according to the guidance message. And when the thermal simulation or disturbance torque of servo axis exceeds the trouble forecast level, a trou
  • Page 2011B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3 Finaly, the guidance message in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen shows the probable cause of alarm and the method to remove the problem. 1985
  • Page 201218. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 18.1.2 The trouble diagnosis guidance screen displays the guidance message to Trouble Diagnosis investigate the cause of an alarm. Guidance Screen Display Display procedure 1 Press function key [Message]. 2 Press the continuous menu key [>] and press soft key [GU
  • Page 2013B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Operation Change of Guidance [YES]/[NO]: Check contents of guidance message, and, answer by pressing soft key [YES] or [NO]. Then the next guidance message is displayed. In some cases CNC automatically checks and judges contents of guidance. In this case the next
  • Page 201418. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 18.1.3 Trouble Diagnosis Monitor Screen memorizes and displays servo/spindle Trouble Diagnosis monitor information for investigating servo/spindle alarm. Monitor Screen Three kinds of data, ”Data when the alarm occurs”, ”Data just before the alarm occurs”, ”Curre
  • Page 2015B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Data displayed in Displayed data in Monitor screen is showed below. Monitor Screen Display range is the range which can be displayed on screen and not capacity of system. 1) Data of servo motor Data (Unit) Data type Display range Required parameter Accumulated co
  • Page 201618. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 2) Data of spindle motor Data (Unit) Data type Display range Required parameter Operation mode Character ***** Gear select command Character ***** Command pulse (pulse) 2 Word "99999999 Command speed (min–1) Note 1) 1 Word –32768 to +32767 No.4020 (Main)/No.4196
  • Page 2017B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Servo monitor information is switched by pressing soft key [NEW]/ [OLD]/[CURRNT]. Soft key [NEW] and [OLD] is displayed alternately. [NEW]: Data when the alarm occurs [OLD]: Data just before the alarm occurs [CURRNT]: Current data [MON_SP]: Spindle monitor inform
  • Page 201818. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 18.1.4 Data type, data unit and trouble forecast level in the trouble diagnosis Trouble Diagnosis graphic screen are set in Trouble Diagnosis Parameter Screen. Parameter Screen Display Display procedure 1 Press function key [Message]. 2 Press the continuous menu
  • Page 2019B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Operation Data Setting Move cursor by Cursor key and input number by MDI key and press input key [INPUT] to set data. AXIS: In case of servo axis, input control axis number. (Example) Set ”1” for first servo axis. In case of spindle axis, input ”10 + spindle numb
  • Page 202018. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 18.1.5 Servo/spindle data is automatically memorized for several seconds before Trouble Diagnosis alarm occurs and display and waveform of data can be displayed in Trouble Diagnosis Graphic Screen. Graphic Screen Maximum 2 kinds of data are displayed in the same
  • Page 2021B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Operation Change of position and When Soft key [G–ADJ.] is pressed, the following soft keys appear. magnification [<] [ W.PRM ] [ G–ADJ. ] [ TRB_LV ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ] [ ] [<] [ TIME→ ] [ TIME← ] [ H–DOBL ] [ H–HALF ] [ (OPRT) ] [>] [<] [ CH–1↑ ] [ CH–1↓ ] [ V–DOBL
  • Page 202218. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 18.1.6 Trouble forecast level is set in this screen. Trouble Forecast Level Two trouble forecast levels, thermal simulation and disturbance torque, can be set. Setting Screen (Only for Servo Axis) Display Display procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press
  • Page 2023B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Operation Setting Trouble forecast 1 Select thermal simulation or disturbance torque by page keys level [Page↑]/[Page↓]. 2 Select axis by cursor keys [↑]/[↓]. 3 Input numerical value by MDI key and press [INPUT] key. Trouble forecast level is input into parameter
  • Page 202418. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 8860 Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation 8861 Trouble forecast level for disturbance torque [Data type] WORD AXIS [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100% #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13110 JPN NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned o
  • Page 2025B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 18.2 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS 18.2.1 Machine alarms (External alarm message and Macro alarm) can be diagnosed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen in addition to CNC Outline alarms. Example of a trouble diagnosis guidance screen Kind of diagnosed The following
  • Page 202618. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 Microsoft, Windows, MS–DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation of the USA. Microsoft Excel 97 is a product whose copyright is owned by Microsoft Corporation of the USA. 18.2.2 Guidance tables for diagnosis of machine alarms are made by using an Exc
  • Page 2027B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Making a guidance table Alarm No., Classified code, Alarm message, Probable cause and etc. are (1) registered into a guidance table (1). (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Input items (a) Alarm No. Input alarm numbers of the external alarm message or the macro alarm. Max 5
  • Page 202818. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 Operation of buttons S [Check] button When [CheckECK] button is pushed, a range of number, a number of characters and invalid character codes are checked. Alarm numbers are checked if they are within 0–65535. But alarm numbers in the external alarm message and th
  • Page 2029B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Making a guidance table ”Guidance message” is registered into a guidance table (2). ”Guidance (2) message” is a question and an instruction to an operator. (a) (b) (c) (d) Input items (a) Message ID A Message ID specifies a guidance message. Max 6 characters with
  • Page 203018. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 S Input ”–1” for both YES and NO in case of the end of a diagnosis. (d) Notes It is possible to write some notes here. Operation of buttons S [Check] button When [Check] button is pushed, a range of number, a number of characters and invalid character codes are c
  • Page 2031B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Converting an Excel Guidance tables on an Excel sheet is need to be converted to a memory sheet to a memory card card file which CNC can reads. A procedure of conversion is as follows. file A procedure of (1) Finish to making both guidance tables (1) and (2), and
  • Page 203218. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 Jump from CNC As a result of CNC alarm diagnosis, the alarm may be caused by machine guidance table to MTB’s trouble. guidance table Considering such a case, it is possible to jump to MTB’s guidance table from CNC guidance table by the special message IDs startin
  • Page 2033B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13110 JPN [Data type] Bit JPN Language used in the trouble diagnosis and the machine alarm diagnosis 0 : English is prior. In case of the machine alarm diagnosis, a file ”GUIE_USR.MEM” is prior. 1 : Japanese is prior. In case of
  • Page 203418. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 18.3 αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE General The αi servo system can report the warning status before one of the following target alarms occurs. When the warning status is entered, a report to the PMC is issued. For example, this signal can be used by the machine for
  • Page 2035B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A timing chart for handling a warning is shown below. Occurrence of a warning Servo amplifier SVWRN1–4 (Warning) Perform deceleration stop or block stop during this time period with the PMC to stop the machine without damage. The time period varies with the warni
  • Page 203618. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS B–63523EN–1/03 18.4 WARNING INTERFACE FOR THE αi SPINDLE Overview For the αi spindle, the warning state can be reported before an alarm is issued. When the warning state is entered, a report to the PMC is sent. For example, this signal can be used for retracting tools or reduci
  • Page 2037B–63523EN–1/03 18. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Warning Contents Details number 58 Converter main If the main circuit of the PSM is overloaded, the warn- circuit overloaded ing signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform proces- sing as needed. About one minute
  • Page 203819. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B–63523EN–1/03 19 INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO The following diagram shows the relationships between interface signals used among the CNC, PMC, and MACRO when a machining guidance function is implemented using the CNC macro executor. CNC MACRO PMC
  • Page 2039B–63523EN–1/03 19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO 19.1 SIGNALS USED BY MACHINING GUIDANCE FUNCTION (20i–F/T) PMC ³ MACRO Coordinate origin Datum plane setup signals First–axis datum plane setup signal ORG1: Specifies a datum plane with the origin (0) set at the current value of the first axi
  • Page 204019. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B–63523EN–1/03 Machining guidance menu select Machining guidance menu to be signal selected GMN4 GMN3 GMN2 GMN1 GMN0 F T 0 0 0 0 0 Not selected (machining guidance menu–based machining is not per- formed) 0 0 0 0 1 Linear machining Linear machining 0 0 0 1
  • Page 2041B–63523EN–1/03 19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO Feed–per–minute specification FMIN: When this signal is 1, it puts the machine tool in the feed–per–minute mode. Feed–per–revolution specification FREV: When this signal is 1, it puts the machine tool in the feed–per–revolution mode. Constant
  • Page 204219. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B–63523EN–1/03 Timing of signals for specifying feed per minute and feed per revolution The following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as an example. Feed–per–minute/–revolution (1) button FMIN/FREV (feed per minute/revolution) (2) (PMC³MACRO)
  • Page 2043B–63523EN–1/03 19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO Teaching/playback function Teaching (cutting) TCH: When this signal is 1, it registers a cutting operation that is supposed to end at the current position in memory. Teaching (rapid traverse) RCH: When this signal is 1, it registers a rapid t
  • Page 204419. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B–63523EN–1/03 Playback signal timing The following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as an example. (1) When the playback button is pressed, the PMC sets the PLB signal to 1 to request MACRO to make preparation for playback execution. (2) When
  • Page 2045B–63523EN–1/03 19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO MACRO ³ CNC Machining data setup signals These signals are used for manual handle/jog feed (linear/circular feed). Address Size Linear feed Circular feed R961 1 byte 0: Neither linear nor circular feed is performed. 1: Linear feed 2: Circular
  • Page 204619. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B–63523EN–1/03 Data at R961 to R974 Reset to 0 by the macro when setting ends. R979 Set to 1 by the NC when it finishes reading. Address Size Linear feed Circular feed R980 to R963 4 by- Distance from the cur- Distance from the cur- tes rent position to the
  • Page 2047B–63523EN–1/03 19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO Timing of signals for machining guidance–based automatic operation The following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as an example. GMN0 to GMN4 (machining guidance menu select signal) (PMC³MACRO) GMD0 toGMD4 (machining guidance mod
  • Page 204819. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B–63523EN–1/03 (7) When the GST becomes 0, and the mode select signal returns to the previous state, the CNC resets the mode selection configuration signal MMEM to 0 to terminate machining guidance–based automatic operation. Timing of signals for machining
  • Page 2049B–63523EN–1/03 19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO Constant surface speed function Constant surface speed function accepted signal SSCE: When this signal is 1, it indicates that MACRO has accepted a request for constant surface speed control. Teaching function Teaching accepted signal TCE: Wh
  • Page 205019. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B–63523EN–1/03 X–axis If the CNC is the T series (–) Approach direction when the handle is rotated clockwise SIN SIN=1 SIN=1 COS=1 COS COS=0 Z–axis (–) (+) SIN=0 SIN=0 COS=1 COS=0 (+) Cutting axis Circular cutting clockwise/counterclockwise rotation: CW/CCW
  • Page 2051B–63523EN–1/03 19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO The first, second, and third axes correspond to the X–, Y–, and Z–axes (20i–F) and the X– and Z–axes (20i–T), respectively. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 R985 CW/CCW GUID APRC 3AXIS 2AXIS 1AXIS 2025
  • Page 205219. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B–63523EN–1/03 19.2 Limit data setup signals SIGNALS USED FOR POLYGON LIMIT MACHINING (20i–F) MACRO ³ PMC Address Set data R961 4: Specifies a line. 5: Specifies a limit condition. R962 to R965 Line tilt (COSθ 230) Inner datum point coordinate first axis R9
  • Page 2053B–63523EN–1/03 19. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO Timing of signals for polygon limit machining The following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as an example. Input end key (INSERT) MACRO (1), (2) (4) (5) Limit data write (R961 to R976) Setup change notification (R978) (3) (6) CN
  • Page 205419. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO B–63523EN–1/03 (7) MACRO sets the polygon limit mode request signal (MLMRQ) to 1. On detecting that the signal is 1, the PMC sets the polygon limit enable signal (MALNT) to 1. After this, the CNC enables the polygon limit function according to the limit fig
  • Page 2055APPENDI
  • Page 2056
  • Page 2057B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 2031
  • Page 2058A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES A.1.1 Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as follows: Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/ 160is/180is List of CNC G000– PMC X000– MT Addresses (One–path Control) F000– Y000– Following shows table of addresses: In an item
  • Page 2059B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC MT → PMC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X000 X001 X002 X003 SKIP ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE (T series) X004 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 (M series) SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 X005 X006 X
  • Page 2060A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 PMC → CNC Address Bit number #7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 G003 G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN G005 BFIN AFL BFIN TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN G006 SKIPP OVC *ABSM SR
  • Page 2061B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G025 EPNS EPN13 EPN12 EPN11 EPN10 EPN9 EPN8 G026 *SSTP4 SWS4 PC4SLC PC3SLC G027 CON *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1 G028 PC2SLC SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF GR2 GR1 G029 *SSTP SOR SAR GR31 GR21 G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0 G03
  • Page 2062A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G050 *TLV9 *TLV8 G051 *CHLD CHPST *CHP8 *CHP4 *CHP2 *CHP0 G052 RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0 G053 CDZ SMZ UINT TMRON G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000 G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010
  • Page 2063B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB G077 DSCNB SORSLB MPOFB SLVB MORCMB G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00 G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08 G080 SHB07
  • Page 2064A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 G101 G102 -J8 -J7 -J6 -J5 -J4 -J3 -J2 -J1 G103 G104 +EXL8 +EXL7 +EXL6 +EXL5 +EXL4 +EXL3 +EXL2 +EXL1 G105 -EXL8 -EXL7 -EXL6 -EXL5 -EXL4 -EXL3 -EXL2 -EXL1 G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 G107 G108
  • Page 2065B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1 G125 IUDD8 IUDD7 IUDD6 IUDD5 IUDD4 IUDD3 IUDD2 IUDD1 G126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1 G127 G128 G129 G130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 G131 G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MI
  • Page 2066A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E G152 G153 G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB ELCKZB EFINB G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B
  • Page 2067B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G174 G175 G176 G177 G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD ELCKZD EFIND G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D G1
  • Page 2068A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G199 IOLBH3 IOLBH2 G200 EASIP8 EASIP7 EASIP6 EASIP5 EASIP4 EASIP3 EASIP2 EASIP1 G201 JGRD3 JGRD2 JGRD1 G202 G203 FTCLR FTCAL FTCMD G204 MRDYC ORCML SFRC SRVC CTH1C CTH2C TLMHC TLMLC G205 RCHC RSLC INTGC SOCNC MCFNC SPSLC *ESPC ARSTC G20
  • Page 2069B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G224 G225 G226 G227 G228 G229 G230 G231 G232 G233 G234 G235 G236 G237 G238 G239 G240 G241 G242 G243 G244 G245 G246 G247 G248 2043
  • Page 2070A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G249 G250 G251 G252 G253 G254 G255 G256 G257 G258 G259 G260 G261 G262 G263 G264 G265 G266 MRDYD ORCMD SFRD SRVD CTH1D CTH2D TLMHD TLMLD G267 RCHD RSLD INTGD SOCND MCFND SPSLD *ESPD ARSTD G268 RCHHGD MFNHGD INCMDD OVRD DEFMDD NRROD ROTAD
  • Page 2071B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G274 G275 G276 UI107 UI106 UI105 UI104 UI103 UI102 UI101 UI100 G277 UI115 UI114 UI113 UI112 UI111 UI110 UI109 UI108 G278 UI123 UI122 UI121 UI120 UI119 UI118 UI117 UI116 G279 UI131 UI130 UI129 UI128 UI127 UI126 UI125 UI124 G280 UI207 UI2
  • Page 2072A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G299 G300 G301 G302 G303 G304 G305 G306 G307 G308 G309 G310 G311 G312 G313 G314 G315 G316 G317 G318 G319 2046
  • Page 2073B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC CNC → PMC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL F002 MDRN CUT SRNMV THRD CSS RPDO INCH F003 MTCHIN MEDT MMEM MRMT MMDI MJ MH MINC F004 MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1 F005 MBDT9 MBDT8 MBDT7 MBDT6 MBDT5
  • Page 2074A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24 F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00 F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08 F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16 F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24 F030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00 F031 B15 B14 B
  • Page 2075B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F050 MORA2B MORA1B PORA2B SLVSB RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB F051 EXOFB SORENB MSOVRB INCSTB PC1DTB F052 F053 EKENB BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000 F055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010
  • Page 2076A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO F076 ROV2O ROV1O RTAP MP2O MP1O F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O F080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12
  • Page 2077B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F100 ZP48 ZP47 ZP46 ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41 F101 F102 MV8 MV7 MV6 MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1 F103 F104 INP8 INP7 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1 F105 F106 MVD8 MVD7 MVD6 MVD5 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1 F107 F108 MMI8 MMI7 MMI6 MMI5 MMI4 MMI3 MMI2 MMI1
  • Page 2078A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F125 F126 -OT8 -OT7 -OT6 -OT5 -OT4 -OT3 -OT2 -OT1 F127 F128 F129 *EAXSL EOV0 F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA F131 EABUFA EMFA F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB E
  • Page 2079B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F150 F151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 ORARC TLMC LDT2C LDT1C SARC SDTC SSTC ALMC F169 MORA2C MORA1C PORA2C SLVSC RCFNC RCHPC CFINC
  • Page 2080A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F175 F176 F177 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG EWTIO ESTPIO ERDIO IOLNK F178 SRLNO3 SRLNO2 SRLNO1 SRLNO0 F179 F180 CLRCH8 CLRCH7 CLRCH6 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1 F181 F182 EACNT8 EACNT7 EACNT6 EACNT5 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1 F183 F184
  • Page 2081B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F200 F201 F202 F203 F204 F205 F206 F207 F208 EGBM8 EGBM7 EGBM6 EGBM5 EGBM4 EGBM3 EGBM2 EGBM1 F209 F210 F211 F212 F213 F214 F215 F216 F217 F218 F219 F220 F221 F222 F223 F224 2055
  • Page 2082A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F225 F226 F227 F228 F229 F230 F231 F232 F233 F234 F235 F236 F237 F238 F239 F240 F241 F242 F243 F244 F245 F246 F247 F248 F249 2056
  • Page 2083B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F250 F251 F252 F253 F254 F255 F256 F257 F258 F259 F260 F261 F262 F263 F264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN5 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1 F265 SPWRN9 F266 ORARD TLMD LDT2D LDT1D SARD SDTD SSTD ALMD F267 MORA2D MORA1D PORA2D SLVSD RCFND RCHPD C
  • Page 2084A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F275 F276 UO023 UO022 UO021 UO020 UO019 UO018 UO017 UO016 F277 UO031 UO030 UO029 UO028 UO027 UO026 UO025 UO024 F278 F279 F280 UO207 UO206 UO205 UO204 UO203 UO202 UO201 UO200 F281 UO215 UO214 UO213 UO212 UO211 UO210 UO209 UO208 F282 UO22
  • Page 2085B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F300 F301 F302 F303 F304 F305 F306 F307 F308 F309 F310 F311 F312 F313 F314 F315 2059
  • Page 2086A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 A.1.2 Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as follows: Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/ 160is/180is List of Addresses (Two–path CNC PMC X000– MT G000– Control) Path 1 F000– Y000– G1000– Path 2 F1000– Signals addresses for each path are usua
  • Page 2087B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC MT → PMC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X000 X001 X002 X003 ESKIP -MIT2 #1 +MIT2 #1 -MIT1 #1 +MIT1 #1 ZAE #1 XAE #1 SKIP #1 (T series) X004 SKIP6 #1 SKIP5 #1 SKIP4 #1 SKIP3 #1 SKIP2 #1 SKIP8 #1 SKIP7 #1 ESKIP ZAE #1 YAE #1 XAE #1 SKIP #1 SKIP5 #1 S
  • Page 2088A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 PMC → CNC Path 1 Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G000 ED7 #1 ED6 #1 ED5 #1 ED4 #1 ED3 #1 ED2 #1 ED1 #1 ED0 #1 G001 ED15 #1 ED14 #1 ED13 #1 ED12 #1 ED11 #1 ED10 #1 ED9 #1 ED8 #1 G002 ESTB #1 EA6 #1 EA5 #1 EA4 #1 EA3 #1 EA2 #1 EA1 #1 EA0 #1 G003 G004
  • Page 2089B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G025 EPNS#1 EPN13 #1 EPN12 #1 EPN11 #1 EPN10 #1 EPN9 #1 EPN8 #1 G026 *SSTP4 #1 SWS4 #1 PC4SLC #1 PC3SLC #1 G027 CON #1 *SSTP3 #1 *SSTP2 #1 *SSTP1 #1 SWS3 #1 SWS2 #1 SWS1 #1 G028 PC2SLC #1 SPSTP #1 *SCPF #1 *SUCPF #1 GR2 #1 GR1 #1 G029 *
  • Page 2090A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G050 *TLV9 #1 *TLV8 #1 G051 *CHLD #1 CHPST #1 *CHP8 #1 *CHP4 #1 *CHP2 #1 *CHP0 #1 G052 G053 CDZ #1 SMZ #1 UINT #1 TMRON#1 G054 UI007 #1 UI006 #1 UI005 #1 UI004 #1 UI003 #1 UI002 #1 UI001 #1 UI000 #1 G055 UI015 #1 UI014 #1 UI013 #1 UI012
  • Page 2091B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G075 RCHB #1 RSLB #1 INTGB #1 SOCNB #1 MCFNB #1 SPSLB #1 *ESPB #1 ARSTB #1 G076 RCHHGB #1 MFNHGB #1 INCMDB #1 OVRB #1 DEFMDB #1 NRROB#1 ROTAB#1 INDXB #1 G077 DSCNB #1 SORSLB #1 MPOFB#1 SLVB#1 MORCMB #1 G078 SHA07 #1 SHA06 #1 SHA05 #1 SH
  • Page 2092A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G100 +J8#1 +J7#1 +J6#1 +J5#1 +J4 #1 +J3 #1 +J2 #1 +J1 #1 G101 G102 -J8 #1 -J7 #1 -J6 #1 -J5 #1 -J4 #1 -J3 #1 -J2 #1 -J1 #1 G103 G104 +EXL8 #1 +EXL7 #1 +EXL6 #1 +EXL5 #1 +EXL4 #1 +EXL3 #1 +EXL2 #1 +EXL1 #1 G105 -EXL8 #1 -EXL7 #1 -EXL6 #1
  • Page 2093B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G124 DTCH8 #1 DTCH7 #1 DTCH6 #1 DTCH5 #1 DTCH4 #1 DTCH3 #1 DTCH2 #1 DTCH1 #1 G125 IUDD8 #1 IUDD7 #1 IUDD6 #1 IUDD5 #1 IUDD4 #1 IUDD3 #1 IUDD2 #1 IUDD1 #1 G126 SVF8 #1 SVF7 #1 SVF6 #1 SVF5 #1 SVF4 #1 SVF3 #1 SVF2 #1 SVF1 #1 G127 G128 MIX
  • Page 2094A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G149 EID31A #1 EID30A #1 EID29A #1 EID28A #1 EID27A #1 EID26A #1 EID25A #1 EID24A #1 G150 DRNE#1 RTE #1 OVCE#1 ROV2E#1 ROV1E#1 G151 *FV7E#1 *FV6E#1 *FV5E#1 *FV4E#1 *FV3E#1 *FV2E#1 *FV1E#1 *FV0E#1 G152 G153 G154 EBUFB #1 ECLRB #1 ESTPB #
  • Page 2095B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G174 G175 G176 G177 G178 EBUFD #1 ECLRD #1 ESTPD #1 ESOFD #1 ESBKD #1 EMBUFD #1 ELCKZD #1 EFIND#1 G179 EMSBKD #1 EC6D #1 EC5D #1 EC4D #1 EC3D #1 EC2D #1 EC1D #1 EC0D #1 G180 EIF7D#1 EIF6D#1 EIF5D#1 EIF4D#1 EIF3D#1 EIF2D#1 EIF1D#1 EIF0D#
  • Page 2096A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G199 G200 EASIP8 #1 EASIP7 #1 EASIP6 #1 EASIP5 #1 EASIP4 #1 EASIP3 #1 EASIP2 #1 EASIP1 #1 G201 JGRD3 #1 JGRD2 #1 JGRD1 #1 G202 G203 G204 MRDYC #1 ORCMC #1 SFRC#1 SRVC#1 CTH1C #1 CTH2C #1 TLMHC#1 TLMLC #1 G205 RCHC#1 RSLC #1 INTGC #1 SOC
  • Page 2097B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G224 G225 G226 G227 G228 G229 G230 G231 G232 G233 G234 G235 G236 G237 G238 G239 G240 G241 G242 G243 G244 G245 G246 G247 G248 2071
  • Page 2098A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G249 G250 G251 G252 G253 G254 G255 G256 G257 G258 G259 G260 G261 G262 G263 G264 G265 G266 MRDYD #1 ORCMD #1 SFRD#1 SRVD#1 CTH1D #1 CTH2D #1 TLMHD#1 TLMLD #1 G267 RCHD #1 RSLD#1 INTGD #1 SOCND#1 MCFND#1 SPSLD #1 *ESPD #1 ARSTD #1 G268 RC
  • Page 2099B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G274 G275 G276 UI107 #1 UI106 #1 UI105 #1 UI104 #1 UI103 #1 UI102 #1 UI101 #1 UI100 #1 G277 UI115 #1 UI114 #1 UI113 #1 UI112 #1 UI111 #1 UI110 #1 UI109 #1 UI108 #1 G278 UI123 #1 UI122 #1 UI121 #1 UI120 #1 UI119 #1 UI118 #1 UI117 #1 UI11
  • Page 2100A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G299 G300 G301 G302 G303 G304 G305 G306 G307 G308 G309 G310 G311 G312 G313 G314 G315 G316 G317 G318 G319 2074
  • Page 2101B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC PMC → CNC Path 2 Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1000 ED7#2 ED6#2 ED5#2 ED4#2 ED3#2 ED2#2 ED1#2 ED0#2 G1001 ED15 #2 ED14 #2 ED13 #2 ED12 #2 ED11 #2 ED10 #2 ED9#2 ED8#2 G1002 ESTB #2 EA6#2 EA5#2 EA4#2 EA3#2 EA2#2 EA1#2 EA0#2 G1003 G1004 MFIN3#2 MFIN
  • Page 2102A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1025 EPNS#2 EPN13 #2 EPN12 #2 EPN11 #2 EPN10 #2 EPN9 #2 EPN8 #2 G1026 *SSTP4 #2 SWS4 #2 PC4SLC #2 PC3SLC #2 G1027 CON #2 *SSTP3 #2 *SSTP2 #2 *SSTP1 #2 SWS3 #2 SWS2 #2 SWS1 #2 G1028 PC2SLC #2 SPSTP #2 *SCPF #2 *SUCPF #2 GR2#2 GR1#2 G102
  • Page 2103B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1050 *TLV9 #2 *TLV8 #2 G1051 *CHLD #2 CHPST #2 *CHP8 #2 *CHP4 #2 *CHP2 #2 *CHP0 #2 G1052 G1053 CDZ #2 SMZ #2 UINT#2 TMRON#2 G1054 UI007 #2 UI006 #2 UI005 #2 UI004 #2 UI003 #2 UI002 #2 UI001 #2 UI000 #2 G1055 UI015 #2 UI014 #2 UI013 #2
  • Page 2104A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1075 RCHB #2 RSLB #2 INTGB #2 SOCNB #2 MCFNB #2 SPSLB #2 *ESPB #2 ARSTB #2 G1076 RCHHGB #2 MFNHGB #2 INCMDB #2 OVRB#2 DEFMDB #2 NRROB#2 ROTAB#2 INDXB #2 G1077 DSCNB #2 SORSLB #2 MPOFB #2 SLVB#2 MORCMB #2 G1078 SHA07 #2 SHA06 #2 SHA05 #
  • Page 2105B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1100 +J8#2 +J7#2 +J6#2 +J5#2 +J4#2 +J3#2 +J2#2 +J1#2 G1101 G1102 -J8#2 -J7#2 -J6#2 -J5#2 -J4#2 -J3#2 -J2#2 -J1#2 G1103 G1104 +EXL8 #2 +EXL7 #2 +EXL6 #2 +EXL5 #2 +EXL4 #2 +EXL3 #2 +EXL2 #2 +EXL1 #2 G1105 -EXL8 #2 -EXL7 #2 -EXL6 #2 -EXL5
  • Page 2106A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1124 DTCH8 #2 DTCH7 #2 DTCH6 #2 DTCH5 #2 DTCH4 #2 DTCH3 #2 DTCH2 #2 DTCH1 #2 G1125 IUDD8 #2 IUDD7 #2 IUDD6 #2 IUDD5 #2 IUDD4 #2 IUDD3 #2 IUDD2 #2 IUDD1 #2 G1126 SVF8#2 SVF7#2 SVF6#2 SVF5#2 SVF4#2 SVF3#2 SVF2#2 SVF1#2 G1127 G1128 G1129
  • Page 2107B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1149 EID31A #2 EID30A #2 EID29A #2 EID28A #2 EID27A #2 EID26A #2 EID25A #2 EID24A #2 G1150 DRNE#2 RTE#2 OVCE#2 ROV2E#2 ROV1E#2 G1151 *FV7E#2 *FV6E#2 *FV5E#2 *FV4E#2 *FV3E#2 *FV2E#2 *FV1E#2 *FV0E#2 G1152 G1153 G1154 EBUFB #2 ECLRB #2 ES
  • Page 2108A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1174 G1175 G1176 G1177 G1178 EBUFD #2 ECLRD #2 ESTPD #2 ESOFD #2 ESBKD #2 EMBUFD #2 ELCKZD #2 EFIND#2 G1179 EMSBKD #2 EC6D #2 EC5D #2 EC4D #2 EC3D #2 EC2D #2 EC1D #2 EC0D #2 G1180 EIF7D #2 EIF6D #2 EIF5D #2 EIF4D #2 EIF3D #2 EIF2D #2 E
  • Page 2109B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1199 G1200 EASIP8 #2 EASIP7 #2 EASIP6 #2 EASIP5 #2 EASIP4 #2 EASIP3 #2 EASIP2 #2 EASIP1 #2 G1201 JGRD3 #2 JGRD2 #2 JGRD1 #2 G1202 G1203 G1204 MRDYC #2 ORCMC #2 SFRC#2 SRVC#2 CTH1C #2 CTH2C #2 TLMHC#2 TLMLC #2 G1205 RCHC#2 RSLC #2 INTGC
  • Page 2110A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1224 G1225 G1226 G1227 G1228 G1229 G1230 G1231 G1232 G1233 G1234 G1235 G1236 G1237 G1238 G1239 G1240 G1241 G1242 G1243 G1244 G1245 G1246 G1247 G1248 2084
  • Page 2111B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1249 G1250 G1251 G1252 G1253 G1254 G1255 G1256 G1257 G1258 G1259 G1260 G1261 G1262 G1263 G1264 G1265 G1266 MRDYD #2 ORCMD #2 SFRD#2 SRVD#2 CTH1D #2 CTH2D #2 TLMHD#2 TLMLD #2 G1267 RCHD #2 RSLD#2 INTGD #2 SOCND#2 MCFND#2 SPSLD #2 *ESPD
  • Page 2112A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1274 G1275 G276 UI107 #2 UI106 #2 UI105 #2 UI104 #2 UI103 #2 UI102 #2 UI101 #2 UI100 #2 G277 UI115 #2 UI114 #2 UI113 #2 UI112 #2 UI111 #2 UI110 #2 UI109 #2 UI108 #2 G278 UI123 #2 UI122 #2 UI121 #2 UI120 #2 UI119 #2 UI118 #2 UI117 #2 UI
  • Page 2113B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G1299 G1300 G1301 G1302 G1303 G1304 G1305 G1306 G1307 G1308 G1309 G1310 G1311 G1312 G1313 G1314 G1315 G1316 G1317 G1318 G1319 2087
  • Page 2114A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 CNC Path 1 → PMC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F000 OP #1 SA#1 STL #1 SPL #1 RWD#1 F001 MA#1 TAP#1 ENB#1 DEN#1 BAL#1 RST #1 AL#1 F002 MDRN#1 CUT #1 SRNMV#1 THRD#1 CSS#1 RPDO #1 INCH#1 F003 MTCHIN#1 MEDT #1 MMEM #1 MRMT #1 MMDI#1 MJ#1 MH#1 MINC#1 F
  • Page 2115B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F025 S31 #1 S30 #1 S29 #1 S28 #1 S27 #1 S26 #1 S25 #1 S24 #1 F026 T07 #1 T06 #1 T05 #1 T04 #1 T03 #1 T02 #1 T01 #1 T00 #1 F027 T15 #1 T14 #1 T13 #1 T12 #1 T11 #1 T10 #1 T09 #1 T08 #1 F028 T23 #1 T22 #1 T21 #1 T20 #1 T19 #1 T18 #1 T17 #1
  • Page 2116A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F050 MORA2B #1 MORA1B #1 PORA2B #1 SLVSB #1 RCFNB #1 RCHPB #1 CFINB#1 CHPB #1 F051 EXOFB#1 SORENB #1 MSOVRB #1 INCSTB #1 PC1DTB #1 F052 F053 EKENB BGEACT #1 RPALM#1 RPBSY #1 PRGDPL INHKY F054 UO007 #1 UO006 #1 UO005 #1 UO004 #1 UO003 #1
  • Page 2117B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F075 SPO #1 KEYO#1 DRNO#1 MLKO#1 SBKO#1 BDTO #1 F076 ROV2O#1 ROV1O#1 RTAP#1 MP2O #1 MP1O #1 F077 RTO#1 HS1DO #1 HS1CO #1 HS1BO #1 HS1AO#1 F078 *FV7O#1 *FV6O#1 *FV5O#1 *FV4O#1 *FV3O#1 *FV2O#1 *FV1O#1 *FV0O#1 F079 *JV7O#1 *JV6O#1 *JV5O#1
  • Page 2118A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F100 ZP48 #1 ZP47 #1 ZP46 #1 ZP45 #1 ZP44 #1 ZP43 #1 ZP42 #1 ZP41 #1 F101 F102 MV8#1 MV7#1 MV6#1 MV5#1 MV4#1 MV3#1 MV2#1 MV1#1 F103 F104 INP8#1 INP7#1 INP6#1 INP5#1 INP4#1 INP3#1 INP2#1 INP1#1 F105 F106 MVD8#1 MVD7#1 MVD6#1 MVD5#1 MVD4#
  • Page 2119B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F125 F126 -OT8 #1 -OT7 #1 -OT6 #1 -OT5 #1 -OT4 #1 -OT3 #1 -OT2 #1 -OT4 #1 F127 F128 F129 *EAXSL #1 EOV0#1 F130 EBSYA#1 EOTNA#1 EOTPA#1 EGENA#1 EDENA #1 EIALA#1 ECKZA #1 EINPA#1 F131 EABUFA#1 EMFA#1 F132 EM28A #1 EM24A #1 EM22A #1 EM21A
  • Page 2120A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F150 F151 EM48D #1 EM44D #1 EM42D #1 EM41D #1 EM38D #1 EM34D #1 EM32D #1 EM31D #1 F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 ORARC#1 TLMC #1 LDT2C #1 LDT1C #1 SARC #1 SDTC #1 SSTC #1 ALMC #1 F16
  • Page 2121B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F175 F176 F177 EDGN#1 EPARM#1 EVAR#1 EPRG#1 EWTIO#1 ESTPIO #1 ERDIO#1 IOLNK#1 F178 SRLNO3 #1 SRLNO2 #1 SRLNO1 #1 SRLNO0 #1 F179 F180 CLRCH8 #1 CLRCH7 #1 CLRCH6 #1 CLRCH5 #1 CLRCH4 #1 CLRCH3 #1 CLRCH2 #1 CLRCH1 #1 F181 F182 EACNT8#1 EACN
  • Page 2122A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F200 F201 F202 F203 F204 F205 F206 F207 F208 F209 F210 F211 F212 F213 F214 F215 F216 F217 F218 F219 F220 F221 F222 F223 F224 2096
  • Page 2123B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F225 F226 F227 F228 F229 F230 F231 F232 F233 F234 F235 F236 F237 F238 F239 F240 F241 F242 F243 F244 F245 F246 F247 F248 F249 2097
  • Page 2124A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F250 F251 F252 F253 F254 F255 F256 F257 F258 F259 F260 F261 F262 F263 F264 SPWRN8 #1 SPWRN7 #1 SPWRN6 #1 SPWRN5 #1 SPWRN4 #1 SPWRN3 #1 SPWRN2 #1 SPWRN1 #1 F265 SPWRN9 #1 F266 ORARD#1 TLMD #1 LDT2D #1 LDT1D #1 SARD#1 SDTD #1 SSTD #1 ALMD
  • Page 2125B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F275 F276 UO023 #1 UO022 #1 UO021 #1 UO020 #1 UO019 #1 UO018 #1 UO017 #1 UO016 #1 F277 UO031 #1 UO030 #1 UO029 #1 UO028 #1 UO02 7#1 UO026 #1 UO025 #1 UO024 #1 F278 F279 F280 UO207 #1 UO206 #1 UO205 #1 UO204 #1 UO203 #1 UO202 #1 UO201 #1
  • Page 2126A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F300 F301 F302 F303 F304 F305 F306 F307 F308 F309 F310 F311 F312 F313 F314 F315 2100
  • Page 2127B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC CNC Path 2→ PMC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1000 OP #2 SA#2 STL #2 SPL #2 RWD#2 F1001 MA#2 TAP#2 ENB#2 DEN#2 BAL#2 RST #2 AL#2 F1002 MDRN#2 CUT #2 SRNMV#2 THRD#2 CSS#2 RPDO #2 INCH#2 F1003 MTCHIN#2 MEDT #2 MMEM #2 MRMT #2 MMDI#2 MJ#2 MH#2 MINC#
  • Page 2128A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1025 S31 #2 S30 #2 S29 #2 S28 #2 S27 #2 S26 #2 S25 #2 S24 #2 F1026 T07 #2 T06 #2 T05 #2 T04 #2 T03 #2 T02 #2 T01 #2 T00 #2 F1027 T15 #2 T14 #2 T13 #2 T12 #2 T11 #2 T10 #2 T09 #2 T08 #2 F1028 T23 #2 T22 #2 T21 #2 T20 #2 T19 #2 T18 #2 T1
  • Page 2129B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1050 MORA2B #2 MORA1B #2 PORA2B #2 SLVSB #2 RCFNB #2 RCHPB #2 CFINB#2 CHPB #2 F1051 EXOFB#2 SORENB #2 MSOVRB #2 INCSTB #2 PC1DTB #2 F1052 F1053 BGEACT #2 RPALM#2 RPBSY #2 F1054 UO007 #2 UO006 #2 UO005 #2 UO004 #2 UO003 #2 UO002 #2 UO00
  • Page 2130A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1075 SPO #2 KEYO#2 DRNO#2 MLKO#2 SBKO#2 BDTO #2 F1076 ROV2O#2 ROV1O#2 RTAP#2 MP2O #2 MP1O #2 F1077 RTO#2 HS1DO #2 HS1CO #2 HS1BO #2 HS1AO#2 F1078 *FV7O#2 *FV6O#2 *FV5O#2 *FV4O#2 *FV3O#2 *FV2O#2 *FV1O#2 *FV0O#2 F1079 *JV7O#2 *JV6O#2 *JV
  • Page 2131B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1100 ZP48 #2 ZP47 #2 ZP46 #2 ZP45 #2 ZP44 #2 ZP43 #2 ZP42 #2 ZP41 #2 F1101 F1102 MV8#2 MV7#2 MV6#2 MV5#2 MV4#2 MV3#2 MV2#2 MV1#2 F1103 F1104 INP8#2 INP7#2 INP6#2 INP5#2 INP4#2 INP3#2 INP2#2 INP1#2 F1105 F1106 MVD8#2 MVD7#2 MVD6#2 MVD5#
  • Page 2132A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1125 F1126 -OT8 #2 -OT7 #2 -OT6 #2 -OT5 #2 -OT4 #2 -OT3 #2 -OT2 #2 -OT1 #2 F1127 F1128 F1129 *EAXSL #2 EOV0#2 F1130 EBSYA#2 EOTNA#2 EOTP #2 EGENA#2 EDENA #2 EIALA#2 ECKZA #2 EINPA#2 F1131 EABUFA#2 EMFA#2 F1132 EM28A #2 EM24A #2 EM22A #
  • Page 2133B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1150 F1151 EM48D #2 EM44D #2 EM42D #2 EM41D #2 EM38D #2 EM34D #2 EM32D #2 EM31D #2 F1152 F1153 F1154 F1155 F1156 F1157 F1158 F1159 F1160 F1161 F1162 F1163 F1164 F1165 F1166 F1167 F1168 ORARC#2 TLMC #2 LDT2C #2 LDT1C #2 SARC #2 SDTC #2
  • Page 2134A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1175 F1176 F1177 EDGN#2 EPARM#2 EVAR#2 EPRG#2 EWTIO#2 ESTPIO #2 ERDIO#2 IOLNK#2 F1178 SRLNO3 #2 SRLNO2 #2 SRLNO1 #2 SRLNO0 #2 F1179 F1180 CLRCH8 #2 CLRCH7 #2 CLRCH6 #2 CLRCH5 #2 CLRCH4 #2 CLRCH3 #2 CLRCH2 #2 CLRCH1 #2 F1181 F1182 EACNT
  • Page 2135B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1200 F1201 F1202 F1203 F1204 F1205 F1206 F1207 F1208 F1209 F1210 F1211 F1212 F1213 F1214 F1215 F1216 F1217 F1218 F1219 F1220 F1221 F1222 F1223 F1224 2109
  • Page 2136A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1225 F1226 F1227 F1228 F1229 F1230 F1231 F1232 F1233 F1234 F1235 F1236 F1237 F1238 F1239 F1240 F1241 F1242 F1243 F1244 F1245 F1246 F1247 F1248 F1249 2110
  • Page 2137B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1250 F1251 F1252 F1253 F1254 F1255 F1256 F1257 F1258 F1259 F1260 F1261 F1262 F1263 F1264 SPWRN8 #2 SPWRN7 #2 SPWRN6 #2 SPWRN5 #2 SPWRN4 #2 SPWRN3 #2 SPWRN2 #2 SPWRN1 #2 F1265 SPWRN9 #2 F1266 ORARD#2 TLMD #2 LDT2D #2 LDT1D #2 SARD#2 SDT
  • Page 2138A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1275 F1276 UO023#2 UO022 #2 UO021 #2 UO020 #2 UO019 #2 UO018 #2 UO017 #2 UO016 #2 F1277 UO031 #2 UO030 #2 UO029 #2 UO028 #2 UO027 #2 UO026 #2 UO025 #2 UO024 #2 F1278 F1279 F1280 UO207 #2 UO206 #2 UO205 #2 UO204 #2 UO203 #2 UO202 #2 UO2
  • Page 2139B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F1300 F1301 F1302 F1303 F1304 F1305 F1306 F1307 F1308 F1309 F1310 F1311 F1312 F1313 F1314 F1315 2113
  • Page 2140A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 A.1.3 The figure below illustrates the addresses of interface signals between the Series 21i/210i/210is CNC and PMC. Address List CNC G000 ∼ PMC X000 ∼ MT F000 ∼ Y000 ∼ Following shows table of addresses: In an item where both T series and M series are
  • Page 2141B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC MT → PMC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X000 X001 X002 X003 SKIP ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE (T series) X004 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 SKIP ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE (M series) X005 X006 X007 X008 *ESP X009 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2
  • Page 2142A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 D T series/M series PMC → CNC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 G003 G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN G005 BFIN AFL BFIN TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN G006
  • Page 2143B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G025 G026 G027 CON *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1 G028 PC2SLC SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF GR2 GR1 G029 *SSTP SOR SAR GR31 GR21 G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0 G031 PKESS2 PKESS1 G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I G033
  • Page 2144A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G050 *TLV9 *TLV8 G051 G052 RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0 G053 CDZ SMZ UINT TMRON G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000 G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008 G056 UI023 UI022 UI021
  • Page 2145B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB G077 DSCNB SORSLB MPOFB SLVB MORCMB G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00 G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08 G080 SHB07
  • Page 2146A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G100 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 G101 G102 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1 G103 G104 G105 G106 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 G107 G108 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1 G109 G110 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1 G111 G112 –LM5 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1 G113 G114 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1 G
  • Page 2147B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G124 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1 G125 IUDD5 IUDD4 IUDD3 IUDD2 IUDD1 G126 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1 G127 G128 G129 G130 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 G131 G132 +MIT5 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1 G133 G134 –MIT5 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1 G135 G136 E
  • Page 2148A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E G152 G153 G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB ELCKZB EFINB G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B
  • Page 2149B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G174 G175 G176 G177 G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD ELCKZD EFIND G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D G1
  • Page 2150A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G199 G200 EASIP5 EASIP4 EASIP3 EASIP2 EASIP1 G201 JGRD3 JGRD2 JGRD1 G202 G203 G204 G205 G206 G207 G208 G209 G210 G211 G212 G213 G214 G215 G216 G217 G218 G219 G220 G221 G222 G223 2124
  • Page 2151B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G224 G225 G226 G227 G228 G229 G230 G231 G232 G233 G234 G235 G236 G237 G238 G239 G240 G241 G242 G243 G244 G245 G246 G247 G248 2125
  • Page 2152A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G249 G250 G251 G252 G253 G254 G255 G256 G257 G258 G259 G260 G261 G262 G263 G264 G265 G266 G267 G268 G269 G270 G271 G272 G273 2126
  • Page 2153B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G274 G275 G276 UI107 UI106 UI105 UI104 UI103 UI102 UI101 UI100 G277 UI115 UI114 UI113 UI112 UI111 UI110 UI109 UI108 G278 UI123 UI122 UI121 UI120 UI119 UI118 UI117 UI116 G279 UI131 UI130 UI129 UI128 UI127 UI126 UI125 UI124 G280 UI207 UI2
  • Page 2154A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G299 G300 G301 G302 G303 G304 G305 G306 G307 G308 G309 G310 G311 2128
  • Page 2155B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC CNC → PMC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL F002 MDRN CUT SRNMV THRD CSS RPDO INCH F003 MTCHIN MEDT MMEM MRMT MMDI MJ MH MINC F004 MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1 F005 MBDT9 MBDT8 MBDT7 MBDT6 MBDT5
  • Page 2156A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24 F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00 F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08 F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16 F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24 F030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00 F031 B15 B14 B
  • Page 2157B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F050 MORA2B MORA1B PORA2B SLVSB RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB F051 EXOFB SORENB MSOVRB INCSTB PC1DTB F052 F053 EKENB BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000 F055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010
  • Page 2158A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO F076 ROV2O ROV1O RTAP MP2O MP1O F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O F080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12
  • Page 2159B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F100 ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41 F101 F102 MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1 F103 F104 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1 F105 F106 MVD5 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1 F107 F108 MMI5 MMI4 MMI3 MMI2 MMI1 F109 F110 MDTCH5 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1 F111 F112 EADEN5 EADEN4 EA
  • Page 2160A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F125 F126 –OT5 –OT4 –OT3 –OT2 –OT1 F127 F128 F129 *EAXSL EOV0 F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA F131 EABUFA EMFA F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINP
  • Page 2161B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F150 F151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 F169 F170 F171 F172 PBATL PBATZ F173 F174 2135
  • Page 2162A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F175 F176 F177 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG EWTIO ESTPIO ERDIO IOLNK F178 SRLNO3 SRLNO2 SRLNO1 SRLNO0 F179 F180 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1 F181 F182 EACNT5 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1 F183 F184 F185 F186 F187 F188 F189 F190 F191 F192 F1
  • Page 2163B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F200 F201 F202 F203 F204 F205 F206 F207 F208 F209 F210 F211 F212 F213 F214 F215 F216 F217 F218 F219 F220 F221 F222 F223 F224 2137
  • Page 2164A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F225 F226 F227 F228 F229 F230 F231 F232 F233 F234 F235 F236 F237 F238 F239 F240 F241 F242 F243 F244 F245 F246 F247 F248 F249 2138
  • Page 2165B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F250 F251 F252 F253 F254 F255 F256 F257 F258 F259 F260 F261 F262 F263 F264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN5 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1 F265 SPWRN9 F266 F267 F268 F269 F270 F271 F272 F273 F274 2139
  • Page 2166A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F275 F276 UO023 UO022 UO021 UO020 UO019 UO018 UO017 UO016 F277 UO031 UO030 UO029 UO028 UO027 UO026 UO025 UO024 F278 F279 F280 UO207 UO206 UO205 UO204 UO203 UO202 UO201 UO200 F281 UO215 UO214 UO213 UO212 UO211 UO210 UO209 UO208 F282 UO22
  • Page 2167B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F300 F301 F302 F303 F304 F305 F306 F307 F308 F309 F310 F311 F312 F313 F314 F315 2141
  • Page 2168A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 A.1.4 The following dialog shows the relationships between the addresses for Series 20i Address List the interface signals between the CNC and PMC. CNC G000 ∼ PMC X000 ∼ MT F000 ∼ Y000 ∼ If a signal in an item common to both T and F series is disabled
  • Page 2169B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC D T series and F series PMC → CNC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 G003 G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN G005 AFL TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN G006 SKIPP
  • Page 2170A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G025 G026 G027 G028 GR2 GR1 G029 *SSTP SOR SAR G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0 G031 G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I G034 G035 G036 G037 G038 G039 G040 PRC G041 HS2ID HS2IC
  • Page 2171B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G050 G051 *CHLD CHPST *CHP8 *CHP4 *CHP2 *CHP0 G052 RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0 G053 CDZ SMZ UINT TMRON G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000 G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008
  • Page 2172A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G075 G076 G077 G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00 G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08 G080 G081 G082 G083 G084 G085 G086 –Ja +Ja –Jg +Jg G087 MP42 MP41 MP32 MP31 MP22 MP21 G088 HS4ID HS4IC HS4IB HS4IA G089 G090 G091 SRLNI3 SR
  • Page 2173B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G100 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 G101 G102 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1 G103 G104 G105 G106 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 G107 G108 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1 G109 G110 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1 G111 G112 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1 G113 G114 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1 G115 G116 *–L4 *–L3 *–L2 *–L1 G11
  • Page 2174A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G124 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1 G125 IUDD4 IUDD3 IUDD2 IUDD1 G126 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1 G127 G128 G129 G130 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 G131 G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1 G133 G134 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1 G135 G136 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1 G137 G138 G139
  • Page 2175B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E G152 G153 G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB ELCKZB EFINB G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B
  • Page 2176A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G174 G175 G176 G177 G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD ELCKZD EFIND G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D G1
  • Page 2177B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G199 IOLBH3 IOLBH2 G200 G201 JGRD3 JGRD2 JGRD1 G202 G203 G204 G205 G206 G207 G208 G209 L L G276 UI107 UI106 UI105 UI104 UI103 UI102 UI101 UI100 G277 UI115 UI114 UI113 UI112 UI111 UI110 UI109 UI108 G278 UI123 UI122 UI121 UI120 UI119 UI11
  • Page 2178A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 CNC → PMC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL F002 MDRN CUT SRNMV THRD CSS RPDO INCH F003 MTCHIN MEDT MMEM MRMT MMDI MJ MH F004 MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1 F005 F006 F007 TF SF EFD MF F008 MF3 MF
  • Page 2179B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24 F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00 F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08 F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16 F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24 F030 F031 F032 F033 F034 SRSRDY SRSP1R GR3O GR2O GR
  • Page 2180A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F050 F051 F052 F053 EKENB BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000 F055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010 UO009 UO008 F056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100 F057 UO115 UO114 UO
  • Page 2181B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO F076 ROV2O ROV1O RTAP MP2O MP1O F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O F080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12
  • Page 2182A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F100 F101 F102 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1 F103 F104 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1 F105 F106 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1 F107 F108 MMI4 MMI3 MMI2 MMI1 F109 F110 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1 F111 F112 EADEN4 EADEN3 EADEN2 EADEN1 F113 F114 TRQL2 TRQL1 F115 F116 F117 F1
  • Page 2183B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F125 F126 F127 F128 F129 *EAXSL EOV0 F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA F131 EABUFA EMFA F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB F134 EABUFB EMFB F135 E
  • Page 2184A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F150 F151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 F169 F170 F171 F172 PBATL PBATZ F173 F174 2158
  • Page 2185B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F175 F176 F177 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG EWTIO ESTPIO ERDIO IOLNK F178 SRLNO3 SRLNO2 SRLNO1 SRLNO0 F179 F180 F181 F182 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1 F183 F184 F185 F186 F187 F188 F189 F190 F191 F192 F193 F194 F195 L L F264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6
  • Page 2186A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F265 SPWRN9 L L F276 UO023 UO022 UO021 UO020 UO019 UO018 UO017 UO016 F277 UO031 UO030 UO029 UO028 UO027 UO026 UO025 UO024 F278 F279 F280 UO207 UO206 UO205 UO204 UO203 UO202 UO201 UO200 F281 UO215 UO214 UO213 UO212 UO211 UO210 UO209 UO20
  • Page 2187B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A.2 SIGNAL SUMMARY A.2.1 Signal Summary f : Available F : Available only with (In Order of Functions) 2–path control – : Unavailable T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Power Mate background operation BGEN G092#4 f f 13.8 sign
  • Page 2188A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series αi spindle warning F264#0 to #7, Spindle warning detailed signals SPWRN1 to 9 f f 18.4 interface F265#0 Alarm signal AL F001#0 f f Alarm signal 2.4 Battery alarm signal BAL F001#2 f f Abnorm
  • Page 2189B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series External key input mode selection ENBKY G066#1 f f signal Key code signals EKC0 to EKC7 G098 f f External key input Key code read signal EKSET G066#7 f f 15.5 Key code read completion signal
  • Page 2190A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Screen erase/automatic Automatic screen erase disable signal *CRTOF G062#1 f f 12.1.19 screen erase 1.13 1.14.1 Retract signal RTRCT G066#4 f f 1.14.2 Hobbing machine 1.14.4 function 1.16 (M
  • Page 2191B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series XAE X004#0 f f Automatic tool length YAE X004#1 — f measurement (M Measuring position reached signals 14.2 series)/automatic ZAE X004#2 — f tool offset (T series) ZAE X004#1 f — Tool offset
  • Page 2192A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Cycle start signal ST G007#2 f f Feed hold signal *SP G008#5 f f Cycle start/feed hold Automatic operation signal OP F000#7 f f 5.1 Cycle start lamp signal STL F000#5 f f Feed hold lamp sign
  • Page 2193B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series TLMLA G070#0 f f Torque limit command LOW signals TLMLB G074#0 f f (serial spindle) TLMLC G204#0 f f TLMLD G266#0 f f TLMHA G070#1 f f Torque limit command HIGH signals TLMHB G074#1 f f (ser
  • Page 2194A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series SPSLA G071#2 f f Spindle selection signals SPSLB G075#2 f f (serial spindle) SPSLC G205#2 f f SPSLD G267#2 f f MCFNA G071#3 f f Power line switch completion signals MCFNB G075#3 f f (serial
  • Page 2195B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series DEFMDA G072#3 f f Differential speed mode command DEFMDB G076#3 f f signals (serial spindle) DEFMDC G206#3 f f DEFMDD G268#3 f f OVRA G072#4 f f OVRB G076#4 f f Analog override signals (seri
  • Page 2196A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series ALMA F045#0 f f ALMB F049#0 f f Alarm signals (serial spindle) ALMC F168#0 f f ALMD F266#0 f f SSTA F045#1 f f SSTB F049#1 f f Speed zero signals (serial spindle) SSTC F168#1 f f SSTD F266#1
  • Page 2197B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series CFINA F046#1 f f Spindle switch completion signals CFINB F050#1 f f (serial spindle) CFINC F169#1 f f CFIND F267#1 f f RCHPA F046#2 f f RCHPB F050#2 f f Output switch signals (serial spindle
  • Page 2198A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series EXOFA F047#4 f f Spindle serial EXOFB F051#4 f f 9.2 output/spindle Motor activation off status signal analog output EXOFC F170#4 f f 9.15 EXOFD F268#4 f f Spindle stop signal *SSTP G029#6 f
  • Page 2199B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Check mode handle valid signal MCHK G067#3 f — Check mode signal MMOD G067#2 f — Check mode backward movement MRVM G067#1 f — inhibition signal Manual Handle 5.3.4 Retrace Check mode backwar
  • Page 2200A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Start lock signal STLK G007#1 f — Interlock signal *IT G008#0 f f Interlock signal for each axis *IT1 to *IT8 G130 f f Manual feed interlock signal for each +MIT1, +MIT2 X004#2, #4 f — axis
  • Page 2201B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Software operator’s panel signal HS1AO F077#0 f f (HS1A) Software operator’s panel signal HS1BO F077#1 f f (HS1B) Software operator’s panel signal HS1CO F077#2 f f (HS1C) Software operator’s
  • Page 2202A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Canned cycle (M series)/multiple repetitive turning Chamfering signal CDZ G053#7 f — 11.9 canned cycle (T series) Chuck/tailstock Tailstock barrier selection signal *TSB G060#7 f — 2.3.4 bar
  • Page 2203B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Tool post Tool post interference check signal TICHK F064#6 F — interference check 2.3.5 (T series, two–path control) Tool post interference alarm signal TIALM F064#7 F — Rapid traverse overr
  • Page 2204A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series ESTPA G142#5 f f Axis control temporary stop signals ESTPB G154#5 f f (PMC axis control) ESTPC G166#5 f f ESTPD G178#5 f f ESBKA G142#3 f f ESBKB G154#3 f f Block stop signals (PMC axis cont
  • Page 2205B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series EINPA F130#0 f f EINPB F133#0 f f In–position signals (PMC axis control) EINPC F136#0 f f EINPD F139#0 f f ECKZA F130#1 f f Following zero checking signals (PMC ECKZB F133#1 f f axis control
  • Page 2206A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Distribution completion signals (PMC EADEN1 to EADEN8 F112 f f axis control) EABUFA F131#1 f f PMC axis control/PMC axis EABUFB F134#1 f f 15.1 speed control Buffer full signals (PMC axis co
  • Page 2207B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Flexible synchronization control mode MTA to MTD G197#0 to #3 — f select signals Flexible synchronization Flexible synchronization control mode 1.15 control select signal switching accepted
  • Page 2208A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Manual absolute Manual absolute signal *ABSM G006#2 f f on/off 5.4 Manual absolute check signal MABSM F004#2 f f SWS1 G027#0 f f Multi–spindle control SWS2 G027#1 f f (T series) Spindle sele
  • Page 2209B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Function Signal name Symbol Address Section series series Rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT G062#6 — f Retraction for rigid Rigid tapping retraction completion 5.13 tapping RTPT F066#1 — f signal High–precision HPCC mode signal MHPCC F066#
  • Page 2210A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 A.2.2 List of Signals f : Available (In Order of Symbols) F : Available only with 2–path control – : Unavailable T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item *+ED1 to *+ED8 External deceleration signal G118 f f 7.1.9 *+L1 to *+L8
  • Page 2211B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item *SSTP Spindle stop signal G029#6 f f 9.3 *SSTP1 G027#3 f f *SSTP2 G027#4 f f Individual spindle stop signals 9.10 *SSTP3 G027#5 f f * *SSTP4 G026#6 f f *SUCPF Spindle unclamp completion
  • Page 2212A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item ALMA F045#0 f f ALMB F049#0 f f Alarm signal (serial spindle) 9.2, 9.15 ALMC F168#0 f f ALMD F266#1 f f ALNGH Tool axis direction handle feed mode signal G023#7 – f 3.4.1 A AR0 to AR15
  • Page 2213B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item CON Cs contour control change signal G027#7 f f 9.9 COSP Spindle command signal F064#5 F – 9.4 CSFI1 Cs–axis coordinate establishment request signal G274#4 f f CSFO1 Cs–axis coordinate
  • Page 2214A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item EAX1 to EAX8 Control axis select signal (PMC axis control) G136 f f 15.1 EASIP1 to EASIP8 Axis control superimposed command signal G200 f f EBSYA F130#7 f f EBSYB Axis control command r
  • Page 2215B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item EGENA F130#4 f f EGENB F133#4 f f Axis moving signal (PMC axis control) EGENC F136#4 f f EGEND F139#4 f f EIALA F130#2 f f EIALB F133#2 f f Alarm signal (PMC axis control) EIALC F136#2
  • Page 2216A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item EMSBKA G143#7 f f EMSBKB Block stop disable signal G155#7 f f 15.1 EMSBKC (PMC axis control) G167#7 f f EMSBKD G179#7 f f ENB F001#4 f f 9.3 ENB2 F038#2 f – Spindle enable signal ENB3 F
  • Page 2217B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item ESTPA G142#5 f f ESTPB Axis control temporary stop signal (PMC axis G154#5 f f 15.1 ESTPC control) G166#5 f f ESTPD G178#5 f f ESTPIO Slave read/write stop signal F177#2 f f EVAR Slave
  • Page 2218A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item GR21 G029#0 f f G GR31 Gear selection signal (input) G029#2 f f 9.10 GR41 G031#4 f f HCAB2 Hard copy stop request acceptance flag F061#2 f f HCABT Hard copy stop request signal G067#6 f
  • Page 2219B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item INDXA G072#0 f f INDXB Orientation stop position change signal (serial G076#0 f f 9 2 9.15 9.2, 9 15 INDXC spindle) G206#0 f f INDXD G268#0 f f INHKY Key input disable signal F053#0 f f
  • Page 2220A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item MCFNA G071#3 f f MCFNB G075#3 f f Power line switch completion signal (serial spindle) 9.2, 9.15 MCFNC G205#3 f f MCFND G267#3 f f MCHK Check mode handle valid signal G067#3 f – 5.3.4 M
  • Page 2221B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item MMOD Check mode signal G067#2 f – 5.3.4 MNCHG Inversion inhibition signal F091#1 f – MORA1A F046#6 f f MORA1B Signal for completion of spindle orientation with a F050#6 f f MORA1C magne
  • Page 2222A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item MSPC One–rotation position manual set signal G066#5 f f 1.13 MSPCF One–rotation position setting completed signal F065#5 f f Flexible synchronization control mode select MTA to MTD G197
  • Page 2223B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item PC1DEA F047#0 f f PC1DEB Signal indicating the status of the detected F051#0 f f 9 2 9.15 9.2, 9 15 PC1DEC one rotation position coder signal (serial spindle) one-rotation F170#0 f f PC
  • Page 2224A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item RCFNA F046#3 f f RCFNB F050#3 f f Output switch completion signal (serial spindle) RCFNC F169#3 f f RCFND F1267#3 f f RCHA G071#7 f f RCHB G075#7 f f Power line status check signal (ser
  • Page 2225B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item RSLA G071#6 f f RSLB G075#6 f f Output switch request signal (serial spindle) 9.2, 9.15 RSLC G205#6 f f RSLD G267#6 f f RST Reset signal F001#1 f f 5.2 RT Manual rapid traverse selectio
  • Page 2226A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item SFRA G070#5 f f SFRB G074#5 f f CW command signal (serial spindle) 9.2, 9.15 SFRC G204#5 f f SFRD G266#5 f f SGN G033#5 f f SGN2 G035#5 f f Spindle motor command polarity select signal
  • Page 2227B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item SOR Spindle orientation signal G029#5 f f 9.3 SOV0 to SOV7 Spindle speed override signal G030 f f SPAL Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal F035#0 f f 9.6 SPL Feed hold lamp signa
  • Page 2228A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item SVF1 to SVF8 Servo off signal G126 f f 1.2.8 SVWRN1 to 4 Servo warning detail signals F093#4 to #7 f f 18.3 SWS1 G027#0 f f SWS2 G027#1 f f Spindle selection signals 9.10 SWS3 G027#2 f
  • Page 2229B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Group Symbol Signal name Address series series ce item TLMLA G070#0 f f TLMLB G074#0 f f Torque limit command LOW signal (serial spindle) 9.2, 9.15 TLMLC G204#0 f f TLMLD G266#0 f f TLNW New tool select signal F064#1 f f TLRST Tool change r
  • Page 2230A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 A.2.3 List of Signals f : Available F : Available only with (In Order of Addresses) 2–path control – : Unavailable T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item X004#0 XAE f f X004#1 YAE – f Measuring position reached signal 14.2 X004#1
  • Page 2231B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G007#1 Start lock signal STLK f – 2.5 G007#2 Cycle start signal ST f f 5.1 G007#4 Stroke check 3 release signal RLSOT3 f f 2.3.3 G007#5 Follow-up signal *FLWU f f 1.2.7 G007#6 Stored stroke l
  • Page 2232A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G027#3 *SSTP1 f f G027#4 Stop signal in each spindle *SSTP2 f f 9.10 G027#5 *SSTP3 f f G027#7 Cs contour control switch signal CON f f 9.9 G028#1,#2 Gear selection signal (input) GR1,GR2 f f
  • Page 2233B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G040#7 Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signal WOSET f – 14.4.2 G041#0 to #3 HS1IA to HS1ID f f G041#4 to #7 Manual handle interrupt axis selection signal HS2IA to HS2ID f f 3.3
  • Page 2234A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G061#0 Rigid tapping signal RGTAP f f 9.11 G061#4,#5 Rigid tap spindle select signal RGTSP1, RGTSP2 f – G062#1 Automatic erase CRT screen display cancel signal *CRTOF f f 12.1.19 G062#4 Conve
  • Page 2235B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item 9.2 G071#5 Signal for controlling velocity integration (serial spindle) INTGA f f 9.15 G071#6 Output switch request signal (serial spindle) RSLA f f 9.2 G071#7 Power line status check signal
  • Page 2236A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G076#0 Orientation stop position change signal (serial spindle) INDXB f f Rotation direction command while changing the G076#1 ROTAB f f orientation stop position signal (serial spindle) 92 9
  • Page 2237B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G098 Key code signal EKC0 to EKC7 f f 15.5 G100 +J1 to +J8 f f Feed axis and direction selection signal 3.1 G102 -J1 to -J8 f f G104 +EXL1 to +EXL8 f f Axis direction dependent stored stroke
  • Page 2238A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G142#0 Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC axis control) EFINA f f G142#1 Accumulated zero check signal ELCKZA f f G142#2 Buffering disable signal (PMC axis control) EMBUFA f f G142#3 B
  • Page 2239B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G150#6 Manual rapid traverse selection signal (PMC axis control) RTE f f G150#7 Dry run signal (PMC axis control) DRNE f f G151 Feedrate override signal (PMC axis control) *FV0E to *FV7E f f
  • Page 2240A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G190#0 to #6 Superimposed control axis selection signals OVLS1 to OVLS7 F – 1.9 G192 Each-axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal IGVRY1 to IGVRY8 f f 2.9 G197#0 to #3 Flexible synchronization cont
  • Page 2241B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G207#2 Motor power stop signal (serial spindle) MPOFC f f 9.2 G207#4 Disconnection detection disbale signal (serial spindle) DSCNC f f 9.15 G208#0 to G209#3 Spindle orientation stop position
  • Page 2242A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item G276 to G279 UI100 to UI131 G280 to G283 Input signals for custom macro (Extended signals) UI200 to UI231 f f 11.6.1 G284 to G287 UI300 to UI331 G292#7 Rotation area interference check disabl
  • Page 2243B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F007#2 Spindle-speed function strobe signal SF f f F007#3 Tool function strobe signal TF f f 8.1 F007#4 BF f – 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal F007#7 BF – f F008#0 External operation sig
  • Page 2244A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F045#2 Speed detection signal (serial spindle) SDTA f f F045#3 Speed arrival signal (serial spindle) SARA f f F045#4 Load detection signal 1 (serial spindle) LDT1A f f F045#5 Load detection s
  • Page 2245B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item Signal indicating the status of the detected one-rotation F051#0 PC1DTB f f position coder signal (serial spindle) 9.2 F051#1 Incremental method orientation signal (serial spindle) INCSTB f f
  • Page 2246A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item 1.13 1.14.1 F065#4 Retract completion signal RTRCTF f f 1.14.2 1.14.4 1.16 F065#5 One–rotation position setting completed signal MSPCF f f 1.13 1.13 F065#6 EGB mode signal SYNMOD – f 1.14 F06
  • Page 2247B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F082#2 Retrace-in-progress signal RVSL – f 11.15 F090#0 Servo axis abnormal load detected signal ABTQSV f f F090#1 First-spindle abnormal load detected signal ABTSP1 f f 2 10 2.10 F090#2 Seco
  • Page 2248A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F130#5 Positive-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) EOTPA f f F130#6 Negative-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) EOTNA f f Axis control command read completion signal (
  • Page 2249B–63523EN–1/03 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item F140#0 Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control) EMFD f f F140#1 Buffer full signal (PMC axis control) EABUFD f f 15.1 F141,F151 Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control) EM
  • Page 2250A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63523EN–1/03 T M Referen Address Signal name Symbol series series ce Item Flexible synchronization control mode select signal MFSYNA to F197#0 to #3 – f 1.15 switching accepted signals MFSYND F208 EGB mode confirmation signal EGBM1 to EGBM8 – f 1.14.4 F264#0 to #7,
  • Page 2251B–63523EN–1/03 Index ƠSymbolsơ Butt–type reference position setting, 566 αi Servo warning interface, 2008 ƠCơ ƠNumbersơ Canned cycle (M series)/canned cycle for drilling (T series), 1453 2nd reference position return/3rd, 4th reference position return, Canned cycle (T series)/multiple repetitive can
  • Page 2252INDEX B–63523EN–1/03 DHCP/DNS functions, 1950 Expanded external workpiece number search, 1854 Direct operation by PMC or OPEN CNC, 1870 Exponential interpolation (M series), 742 Direction–sensitive high–speed position switch, 39 Extended bidirectional pitch error compensation, 77 Display data on the
  • Page 2253B–63523EN–1/03 INDEX Graphic display/dynamic graphic display/background graphic, 1540 ƠLơ Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation, 952 Linear acceleration/deceleration before cutting feed ƠHơ interpolation, 959 Linear interpolation, 670 Handle–synchronous feed, 509, 525 Lin
  • Page 2254INDEX B–63523EN–1/03 NC program output, 1932 Program configuration, 1331 No. of registered programs, 1636 Program copy between two paths, 1645 Normal direction control (M series), 736 Program restart, 644 Notes on interface with the PMC, 1148 Notes on using the FACTOLINK function for the first time,
  • Page 2255B–63523EN–1/03 INDEX Setting the reference position without dogs, 546 Synchronous control, 177 Settings, 1952 Synchronous control (T series), 164 Settings of CNC, 1973 Synchronous control and composite control (T series (two–path control)), 174 Settings related to servo–controlled axes, 90 Settings
  • Page 2256INDEX B–63523EN–1/03 Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network, 1908 ƠWơ Using the FTP file transfer function on a small network, 1915 Waiting M code (two–path control), 995 Warning Interface for the αi Spindle, 2010 Waveform diagnosis display, 1529 ƠVơ When M29 is specified before G84 (
  • Page 2257Revision Record FANUCĄSeriesĄ16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B–63523EN–1) D Addition of Series 20i–MODEL B D Addition of signals 03 Sep., 2004 D Addition of parameters D Addition of functions D Addition of Series 160is/180is/210is–MODEL B D Addition
  • Page 2258
  • Page 2259FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/ 21i/210i/210is/20i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) About the addition of the "high speed manual reference position return" 1. Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/ Name 21i/210i/210is/20i-MODEL B CONNECTION MA
  • Page 2260The "high speed manual reference position return" is added in the "4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN" of "4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT". (Page. 518) 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN HIGH SPEED MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN In the manual reference
  • Page 2261Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0002 SJZ Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit SJZ Manual reference position return is performed as follows: 0 : When no reference position has been set, reference position return is performed using deceleration dogs. When a reference position is already set,
  • Page 2262FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is/20i - MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) About the “1% step rapid traverse override” description change 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i
  • Page 2263The description of “7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal” is changed as follows. General • 1% step rapid traverse override 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV determines whether rapid traverse override specified with rapid traverse overri
  • Page 2264The description of “1% step rapid traverse override selection signal” is changed as follows. 1% step rapid traverse overrde selection signal HROV [Classification] Input signal [Function] Select the rapid traverse override signals or the 1% step rapid traverse override signals. [Operation] W
  • Page 2265TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No.TMN 05/ Date : . , 2005 General Manager of Software Development Laboratory FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is/20i - MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) About the “FSSB Setting” description addi
  • Page 2266FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is/21i/210i/210is/20i - MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) About the “FSSB Setting” description addition 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i - MODEL A F
  • Page 2267The description of “1.4.3 FSSB Setting Manual setting 1” is changed as follows. General By manual setting 1, the value set for parameter No.1023 when the power is switched on is regarded as a slave number. Specifically, an axis for which parameter No.1023 is set to 1 is connected to the amplifier ne